KYOCERA 4002i/5002i/6002i Guide

KYOCERA 4002i/5002i/6002i Guide
PRINT
4002i
5002i
6002i
COPY
SCAN
FAX
OPERATION GUIDE
> Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take
simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies.
Please use our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality control testing.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.
We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number
before contacting your Service Representative.
i
Contents
Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i
Contents .................................................................................................................................. ii
Overview ................................................................................................................................ xi
Machine Features ................................................................................................................. xii
Color and Image Quality Functions .................................................................................. xvii
Basic Color Modes ..................................................................................................... xvii
Adjusting Image Quality and Color............................................................................. xviii
Guides Provided with the Machine .................................................................................... xix
About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ........................................................................... xxi
Structure of the guide .................................................................................................. xxi
Conventions Used in This Guide................................................................................ xxii
Menu Map ............................................................................................................................ xxv
1
Legal and Safety Information ................................................................... 1-1
Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2
Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ........................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ...................................... 1-7
Compliance and Conformity ...................................................................................... 1-7
Radio Tag Technology .............................................................................................. 1-7
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................... 1-7
Warranty (the United States and Canada) ................................................................ 1-8
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning .................................................................... 1-9
EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................. 1-9
EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................ 1-9
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ........................................................................... 1-9
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................. 1-9
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................... 1-10
Legal Information .................................................................................................... 1-11
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-17
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-17
Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-17
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-17
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-17
2
Installing and Setting up the Machine ..................................................... 2-1
Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................ 2-2
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) .................................................................................... 2-4
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ........................................................ 2-5
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-6
Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-7
Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-7
Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-8
Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-8
Power On/Off ..................................................................................................................... 2-9
Power On .................................................................................................................. 2-9
Power Off .................................................................................................................. 2-9
Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-10
Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-10
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ...................................................................... 2-11
Assigning Functions to Function Keys .................................................................... 2-12
Touch Panel ..................................................................................................................... 2-14
Home Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-14
ii
Display for Device Information ................................................................................
Display Setting Screen ............................................................................................
Functions Key .........................................................................................................
Using the Screen .....................................................................................................
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set .......................................................................
Original Preview ......................................................................................................
Entering Numbers ...................................................................................................
Using the Enter Key ................................................................................................
Using the Quick No. Search Key .............................................................................
Help Screen ............................................................................................................
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View) ........................................................
Login/Logout ...................................................................................................................
Login .......................................................................................................................
Logout .....................................................................................................................
Default Settings of the Machine .....................................................................................
Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................
Network Setup .................................................................................................................
Configuring the Wired Network ...............................................................................
Configuring the Wireless Network ...........................................................................
Setting Wi-Fi Direct .................................................................................................
Configuring NFC .....................................................................................................
Energy Saver Function ...................................................................................................
Low Power Mode ....................................................................................................
Sleep .......................................................................................................................
Auto Sleep ...............................................................................................................
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe) ........................................
Energy Saver Recovery Level .................................................................................
Weekly Timer Settings ............................................................................................
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) .....................................................................
Quick Setup Wizard .........................................................................................................
Installing Software ..........................................................................................................
Software on DVD (Windows) ..................................................................................
Installing Software in Windows ...............................................................................
Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................
Installing Software in Mac Computer ......................................................................
Setting TWAIN Driver ..............................................................................................
Setting WIA Driver ...................................................................................................
Checking the Counter .....................................................................................................
Additional Preparations for the Administrator .............................................................
Sending Documents to a PC ...................................................................................
Strengthening the Security ......................................................................................
Command Center RX ......................................................................................................
Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................
Changing Security Settings .....................................................................................
Changing Device Information ..................................................................................
E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................
Registering Destinations .........................................................................................
Creating a New Custom Box ...................................................................................
Printing a document stored in a Custom Box ..........................................................
Transferring Data from Our Other Products .................................................................
Migrating the Address Book ....................................................................................
3
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-20
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-32
2-36
2-38
2-39
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-40
2-40
2-40
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-45
2-45
2-46
2-51
2-53
2-55
2-57
2-58
2-59
2-59
2-59
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-64
2-65
2-69
2-70
2-71
2-73
2-73
Preparation before Use ............................................................................. 3-1
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................
Precaution for Loading Paper ...................................................................................
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units .............................................................................
Loading in Cassette 1 ...............................................................................................
Loading in Cassette 2 ...............................................................................................
iii
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-7
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes .................................................
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ....................................................................
Loading in the Side Feeder .....................................................................................
Precautions for Outputting Paper ..................................................................................
Paper Stopper .........................................................................................................
Envelope Stack Guide .............................................................................................
Stack Level Adjuster ...............................................................................................
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ..............................
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ...............................
Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................
Configuring Windows Firewall .................................................................................
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................
Adding a Destination (Address Book) .....................................................................
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ....................................
4
3-10
3-14
3-16
3-18
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-25
3-30
3-30
3-37
Printing from PC ........................................................................................ 4-1
Printer Driver Properties Screen ............................................................................... 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................. 4-3
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) .................................... 4-3
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-4
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-4
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-6
Banner Printing ......................................................................................................... 4-9
Canceling Printing from a Computer ....................................................................... 4-15
Printing from the Handheld Device ............................................................................... 4-16
Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing by Google Cloud Print ................................................................................ 4-16
Printing by Mopria ................................................................................................... 4-16
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ......................................................................................... 4-16
Printing with NFC .................................................................................................... 4-17
Printing Data Saved in the Printer ................................................................................. 4-18
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-18
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-19
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 4-19
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-20
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 4-20
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-21
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 4-21
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-22
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 4-22
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ............................................................ 4-23
Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-23
Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-23
Quick View State ..................................................................................................... 4-23
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-24
Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-24
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-24
Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-25
Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-25
Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-26
5
Operation on the Machine ........................................................................ 5-1
Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-3
iv
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ....................................................................... 5-6
Program ............................................................................................................................ 5-10
Registering Programs ............................................................................................. 5-11
Recalling Programs ................................................................................................. 5-11
Editing Programs ..................................................................................................... 5-12
Deleting Programs .................................................................................................. 5-12
Application ....................................................................................................................... 5-13
Installing Applications .............................................................................................. 5-13
Activating Applications ............................................................................................ 5-14
Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................ 5-15
Uninstalling Applications ......................................................................................... 5-15
Registering Shortcuts
(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) .................................................................. 5-16
Adding Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-16
Editing Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-17
Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 5-17
Copying ............................................................................................................................ 5-18
Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-18
Proof Copy .............................................................................................................. 5-20
Interrupt Copy ......................................................................................................... 5-21
Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-21
Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................. 5-22
Sending Document via E-mail ........................................................................................ 5-23
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-23
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-23
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............. 5-24
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-24
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer ................................ 5-24
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ................................... 5-27
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-27
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server ..................................................... 5-27
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ...................................................................................... 5-29
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-29
Scanning Document Using Application ................................................................... 5-29
Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box .............................................................. 5-30
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-30
Scanning Document Stored in a Box ...................................................................... 5-30
Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................. 5-31
WSD Scan ........................................................................................................................ 5-32
Installing the Driver ................................................................................................. 5-32
Executing WSD scan .............................................................................................. 5-33
DSM Scan ......................................................................................................................... 5-35
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-35
Executing DSM Scan .............................................................................................. 5-35
Scanning with File Management Utility ......................................................................... 5-37
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-37
Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original ........................................................... 5-37
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ....................................... 5-38
Send to Me (E-mail) ......................................................................................................... 5-39
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-39
Sending a Document to the Mail Address of the Logged In User ........................... 5-39
Canceling Sending Jobs ................................................................................................. 5-40
Handling Destination ...................................................................................................... 5-41
Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-41
Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-41
Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-43
Choosing from the Speed Dial ................................................................................ 5-43
Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-44
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-45
Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-46
v
How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................
Using Document Boxes ..................................................................................................
What is Custom Box? ..............................................................................................
What is Job Box? ....................................................................................................
What is Removable Memory Box? ..........................................................................
Fax Box ...................................................................................................................
Basic Operation for Document Box .........................................................................
Creating a New Custom Box ...................................................................................
Editing Custom Box .................................................................................................
Deleting Custom Box ..............................................................................................
Storing Documents to a Custom Box ......................................................................
Printing Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................
Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box .......................................................
Sending Documents in Custom Box .......................................................................
Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address of Logged In User. ...........
Moving Documents in Custom Box .........................................................................
Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes ............................................
Copying Documents in Custom Box to Removable Memory ..................................
Joining Documents in Custom Box .........................................................................
Deleting Documents in Custom Box .......................................................................
Job Box ............................................................................................................................
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs .................................................................................
Form for Form Overlay ............................................................................................
Operating using Removable USB Memory ...................................................................
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ........................................
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ................................................
Check the USB Memory Information .......................................................................
Removing USB Memory ..........................................................................................
Using the Internet Browser ............................................................................................
Launching and Exiting the Browser .........................................................................
Using the Browser Screen ......................................................................................
Manual Staple ..................................................................................................................
6
5-47
5-48
5-48
5-48
5-49
5-49
5-49
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-55
5-56
5-57
5-57
5-58
5-60
5-60
5-61
5-61
5-62
5-63
5-63
5-63
5-65
5-65
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-69
5-69
5-70
5-71
Using Various Functions .......................................................................... 6-1
Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2
About Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................... 6-2
How to Select Functions ........................................................................................... 6-2
Copy .......................................................................................................................... 6-2
Send .......................................................................................................................... 6-5
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) ................................................................... 6-8
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) ............................................ 6-14
Functions ......................................................................................................................... 6-17
Original Size ............................................................................................................ 6-18
Paper Selection ....................................................................................................... 6-19
Mixed Size Originals ............................................................................................... 6-20
Original Orientation ................................................................................................. 6-23
Fold ......................................................................................................................... 6-24
Collate/Offset .......................................................................................................... 6-25
Staple/Punch ........................................................................................................... 6-26
Paper Output ........................................................................................................... 6-30
Density .................................................................................................................... 6-31
Original Image ......................................................................................................... 6-31
EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-32
Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-32
Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-33
Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-33
Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) .................................. 6-34
Prevent Bleed-thru .................................................................................................. 6-34
Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-35
vi
Combine ..................................................................................................................
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering ......................................................................
Border Erase ...........................................................................................................
Booklet ....................................................................................................................
Duplex .....................................................................................................................
Cover .......................................................................................................................
Form Overlay ..........................................................................................................
Erase Shadowed Areas ..........................................................................................
Page # .....................................................................................................................
Insert Sheets/Chapters ...........................................................................................
Memo Page .............................................................................................................
Image Repeat ..........................................................................................................
Text Stamp ..............................................................................................................
Bates Stamp ............................................................................................................
Continuous Scan .....................................................................................................
Auto Image Rotation ...............................................................................................
Negative Image .......................................................................................................
Mirror Image ............................................................................................................
Job Finish Notice .....................................................................................................
File Name Entry ......................................................................................................
Priority Override ......................................................................................................
Repeat Copy ...........................................................................................................
DP Read Action .......................................................................................................
Skip Blank Page ......................................................................................................
2-sided/Book Original, Book Original ......................................................................
Sending Size ...........................................................................................................
File Format ..............................................................................................................
File Separation ........................................................................................................
Scan Resolution ......................................................................................................
E-mail Subject/Body ................................................................................................
Send and Print ........................................................................................................
Send and Store .......................................................................................................
FTP Encrypted TX ...................................................................................................
File Size Confirmation .............................................................................................
Delete after Printed .................................................................................................
Delete after Transmitted ..........................................................................................
Storing Size .............................................................................................................
Long Original ...........................................................................................................
Encrypted PDF Password .......................................................................................
JPEG/TIFF Print ......................................................................................................
XPS Fit to Page .......................................................................................................
7
6-38
6-40
6-41
6-43
6-46
6-49
6-50
6-51
6-51
6-53
6-54
6-56
6-57
6-60
6-63
6-63
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-65
6-65
6-66
6-67
6-67
6-68
6-69
6-70
6-74
6-74
6-75
6-75
6-75
6-76
6-76
6-76
6-76
6-77
6-77
6-78
6-78
6-78
Status/Job Cancel ..................................................................................... 7-1
Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................... 7-3
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ..................................................................... 7-8
Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-9
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ....................................................... 7-10
Sending the Log History .......................................................................................... 7-10
Job Operation .................................................................................................................. 7-11
Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................. 7-11
Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................... 7-11
Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................. 7-12
vii
Device/Communication ................................................................................................... 7-13
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ................... 7-14
8
Setup and Registration (System Menu) .................................................. 8-1
System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method ..................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-4
Counter ..................................................................................................................... 8-7
Cassette/MP Tray Settings ....................................................................................... 8-7
Common Settings .................................................................................................... 8-10
Home ....................................................................................................................... 8-31
Copy ........................................................................................................................ 8-32
Send ........................................................................................................................ 8-33
Document Box/Removable Memory ....................................................................... 8-38
FAX ......................................................................................................................... 8-39
Printer ...................................................................................................................... 8-39
Report ..................................................................................................................... 8-42
System/Network ...................................................................................................... 8-47
Edit Destination ....................................................................................................... 8-65
User Login/Job Accounting ..................................................................................... 8-66
User Property .......................................................................................................... 8-66
Date/Timer/Energy Saver ........................................................................................ 8-66
Adjustment/Maintenance ......................................................................................... 8-70
Internet .................................................................................................................... 8-72
Application ............................................................................................................... 8-73
9
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) .. 9-1
Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2
Managing the Job Account from PC ......................................................................... 9-2
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning ..................................................... 9-2
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning .......................................................... 9-2
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC ......................................................... 9-2
Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3
Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-5
Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-5
Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-8
Changing User Properties ....................................................................................... 9-11
User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................... 9-14
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ............................................................ 9-15
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ................................................................. 9-16
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................... 9-17
Local Authorization .................................................................................................. 9-18
Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................. 9-19
Guest Authorization Set. ......................................................................................... 9-22
Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-25
Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................. 9-27
ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-30
PIN Code Authorization ........................................................................................... 9-31
Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-32
Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-32
Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-33
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................... 9-33
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN ................................................. 9-33
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA ...................................................... 9-33
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC ...................................................... 9-33
Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-34
Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-35
viii
Job Accounting (Local) ..................................................................................................
Adding an Account ..................................................................................................
Restricting the Use of the Machine .........................................................................
Editing an Account ..................................................................................................
Deleting an Account ................................................................................................
Job Accounting for Printing .....................................................................................
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN ..................................................................
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA .......................................................................
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer ....................................
Configuring Job Accounting ..........................................................................................
Default Setting .........................................................................................................
Counting the Number of Pages Printed ..................................................................
Print Accounting Report ..........................................................................................
Using Job Accounting ....................................................................................................
Login/Logout ...........................................................................................................
Apply Limit .......................................................................................................................
Copy/Printer Count .........................................................................................................
Unknown User Settings ..................................................................................................
Unknown ID Job ......................................................................................................
Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown .......................................
10
9-36
9-36
9-38
9-39
9-40
9-41
9-42
9-43
9-44
9-45
9-45
9-47
9-49
9-50
9-50
9-51
9-52
9-53
9-53
9-54
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 10-1
Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning Glass Platen ............................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning inside of the Document Processor ........................................................... 10-2
Cleaning Slit Grass ................................................................................................. 10-3
Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-4
Replace the Waste Toner Box ................................................................................ 10-7
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 10-9
Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher) ........................................................................ 10-10
Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................ 10-12
Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................ 10-13
Replacing Staples (Folding Unit) ........................................................................... 10-15
Disposing of the Punch Waste .............................................................................. 10-17
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 10-23
Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................. 10-23
Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................... 10-23
Printed Image Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-28
Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-30
Adjustment/Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-46
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................... 10-46
Tone Curve Adjustment ........................................................................................ 10-46
Drum Refresh ........................................................................................................ 10-48
Calibration ............................................................................................................. 10-48
Laser Scanner Cleaning ........................................................................................ 10-48
Developer Refresh ................................................................................................ 10-49
Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................... 10-50
Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 10-50
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ............................................................ 10-51
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ............................................................ 10-54
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) ........................... 10-57
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-59
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-61
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) ..................................... 10-64
Remove any jammed paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ......................................... 10-66
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1 ....................................................... 10-67
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) ................................ 10-71
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ............................. 10-72
ix
Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit ..................................................... 10-74
Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox ........................................................... 10-75
Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher ................................................. 10-76
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) .... 10-77
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Dual Scan) .................. 10-79
Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet Finisher ...................................... 10-80
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) ........................... 10-83
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) ........................ 10-84
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) ........................ 10-88
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit .................................................... 10-91
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray ................................................... 10-96
Clearing a Staple Jam ................................................................................................. 10-101
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Inner Finisher ........................................................ 10-101
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................ 10-103
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 4,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................ 10-106
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit ........................................................... 10-108
11
Appendix .................................................................................................. 11-1
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2
Optional Applications .............................................................................................. 11-8
Starting Application Use .......................................................................................... 11-8
Checking Details of Application ............................................................................... 11-9
Character Entry Method ................................................................................................ 11-10
Entry Screens ........................................................................................................ 11-10
Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-12
Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-13
Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-13
Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-14
Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-16
Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-20
Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-20
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-22
Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-22
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 11-23
Document Processor ............................................................................................. 11-23
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................. 11-24
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................... 11-24
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) .................................................................................... 11-24
Inner Finisher ........................................................................................................ 11-25
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) ............................................................................. 11-25
1,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-25
4,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-26
Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................. 11-27
Mailbox .................................................................................................................. 11-27
Folding Unit ........................................................................................................... 11-27
Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................... 11-28
Banner Tray .......................................................................................................... 11-28
Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-30
Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1
x
> Overview
Overview
Input Data
Original
Electronic data
Security
USB memory
Fax data
You can apply the various machine security
levels to your specific needs.
Strengthen security (page xiv)
Application
You can expand the machine functions
according to your needs.
Operations from your PC
Application (page 5-13)
Document Box functions
Command Center RX
You can check the status and change
the settings of the machine from a
Web browser on your computer.
This function serves a variety of
purposes, including saving data in the
machine and on a USB memory stick.
Command Center RX (page 2-61)
Printing Data Saved in the Printer
(page 4-18)
Command Center RX User
Guide
Creating a New Custom Box
(page 5-53)
Output Data
Copy functions
Printer functions
Copying (page 5-18)
Printing from PC (page 4-1)
Send functions
Frequently-Used
Sending Method
(page 5-22)
USB memory
Saving Documents
to USB Memory
(Scan to USB)
(page 5-67)
Fax functions
FAX
Operation
Guide
NOTE
• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:
Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)
• To prepare the device for use, including setting up cable connections and installing software.
Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)
• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:
Preparation before Use (page 3-1)
xi
> Machine Features
Machine Features
The machine is equipped with many useful functions.
Using Various Functions (page 6-1)
Here are some examples.
Optimize your office workflow
Access to frequently used
functions with just one touch
(Favorites)
Interrupt other running jobs and
execute your copy job immediately
(Interrupt Copy)
You can preset frequently used
functions.
You can interrupt other running jobs
and execute your copy job
immediately. When other users are
copying a large number of sheets,
this function allows you to interrupt
those jobs and make your copies
immediately.
Once you register frequently used
settings as favorite, you can call up
the settings easily. Using this favorite
brings the same results even if
operated by another person.
Program (page 5-10)
When the interruption copy ends, the
machine resumes the paused print
jobs.
Interrupt Copy (page 5-21)
Check the finishing before copying
a large number of sheets
(Proof Copy)
It is possible to copy one sheet
before copying a large number of
sheets. This enables you to check the
contents and finishing and copy the
desired number of sheets without
scanning the original again if you are
satisfied with the result. If you want to
make changes, you can change the
settings and copy only one sheet
again.
Proof Copy (page 5-20)
Optimize your office workflow
Scan originals of different sizes at
a time (Mixed Size Originals)
Scan a large number of originals in
separate batches and produce as
one job (Continuous Scan)
1
1~10
It is useful when preparing
conference materials.
You can set the different sized
originals at one time so you don't
need to reset the originals regardless
of size.
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)
11
11~20
21
21~30
Send one time with multiple
sending options (Multi Sending)
1
1~30
It is useful when preparing manypage handouts.
When a large number of originals
cannot be placed in the document
processor at one time, the originals
can be scanned in separate batches
and then copied or sent as one job.
Continuous Scan (page 6-63)
You can send a same document to
the multiple destinations using a
different method.
You can specify multiple destinations
of different send methods such as Email, SMB, and Fax.
You can reduce your workflow by
sending a job at once.
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending)
(page 5-38)
xii
> Machine Features
Optimize your office workflow
Save energy and cost
Save frequently used documents
in the machine (Custom Box)
Save energy as needed
(Energy Saver function)
On
You can save the frequently used
document in the machine and print it
when needed.
Creating a New Custom Box
(page 5-53)
Reduce paper use
(Paper Saving Printing)
Off
The machine is equipped with Energy
Saver function that automatically
switched into Low Power Mode or
Sleep Mode. You can set appropriate
Energy Saver Recovery Level
depending on the operation.
You can print originals on both sides
of the paper. You can also print
multiple originals onto one sheet.
Program (page 5-10)
In addition, set the machine to
automatically turn OFF and recovered
at a specified time for each day of the
week.
Energy Saver Function
(page 2-39)
Save energy and cost
Create attractive documents
Skip blank pages when printing
(Skip Blank Page)
Prevent image bleed-through
(Prevent Bleed-through)
Erase the extra shaded area
(Erase Shadowed Areas)
When there are blank pages in a
scanned document, this function
skips the blank pages and prints only
pages that are not blank.
You can prevent image bleed-through
from the reverse side when scanning
thin originals.
When scanning with the document
processor or original cover open,
erase the extra shaded area.
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-34)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-67)
xiii
Erase Shadowed Areas
(page 6-51)
> Machine Features
Create attractive documents
Create a booklet (Booklet)
Print a stamp on copies (Text Stamp / Bates Stamp)
It is useful when preparing handout. You can create a
magazine, pamphlet, or other booklet from sheet
originals.
It is useful when adding text or date that is not included in
originals.
You can add desired text and date as a stamp.
Facing-page, two-sided copies of originals can be folded
down the center to create a booklet.
Text Stamp (page 6-57)
Bates Stamp (page 6-60)
The cover page can be printed onto colored paper or
heavy paper.
Booklet (page 6-43)
Strengthen security
Password-protect a PDF file
(PDF Encryption Functions)
Protect data on the hard disk/SSD
(Encryption / Overwrite)
Prevent loss of finished
documents (Private Print)
Use the PDF format's password
security options to restrict document
viewing, printing and editing.
You can overwrite the unnecessary
data that remains on the hard disk/
SSD automatically.
Temporarily saving print jobs in the
main unit document box and
outputting them when in front of the
device can prevent documents from
being taken by others.
Encrypted PDF Password
(page 6-78)
To prevent an external leakage, the
machine is able to encrypt data
before writing it to the hard disk/SSD.
Data Security (page 8-62)
xiv
Printing Data Saved in the Printer
(page 4-18)
> Machine Features
Strengthen security
Use functions more efficiently
Log in by ID card
(Card Authentication)
Strengthen security
(Settings for Administrator)
Expand functions as necessary
(Application)
Various functions are available for
administrators to strengthen security.
The functionality of the machine can
be expanded by installing
applications.
OK !
You can log in simply by touching an
ID card. You don't need to enter your
user name and password.
Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card
Authentication Kit" (page 11-6)
Strengthening the Security
(page 2-59)
Applications that help you perform
your daily more efficiently such as a
scan feature and an authentication
feature are available.
Application (page 5-13)
Use functions more efficiently
Display file size before sending /
storing a job
(File Size Confirmation)
Install the machine without
concerning the network cables
(Wireless Network)
Use USB memory
(USB Memory)
1 MB
You can check the file size before
sending/storing the document.
If your server specifies an e-mail size
limit, you can check and change the
size in advance.
File Size Confirmation
(page 6-76)
If there is a wireless LAN
environment, it is possible to install
the unit without worrying about the
network wiring. In addition, Wi-Fi
Direct, etc. are supported.
Configuring the Wireless Network
(page 2-32)
Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-36)
Configuring NFC (page 2-38)
It is useful when you need to print
documents outside your office or you
cannot print documents from your
PC.
You can print the document from the
USB memory by plugging it directly
into the machine.
Original scanned at the machine can
be saved in the USB memory also.
Printing Documents Stored in
Removable USB Memory
(page 5-65)
Saving Documents to USB
Memory (Scan to USB)
(page 5-67)
xv
> Machine Features
Use functions more efficiently
Specify image file format
(File Format)
Scan the long originals
(Long Original)
Skip the error job
(Job Skip Functions)
You can select the various file
formats when sending/storing
images.
You can scan the long originals such
as Contract and Data log.
When paper empty error occurs at
the cassette by specifying the special
paper size or type, the machine skips
the error job and perform the next
job.
Long Original (page 6-77)
File Format (page 6-70)
Error Job Skip (page 8-67)
Use functions more efficiently
Perform remote operation
(Command Center RX)
You can access to the machine
remotely to print, send or download
data.
Administrators can configure the
machine behavior or management
settings.
Command Center RX
(page 2-61)
xvi
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Color and Image Quality Functions
The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.
Basic Color Modes
The basic color modes are as follows.
Color mode
Color/Gray
Reference image
Description
Before
After
Reference
page
page 6-32
Color/B & W
Automatically recognizes whether a
document being scanned is color or
black & white.
Full Color
Scans a document in full color.
page 6-32
Grayscale
Scans a document in grayscale.
page 6-32
Black & White
Scans a document in black & white.
page 6-32
For details, refer to the following:
Color Selection (page 6-32)
xvii
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Adjusting Image Quality and Color
To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.
I want to...
Sample image
Before
After
Function
Page
Easily adjust the image quality to match your own image
Remove dark background or
bleed-through from the original
such as a newspaper.
Program
Clearly reproduce fine lines, faint
lines, broken lines, and other fine
details in a CAD or other
drawings.
Program
page 5-10
[Newspaper Copy]
page 5-10
[Drawing Copy]
Adjust the image quality precisely
Adjust the density.
Density
page 6-31
Emphasize or blur the image
outline.
Sharpness
page 6-33
Adjust the difference between
dark and light parts of the image.
Contrast
page 6-33
Darken or lighten the background
(the area with no texts or images)
of a document.
Background Density
page 6-34
Prevent Bleedthrough
page 6-34
Decrease the file size and
produce the characters clearly.
File format
page 6-70
Convert a paper document to PDF
with searchable text.
File format [PDF] or
[High Comp. PDF]
with [OCR]
Example: Emphasize the image
outlines
Example: Lightening the
background
Prevent bleed-through in 2-sided
originals.
Adjust the scanned image
[High Comp. PDF]
xviii
page 6-70
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides Provided with the Machine
The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.
The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine
performance.
Printed Guides
Start using the
machine quickly
Quick Guide
Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient
features, how to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems
occur.
Safety Guide
For safe use of the
machine
Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of
the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
Safety Guide (4002i/5002i/6002i)
Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the
cautionary labels and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before
using the machine.
xix
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)
Use the machine
thoughtfully
Use the fax functions
Use the ID card
Operation Guide (This Guide)
Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and
indicates default settings and other information.
FAX Operation Guide
Explains how to use the fax function.
Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide
Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.
Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
Strengthen security
Explains how to introduce and use the Data Security kit (E), and how to overwrite and
encrypt data.
Easily register
machine information
and configure settings
Command Center RX User Guide
Print data from a
computer
Printer Driver User Guide
Directly print a PDF file
Monitor the machine
and printers on the
network
Scan images and save
with information
Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to
check and change settings.
Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.
KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide
Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with
KYOCERA Net Viewer.
File Management Utility User Guide
Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send
and save scanned documents.
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference
Print without using the
printer driver
Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of
emulation.
Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.
Version 8.0 or later
xx
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Structure of the guide
The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter
Contents
1
Legal and Safety Information
Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.
2
Installing and Setting up the
Machine
Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login,
logout, and other matters related to administration of the machine.
3
Preparation before Use
Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the
machine, such as how to load paper and create an address book.
4
Printing from PC
Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.
5
Operation on the Machine
Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals,
making copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.
6
Using Various Functions
Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.
7
Status/Job Cancel
Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel
jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and
toner levels, how to check the device status, and how to cancel fax
transmission.
8
Setup and Registration
(System Menu)
Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.
9
User Authentication and
Accounting (User Login,
Job Accounting)
Explains user login and job accounting.
10
Troubleshooting
Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam
or other problem occurs.
11
Appendix
Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides
information on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms.
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.
xxi
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions Used in This Guide
Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.
Click an item in the Table of
Contents to jump to the
corresponding page.
Click to move from the current page to the previously
displayed page. This is convenient when you want to
return to the page from which you jumped to the
current page.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational
requirements and restrictions to
operate the machine correctly,
and avoid damage to the
machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates supplemental
explanations and reference
information for operations.
Refer to
Click the underlined text to jump
to the corresponding page.
CAUTION
Indicates that personal injury or
mechanical damage may result
from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the
related points.
NOTE
The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not
appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.
Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.
Convention
Description
[Bold]
Indicates keys and buttons.
"Regular"
Indicates a message or setting.
xxii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions Used in Procedures for Operating the Machine
In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:
Actual procedure
Procedure indicated in this guide
Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] >
[Sound]

Select [
].

Select [Common Settings].

Select [Sound].
Select [Next] of "Job Accounting Settings".
"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting"
[Change]
User Login/Job Accounting
User Login Setting:
Next
Unknown User Settings:
Next
Job Accounting Setting:
Next
Close
m020168
Status

Select [Change] of "Job Accounting ".
User Login/Job Accounting - Job Accounting Setting
Job Accounting:
Change
Job Accounting Access:
Change
Job Accounting (Local):
Next
Apply Limit:
Change
Copy/Printer Count:
Change
Close
Status
m020174
xxiii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Size and Orientation of Originals and Paper
Original sizes and paper sizes such as A4, B5, and Letter can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To
distinguish the orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the horizontal orientation. In
addition, the following icons are used to indicate original and paper placement orientations on the touch panel.
Orientation
Vertical
orientation
Setting Position
(X=Length, Y=Width)
Icons on the touch
panel
Original
Indicated size in this
Guide*1
A4, B5, Letter .etc
Original
Original
Paper
Paper
Paper
Horizontal
orientation
(-R)
Original
A4-R, B5-R, Letter-R
.etc
Original
Original
Paper
Paper
Paper
*1 Original/paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the
following.
Specifications (page 11-20)
xxiv
> Menu Map
Menu Map
This is a list of menus displayed on the touch panel. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.
Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.
Copy
Org./Paper/Finishing
Original Size (page 6-18)
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)
Original Orientation (page 6-23)
Collate/Offset (page 6-25)
Fold (page 6-24)
Staple/Punch
Staple (page 6-26)
Punch (page 6-28)
Paper Output (page 6-30)
Image Quality
Density (page 6-31)
Original Image (page 6-31)
EcoPrint (page 6-32)
Sharpness (page 6-33)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-34)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-34)
Contrast (page 6-33)
xxv
> Menu Map
Layout/Edit
Zoom (page 6-35)
Combine (page 6-38)
Margin/Centering (page 6-38)
Border Erase (page 6-41)
Booklet (page 6-43)
Duplex (page 6-46)
Form Overlay (page 6-50)
Erase Shadowed Area (page 6-51)
Page # (page 6-51)
Cover (page 6-49)
Insert Sheets/Chapters (page 6-53)
Image Repeat (page 6-56)
Text Stamp (page 6-57)
Bates Stamp (page 6-60)
Memo Page (page 6-54)
Advanced Setup
Continuous Scan (page 6-63)
Auto Image Rotation (page 6-63)
Negative Image (page 6-64)
Mirror Image (page 6-64)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-64)
File Name Entry (page 6-65)
Priority Override (page 6-65)
Repeat Copy (page 6-66)
DP Read Action (page 6-67)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-67)
Program (page 5-10)
xxvi
> Menu Map
Send
Destination
Address Book (page 5-41)
E-mail Addr Entry (page 5-23)
Folder Path Entry (page 5-24, page 5-27)
FAX No. Entry (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
i-FAX Address Entry (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
WSD Scan (page 5-32) / DSM Scan (page 5-35)
Org./Sending Data Format
Original Size (page 6-18)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)
2-sided/Book Original, Book Original (page 6-68)
Original Orientation (page 6-23)
Sending Size (page 6-69)
File Format (page 6-70)
File Separation (page 6-74)
Long Original (page 6-77)
Color/Image Quality
Density (page 6-31)
Original Image (page 6-31)
Scan Resolution (page 6-74)
FAX TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Color Selection (page 6-32)
Sharpness (page 6-33)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-34)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-34)
Contrast (page 6-33)
xxvii
> Menu Map
Advanced Setup
Zoom (page 6-35)
Centering (page 6-38)
Border Erase (page 6-41)
FAX Delayed Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Continuous Scan (page 6-63)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-64)
Erase Shadowed Area (page 6-51)
File Name Entry (page 6-65)
i-FAX Subject/Body (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
FAX Direct Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
FAX Polling RX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Send and Print (page 6-75)
Send and Store (page 6-75)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-76)
Text Stamp (page 6-57)
Bates Stamp (page 6-60)
File Size Confirmation (page 6-76)
FAX TX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-67)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-75)
Program (page 5-10)
xxviii
> Menu Map
Custom Box
Custom Box
Store File
Functions
Original Size (page 6-18)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)
2-sided/Book Original, Book Original (page 6-68)
Original Orientation (page 6-23)
Storing Size (page 6-77)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-34)
Density (page 6-31)
Original Image (page 6-31)
Scan Resolution (page 6-74)
Color Selection (page 6-32)
Sharpness (page 6-33)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-34)
Zoom (page 6-35)
Centering (page 6-38)
Border Erase (page 6-41)
Continuous Scan (page 6-63)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-64)
File Name Entry (page 6-65)
Erase Shadowed Area (page 6-51)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-67)
Contrast (page 6-33)
Program (page 5-10)
Detail (page 5-49)
xxix
> Menu Map
Custom Box
Open
Print
Functions
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Collate/Offset (page 6-25)
Staple/Punch
(page 6-26)
Staple (page 6-26)
Punch (page 6-28)
Paper Output (page 6-30)
Combine (page 6-38)
Margin/Centering (page 6-40)
Booklet (page 6-43)
Duplex (page 6-46)
Cover (page 6-49)
Form Overlay (page 6-50)
Page # (page 6-51)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-64)
File Name Entry (page 6-65)
Delete after Printed (page 6-76)
Priority Override (page 6-65)
EcoPrint (page 6-32)
Zoom (page 6-35)
Fold (page 6-24)
Text Stamp (page 6-57)
Bates Stamp (page 6-60)
Image
Quality
Density (page 6-31)
Original Image (page 6-31)
Sharpness (page 6-33)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-34)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-34)
Contrast (page 6-33)
Program (page 5-10)
xxx
> Menu Map
Custom Box
Open
Send
Destination (page 5-41)
Functions
Sending Size (page 6-69)
File Format (page 6-70)
FAX TX Resolution
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Centering (page 6-38)
FAX Delayed Transmission
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-64)
File Name Entry (page 6-65)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-75)
i-FAX Subject/Body
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-76)
Delete after Transmitted (page 6-76)
Zoom (page 6-35)
File Separation (page 6-74)
Text Stamp (page 6-57)
Bates Stamp (page 6-60)
File Size Confirmation (page 6-76)
FAX TX Report
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Color/Image
Quality
Density (page 6-31)
Original Image (page 6-31)
Resolution (page 6-74)
Color Selection (page 6-32)
Sharpness (page 6-33)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-34)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-34)
Contrast (page 6-33)
Program (page 5-10)
xxxi
> Menu Map
Custom Box
Open
Join (page 5-63)
Move/Copy (page 5-60)
Delete (page 5-62)
Store File (page 5-55)
Search(Name) (page 5-49)
Page Selection (page 5-49)
Detail (page 5-49)
Preview (page 5-52)
Search(Name) (page 5-49)
Search(No.) (page 5-49)
Add/Edit Box (page 5-53)
xxxii
> Menu Map
Job Box
Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job (page 4-19, page 4-20)
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 4-21, page 4-22)
Repeat Copy (page 6-66)
Form for Form Overlay (page 5-63)
xxxiii
> Menu Map
Removable
Memory
Removable
Memory
Print
Functions
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Collate/Offset (page 6-25)
Staple/Punch (page 6-26)
Staple (page 6-26)
Punch (page 6-28)
Paper Output (page 6-30)
Margin (page 6-40)
Duplex (page 6-46)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-64)
Priority Override (page 6-65)
EcoPrint (page 6-32)
Fold (page 6-24)
Text Stamp (page 6-57)
Bates Stamp (page 6-60)
Encrypted PDF Password (page 6-78)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-78)
XPS Fit to Page (page 6-78)
xxxiv
> Menu Map
Removable
Memory
Store File
Functions
Original Size (page 6-18)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)
2-sided/Book Original, Book Original (page 6-68)
Original Orientation (page 6-23)
Storing Size (page 6-77)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-34)
Density (page 6-31)
Original Image (page 6-31)
Scan Resolution (page 6-74)
Color Selection (page 6-32)
Sharpness (page 6-33)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-34)
Zoom (page 6-35)
Centering (page 6-38)
Border Erase (page 6-41)
Continuous Scan (page 6-63)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-64)
File Name Entry (page 6-65)
Erase Shadowed Area (page 6-51)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-67)
Contrast (page 6-33)
Text Stamp (page 6-57)
Bates Stamp (page 6-60)
File Format (page 6-70)
File Separation (page 6-74)
Long Original (page 6-77)
Delete (page 5-50)
Detail (page 5-49)
Memory Information (page 5-68)
Remove Memory (page 5-68)
FAX Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xxxv
> Menu Map
or
Status/
Job Cancel
I
St t
Printing Jobs (page 7-3)
Sending Jobs (page 7-5)
Storing Jobs (page 7-6)
Device/Communication (page 7-13)
Paper/Supplies (page 7-14)
xxxvi
> Menu Map
or
System
Menu
Quick Setup Wizard
FAX Setup (page 2-42)
Energy Saver Setup (page 2-42)
Network Setup (page 2-43)
Counter (page 2-58)
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Cassette 1 (page 8-7)
Cassette 2 (page 8-7)
Cassette 3 (page 8-7)
Cassette 4 (page 8-7)
Cassette 5 (page 8-7)
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
Common Settings
Language (page 8-10)
Default Screen (page 8-10)
Sound
Buzzer (page 8-10)
FAX Speaker Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
FAX Monitor Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Keyboard Layout (page 8-11)
Original/Paper
Settings
Custom Original Size (page 8-11)
Custom Paper Size (page 8-12)
Media Type Setting (page 8-12)
Default Paper Source (page 8-12)
Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-13)
Media for Auto (B&W) (page 8-13)
Paper Source for Cover (page 8-13)
Special Paper Action (page 8-14)
Separator Paper Source (page 8-14)
Show Paper Setup Message (page 8-14)
Measurement (page 8-15)
xxxvii
> Menu Map
Common Settings
Error Handling
Duplexing Error (page 8-16)
Finishing Error (page 8-16)
No Staple Error (page 8-16)
Finished Pages Exceeded (page 8-16)
Punch Waste Full Error (page 8-16)
Paper Mismatch Error (page 8-16)
Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 8-17)
Paper Jam before Staple (page 8-17)
Paper Output (page 8-17)
Orientation Confirmation (page 8-18)
Function Defaults
Orig. Orientation (Copy) (page 8-18)
Orig. Orient.(Send/Store) (page 8-18)
Original Image (Copy) (page 8-18)
Org. Image (Send/Store) (page 8-18)
FAX TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Scan Resolution (page 8-18)
Color Selection (page 8-18)
File Format (page 8-18)
Backgrnd Density (Copy) (page 8-18)
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store) (page 8-18)
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) (page 8-18)
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) (page 8-18)
Zoom (page 8-19)
Border Erase Default (page 8-19)
Border Erase to Back Page (page 8-19)
Margin Default (page 8-19)
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-19)
EcoPrint (page 8-19)
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-19)
High Comp. PDF Image (page 8-19)
Color TIFF Compression (page 8-19)
Image Quality (File Format) (page 8-19)
xxxviii
> Menu Map
Common Settings
Function Defaults
Collate/Offset (page 8-19)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-19)
XPS Fit to Page (page 8-19)
PDF/A (page 8-20)
File Name Entry (page 8-20)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 8-20)
i-FAX Subject/Body (page 8-20)
DP Read Action (page 8-20)
OCR Text Recognition (page 8-20)
Primary OCR Language (page 8-20)
Repeat Copy (page 8-20)
Skip Blank Page (Copy) (page 8-21)
Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) (page 8-21)
File Separation (page 8-21)
Continuous Scan (Copy) (page 8-21)
Continuous Scan (Send/Store) (page 8-21)
Continuous Scan (FAX) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Optional Keyboard Type (page 8-21)
System Stamp (page 8-21)
Manual Staple (page 8-27)
Offset Documents by Job (page 8-27)
Low Toner Alert Level (page 8-28)
Toner Waste Full Alert (page 8-28)
Offset One Page Documents (page 8-28)
Display Status/Log (page 8-28)
Message Banner Print (page 8-29)
Customize Status Display (page 8-29)
Message Board Settings (page 8-30)
Remote Printing (page 8-30)
Numeric Keypad Settings (page 8-31)
Prevent Light Reflection (page 8-31)
Function Key Assignment (page 8-31)
Show Power Off Message (page 8-31)
xxxix
> Menu Map
Home
Customize Desktop (page 2-15)
Customize Taskbar (page 2-15)
Wallpaper (page 2-15)
Copy
Paper Selection (page 8-32)
Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-32)
Auto Paper Selection (page 8-32)
Auto % Priority (page 8-32)
Paper Size for Small Original (page 8-32)
Preset Limit (page 8-32)
Reserve Next Priority (page 8-32)
Quick Setup Registration (page 8-32)
Send
Quick Setup Registration (page 8-33)
Dest. Check before Send (page 8-33)
Color Type (page 8-33)
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-33)
Default Screen (page 8-33)
Send and Forward (page 8-34)
New Destination Entry (page 8-34)
Recall Destination (page 8-34)
Broadcast (page 8-34)
OCR Text Recognition Act. (page 8-35)
HighCompressionPDF Mode (page 8-35)
Document Box/Removable
Memory
Custom Box (page 5-48)
FAX Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Job Box
Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-38)
Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 8-38)
Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-38)
Polling Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Quick Setup Registration (page 8-39)
FAX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xl
> Menu Map
Printer
Emulation (page 8-39)
EcoPrint (page 8-40)
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-40)
Override A4/Letter (page 8-40)
Duplex (page 8-40)
Copies (page 8-40)
Orientation (page 8-40)
Form Feed Timeout (page 8-40)
LF Action (page 8-40)
CR Action (page 8-40)
Job Name (page 8-40)
User Name (page 8-40)
Paper Feed Mode (page 8-40)
MP Tray Priority (page 8-41)
Auto Cassette Change (page 8-41)
Wide A4 (page 8-41)
Resolution (page 8-41)
KIR (page 8-41)
Report
Print Report
Status Page (page 8-42)
Font List (page 8-42)
Network Status (page 8-42)
Service Status (page 8-43)
Optional Network Status (page 8-43)
Admin Report
Settings
Result Report
Settings
Outgoing FAX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Incoming FAX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Send Result Report (page 8-43)
FAX RX Result Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide
Job Finish Notice Setting (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
RX Result Report Type (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xli
> Menu Map
Report
Sending Log History
Auto Sending (page 8-44)
Sending Log History (page 8-44)
Destination (page 8-44)
Job Log Subject (page 8-44)
SSFC Log Subject (page 8-44)
Personal Information (page 8-44)
Login History
Settings
Login History (page 8-44)
Auto Sending (page 8-44)
Destination (page 8-44)
Subject (page 8-44)
Log Reset (page 8-44)
Device Log History
Settings
Device Log History (page 8-45)
Auto Sending (page 8-45)
Destination (page 8-45)
Subject (page 8-45)
Secure Comm. Error
Log
Secure Comm. Error Log (page 8-46)
Auto Sending (page 8-46)
Destination (page 8-46)
Subject (page 8-46)
System/Network
Network
Host Name (page 8-47)
Wired Network
Settings
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
TCP/IP Setting (page 8-47)
LAN Interface (page 8-49)
Wi-Fi Direct (page 8-49)
Device Name (page 8-49)
IP Address (page 8-49)
Auto Disconnect (page 8-49)
Wi-Fi Settings
Wi-Fi (page 8-49)
Setup (page 8-50)
TCP/IP Setting (page 8-51)
Bonjour (page 8-53)
IPSec (page 8-53)
xlii
> Menu Map
System/Network
Network
Protocol Settings
SMTP (E-mail TX) (page 8-53
POP3 (E-mail RX) (page 8-53)
FTP Client (Transmission)
(page 8-53)
FTP Server (Reception)
(page 8-53)
SMB Client (Transmission)
(page 8-53)
NetBEUI (page 8-53)
WSD Scan (page 8-54)
WSD Print (page 8-54)
i-FAX (page 8-54)
DSM Scan (page 8-54)
ThinPrint (page 8-54)
LPD (page 8-54)
Raw (page 8-55)
IPP (page 8-55)
IPP over SSL (page 8-55)
HTTP (page 8-55)
HTTPS (page 8-55)
LDAP (page 8-55)
SNMPv1/v2c (page 8-56)
SNMPv3 (page 8-56)
Enhanced WSD (page 8-56)
Enhanced WSD over SSL
(page 8-56)
eSCL (page 8-56)
eSCL over SSL (page 8-56)
Security Settings (page 8-57)
Proxy (page 8-57)
Ping (page 8-57)
Restart Network (page 8-57)
xliii
> Menu Map
System/Network
Optional Network
Basic (page 8-58)
Wireless Network (page 8-59)
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
Security Level (page 8-61)
Interface Block
Setting
USB Host (page 8-61)
USB Device (page 8-61)
USB Storage (page 8-61)
Optional Interface 1 (page 8-61)
Optional Interface 2 (page 8-61)
Data Security
Hard Disk/SSD Initialization (page 8-62)
Data Sanitization (page 8-63)
Software Verification (page 8-63)
Optional Function (page 8-64)
Bluetooth Settings (page 8-64)
Restart Entire Device (page 8-64)
NFC (page 8-64)
Edit Destination
Address Book (page 3-30)
One Touch Key (page 3-37)
Print List (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Address Book
Defaults
Sort (page 8-65)
Narrow Down (page 8-65)
Address Book Type (page 8-65)
Edit Restriction
Address Book (page 8-65)
One Touch Key (page 8-65)
xliv
> Menu Map
User Login/Job Accounting
User Login Setting
User Login (page 9-3)
Authentication
Security
User Account Lockout Set.
(page 9-5)
Password Policy Settings
(page 9-7)
Local User List (page 9-8)
Local Authorization (page 9-18)
Group Authorization
Set.
Guest Authorization
Set.
Group Authorization (page 9-19)
Group List (page 9-20)
Guest Authorization (page 9-22)
Guest Property (page 9-23)
Obtain NW User Property (page 9-25)
Simple Login
Settings
ID Card Settings
Simple Login (page 9-27)
Simple Login Key (page 9-28)
Keyboard Login (page 9-30)
Additional Authentication
(page 9-31)
PIN Code Authorization (page 9-30)
Job Accounting
Setting
Job Accounting (page 9-34)
Job Accounting Access (page 9-35)
Job Accounting
(Local)
Print Accounting Report
(page 9-49)
Total Job Accounting (page 9-48)
Each Job Accounting (page 9-48)
Accounting List (page 9-36)
Default Setting (page 9-45)
Apply Limit (page 9-51)
Copier/Printer Count (page 9-52)
Unknown User Setting (page 9-53)
User Property (page 9-11)
xlv
> Menu Map
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Date/Time (page 8-66)
Date Format (page 8-66)
Time Zone (page 8-66)
Auto Panel Reset (page 8-66)
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
Low Power Timer (page 8-67)
Panel Reset Timer (page 8-67)
Sleep Timer (page 8-67)
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-67)
Error Job Skip (page 8-67)
Error Clear Timer (page 8-67)
Unusable Time (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-68)
Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-68)
EnergySaver RecoveryLevel (page 8-68)
Weekly Timer Settings (page 8-69)
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-69)
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-69)
Ping Timeout (page 8-69)
xlvi
> Menu Map
Adjustment/Maintenance
Density Adjustment
Copy (page 8-70)
Send/Box (page 8-70)
FAX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Background Density
Adj.
Copy (Auto) (page 8-70)
Send/Box (Auto) (page 8-70)
Sharpness
Adjustment
Copy (page 8-70)
Send/Box (page 8-70)
Drum Heater*1 (page 8-70)
Correcting Black Lines (page 8-70)
System Initialization (page 8-71)
Display Brightness (page 8-71)
Silent Mode (page 8-71)
Auto Color Correction (page 8-71)
Tone Curve Adjustment (page 8-71)
Drum Refresh (page 8-71)
Developer Refresh (page 8-71)
Calibration Cycle (page 8-71)
Calibration (page 8-71)
Memory Diagnostics (page 8-71)
Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 8-72)
Contrast
Copy (page 8-72)
Send/Box (page 8-72)
Auto Drum Refresh (page 8-72)
Open Toner Cover (page 8-72)
Internet (page 8-72)
Application (page 8-73)
*1 This setting does not appear in some regions.
xlvii
1
Legal and Safety
Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2
Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7
Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7
Radio Tag Technology ............................................................................................................................. 1-7
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) .................................................................. 1-7
Warranty (the United States and Canada) ............................................................................................... 1-8
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-9
EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-9
EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................................................... 1-9
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................................................ 1-9
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................................................. 1-10
Legal Information .................................................................................................................................... 1-11
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-17
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-17
Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-17
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-17
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-17
1-1
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Notice
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,
other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their
meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated
inside the symbol.
... [General warning]
... [Warning of high temperature]
The
symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited
action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Warning of prohibited action]
... [Disassembly prohibited]
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of
the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Alert of required action]
... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are
illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE
An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this
machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
1-2
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
Temperature
50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)
Humidity
10 to 80%
(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
•
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
•
Avoid locations with vibrations.
•
Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
•
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
•
Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the
machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of
copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that
the room be properly ventilated.
1-3
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Precautions for Use
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes
and skin.
•
If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If
coughing develops, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of
your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,
contact a physician.
•
If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature
and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose
(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
1-4
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is
hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no
radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2007.
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.
Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.
1-5
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
1. Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards
established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is
safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and
sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without
certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates
compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
The position of the rating label is show below.
XXXXi
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label
located on the cover of the optical unit.
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
1-6
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of
Power
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and
are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs
sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.
Compliance and Conformity
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 and
Part 18 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
•
The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all
persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.
Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Label: CAN ICES-3B/NMB-3B
* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.
NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.
Radio Tag Technology
In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to
authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.
Other precautions
(for users in California, the United States)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
1-7
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Warranty (the United States and Canada)
4002i/5002i/6002i
MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. and KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
(both referred to as "KYOCERA") warrant the Customer's new Multifunctional Product (referred to
as "MFP"), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any
defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or 600,000 copies/prints from date of
installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective
within the warranty period, KYOCERA's only obligation and the Customer's exclusive remedy shall
be replacement of any defective parts. KYOCERA shall have no obligation to furnish labor.
This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the
original MFP for a period of one year or 600,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs. Maintenance
Kits consist of the developing unit, the drum unit, the transfer belt, and the fixing unit. Replacement
Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty.
This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new
KYOCERA MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the
Authorized KYOCERA Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the KYOCERA Dealer is
not able to provide service, write to KYOCERA at the address below for the name and address of
the Authorized KYOCERA Dealer in your area, or check KYOCERA's website at
www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com for KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. or
www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.ca for KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,
(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine KYOCERA brand parts or supplies, (c) have
been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by KYOCERA or an Authorized KYOCERA
Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.
This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is
authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of KYOCERA.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF
THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
225 Sand Road,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,
Canada
1-8
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do
not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.
•
Paper money
•
Bank note
•
Securities
•
Stamp
•
Passport
•
Certificate
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
EN ISO 7779
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder
weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld
platziert werden.
Wireless Connection (Mexico only)
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe
aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN
(If equipped)
Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,
which offers the advantage that a WLAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can
be transmitted.
On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can
pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.
Secretly Viewing Communication Contents
A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the
following communication contents.
•
Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers
•
Contents of email messages
1-9
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Illegal Intrusion
A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the
following illegal actions.
•
Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)
•
Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information
(spoofing)
•
Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)
•
Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)
Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to
reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when
the product is used.
We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and
that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the
security settings.
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)
•
Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical
institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and
precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.
•
Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire
alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the
instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.
•
If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles
or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy
including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please
use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and
redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in
applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,
nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in
these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.
1-10
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document
Solutions Inc. is prohibited.
Regarding Trade Names
•
PRESCRIBE is registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
•
KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
•
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7,
Windows Server 2012, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
•
PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
•
Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
•
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
•
IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
•
AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
•
All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging
Inc.
•
Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of
International Typeface Corporation.
•
ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.
•
UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
•
This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
•
This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD.
•
ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered
trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in the United States, Japan and
other countries.
•
© 2011 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
•
iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
•
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
•
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by
Apple Inc.
•
Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
•
Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.
•
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The
designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
1-11
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)
software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it
under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the source code, visit
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/gpl/.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without
prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so
as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The
following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the
SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1-12
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.
this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as
well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and
versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of
this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the
fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from
Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights
are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary
information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access
to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You
agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License
may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not
remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you
shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as
requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with
Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular
purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is
repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential
damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
1-13
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written
consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.
Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in
FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and
conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No
change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Knopflerfish License
This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.
http://www.knopflerfish.org
Copyright 2003-2010 The Knopflerfish Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Apache License (Version 2.0)
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are
under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or
indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of
fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source
code, documentation source, and configuration files.
1-14
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including
but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as
indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix
below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the
Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an
original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or
additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work
by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For
the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the
Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code
control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of
discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,
prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a
perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license
applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was
submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent
infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date
such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with
or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,
and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute
must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices
that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text
file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the
License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an
addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be
construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license
terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as
a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated
in this License.
1-15
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any
additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and
reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and
each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible
for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your
exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or
otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,
shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including
but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other
commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose
to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights
consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on
Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold
each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your
accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets
"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the
appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of
purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party
archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the
License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS
IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for
the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
1-16
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of
time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state
but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of
time.
Low Power Mode (page 2-39)
Sleep (page 2-39)
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 2-41)
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function
This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single
sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.
Duplex (page 6-46)
Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex
mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that
machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.
Resource Saving - Paper
For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper
certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or
an equivalent quality standard, be used.
This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to
further saving of forest resources.
* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"
Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"
To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that
automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.
Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a
significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation
time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this
product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
ENERGY STAR® is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the
use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing
ENERGY STAR® qualified products, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during
product use and cut energy-related costs.
1-17
2
Installing and Setting
up the Machine
This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and
software installation.
Low Power Mode .............................. 2-39
Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2
Sleep ................................................. 2-39
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4
Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-40
Part Names (With Optional Equipments
Attached) ....................................................... 2-5
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-40
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ..... 2-6
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models
except for Europe) ............................ 2-40
Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-7
Energy Saver Recovery Level .......... 2-40
Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-7
Weekly Timer Settings ...................... 2-40
Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-8
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) 2-41
Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-8
Quick Setup Wizard .................................... 2-42
Power On/Off ................................................ 2-9
Installing Software ....................................... 2-45
Power On ............................................ 2-9
Software on DVD (Windows) ............ 2-45
Power Off ............................................ 2-9
Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-46
Using the Operation Panel .......................... 2-10
Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-51
Operation Panel Keys ....................... 2-10
Installing Software in Mac
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . 2-11
Computer .......................................... 2-53
Assigning Functions to Function
Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-55
Keys .................................................. 2-12
Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-57
Touch Panel ................................................ 2-14
Checking the Counter ................................. 2-58
Home Screen .................................... 2-14
Additional Preparations for the
Display for Device Information .......... 2-18
Administrator ............................................... 2-59
Display Setting Screen ..................... 2-18
Sending Documents to a PC ............. 2-59
Functions Key ................................... 2-19
Strengthening the Security ................ 2-59
Using the Screen .............................. 2-19
Command
Center RX .................................. 2-61
Display of Keys That Cannot Be
Accessing
Command Center RX ...... 2-62
Set .................................................... 2-20
Changing Security Settings .............. 2-63
Original Preview ................................ 2-20
Changing Device Information ........... 2-64
Entering Numbers ............................. 2-23
E-mail Settings .................................. 2-65
Using the Enter Key .......................... 2-24
Registering Destinations ................... 2-69
Using the Quick No. Search Key ...... 2-24
Creating a New Custom Box ............ 2-70
Help Screen ...................................... 2-25
Printing a document stored in a Custom
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying
Box .................................................... 2-71
the View) ........................................... 2-26
Transferring Data from Our Other
Login/Logout ............................................... 2-27
Products ...................................................... 2-73
Login ................................................. 2-27
Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-73
Logout ............................................... 2-28
Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-29
Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-29
Network Setup ............................................ 2-30
Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-30
Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-32
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-36
Configuring NFC ............................... 2-38
Energy Saver Function ............................... 2-39
2-1
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
Part Names (Machine Exterior)
20
13
12 11
1
10
9
2
3
14
19
15
16
18
8
7
17
4
5
17
6
1 Document Processor
11 Original Stopper
2 Operation Panel
12 Original Table
3 Power Switch
13 Original Width Guides
4 Waste Toner Box Cover
14 Slit Glass
5 Cassette 1
15 Paper Stopper
6 Cassette 2
16 Inner Tray
7 Main Power Switch
17 Handles
8 Multi Purpose Tray
18 Front Cover
9 USB Memory Slot
19 Platen
10 Original Eject Table
20 Original Size Indicator Plates
2-2
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
28
27
26
25
24
21
22 23
21 Paper Length Guide
25 Multi Purpose Tray
22 Paper Width Guide
26 Paper Width Guide
23 Paper Width Adjusting Tab
27 Right Cover 1 Lever
24 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray
28 Right Cover 1
2-3
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
1
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1 Option Interface Slot
5 Toner Container (Black)
2 Network Interface Connector
6 Toner Container Cover
3 USB Port
7 Waste Toner Box
4 USB Interface Connector
8 Waste Toner Box Cover
2-4
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
Part Names (With Optional Equipments
Attached)
11
1
12
10
5
3
2
4
9
8
6
7
9
7
6
1 Tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the top tray)
7 Cassette 4
2 Tray A
8 Cassette 5
3 Tray B
9 Finisher Tray
4 Job Separator Tray
10 Job Separator Tray
5 Folding Tray
11 Original Cover
6 Cassette 3
12 Control Section of the Finisher
Optional Equipment (page 11-2)
Manual Staple (page 5-71)
2-5
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.
When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB
MFP
USB
When Connecting the Machine to the PC on the Network
MFP
Network
Network
NOTE
If you are using the machine with the optional wireless interface kit attached, you do not need to connect the LAN
cable. To use a wireless LAN, it is necessary to change the default settings for the machine using the System Menu.
Optional Network (page 8-58)
Cables that Can Be Used
Connection Environment
Function
Necessary Cable
Connect a LAN cable to the
machine.
Printer/Scanner/Network FAX*1
LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
1000BASE-T)
Connect a USB cable to the
machine.
Printer
USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB
compliant, Max. 5.0 m)
*1 Function available when using optional FAX kit. For more information on using the Network FAX, refer to the FAX
Operation Guide.
2-6
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable
IMPORTANT
If the power is on, turn the power switch off.
Power Off (page 2-9)
1
Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2
Power on the machine and configure the network.
Network Setup (page 2-30)
2-7
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting USB Cable
IMPORTANT
If the power is on, turn the power switch off.
Power Off (page 2-9)
1
Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the right side of the
body.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
2
Power on the machine.
Connecting the Power Cable
1
Connect the cable to the machine.
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power
outlet.
IMPORTANT
Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-8
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power On
1
Turn the power switch on.
Power Off
1
Turn the power switch off.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed when [Show Power Off
Message] is set to [On].
It takes about 3 minutes for power off.
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the
machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the
outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT
If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power switch
disables fax transmission and reception. Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage
bag to protect it from humidity.
2-9
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel
Operation Panel Keys
4
5
3
6
2
7
1
8
9
10
17 16
15
14
11
12
13
1 [Home] key: Displays the Home screen.
2 [Numeric Keypad] key: Displays numeric keys on the touch panel.
3 Function Key: These keys enable various functions and applications, including copy and scan, to be registered.
Assigning Functions to Function Keys (page 2-12)
4 [Job Separator] indicator: Lights when there is paper in the job separator tray.
5 [Accessibility Display] key: Switches the touch panel display on the Copy screen and the Send screen to a
magnified view.
6 [Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
7 [System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu screen.
8 [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.
9 [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
10 [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
11 [Interrupt] key: Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
12 [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out).
13 [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
14 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
15 [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory (general
purpose item).
16 [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.
17 Touch Panel: Displays icons for configuring machine settings.
2-10
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle
The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted.
2-11
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Assigning Functions to Function Keys
Function keys are keys to which various functions and applications, including copy and scan, can be assigned.
Frequently used functions and applications can be assigned and the screen can easily be displayed.
For this machine, the following functions are pre-assigned; however, alternative functions can be registered by
re-assigning these functions.
•
[F1] (Function key 1): Copy
•
[F2] (Function key 2): Send
•
[F3] (Function key 3): FAX (Option)
1
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
Model Name
2
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
Configure the settings.
1 Select [Change] to enable the function key to be set.
2 Select the function to be assigned.
Function
Description
Reference page
None
No function has been assigned.
Copy
Displays the Copy screen.
page 5-18
Send
Displays the Send screen.
page 5-22
FAX*1
Displays the FAX screen.
Refer to the FAX
Operation
Guide.
Custom Box
Displays the Custom Box screen.
page 5-53
Job Box
Displays the Job Box screen.
page 4-18
Removable Memory
Displays the Removable Memory screen.
page 5-65
FAX Box*1
Displays the FAX Box screen.
Refer to the FAX
Operation
Guide.
Send to Me (E-mail)*2
Displays the Send screen. The E-mail
address of the logged-in user is set as the
destination.
page 5-39
2-12
—
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Function
Description
Send to Me from Box
(E-mail)*2
Displays the Custom Box screen. The Email address of the logged-in user is set as
the destination.
page 5-58
Internet Browser
Displays the Internet Browser screen.
page 5-69
Program
Calls up the registered program. The icon
will change according to the function of the
program.
page 5-10
Application Name
Displays the selected applications.
page 5-13
*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
2-13
Reference page
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Touch Panel
Home Screen
This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the
corresponding screen.
You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.
Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)
1
2
6
5
Logout
Admin
Select the function.
3
4
Status/
Job Cancel
Copy
Send
FAX
Custom Box
Job Box
Removable
Memory
FAX Box
Internet Browser
Device
Information
Language
Paper
Settings
Wi-Fi Direct
System
Menu
Help
3
Program
mm0101_01
Status
* The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option
settings.
No.
Item
Description
1
Message
Displays the message depending on the status.
2
Desktop
Displays function icons including the functions registered in
program. Icons that are not displayed on the first page will
appear by changing the page.
3
Screen-switching
keys
Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages.
NOTE
You can also switch views by touching the screen and moving
the finger sideways (i.e. swiping).
Logout
Admin
Select the function.
FAX
Custom Box
Copy
Send
FAX Box
Internet Browser
Job Box
Removable
Memory
2
Status/
Job Cancel
Device
Information
Language
1
Paper
Settings
Wi-Fi Direct
2
System
Menu
Help
Program
mm0101_02
Status
4
Taskbar
Displays task icons.
5
[Logout]
Logs out the current user. This is displayed when user login
administration is enabled.
6
Login User Name
Displays the logged-in user name. This is displayed when
user login administration is enabled. Selecting "Login User
Name" will display the information of the logged-in user.
2-14
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Editing the Home Screen
You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in
with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are
set as shown below.
Model Name
2
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
Configure the settings.
The available settings are shown below.
Item
Customize
Desktop
Description
Specify the function icons to display on the desktop.*1
Select [Add] to display the screen for selecting the function to
display. Select the function to display and [OK].
Select an icon and [Previous] or [After] to change the display
position of the selected icon on the Desktop.
To delete an icon from desktop, select the desired one and select
[Delete].
Customize
Taskbar
Specify the task icons to display on the taskbar.*2
Wallpaper
Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen.
Value: Images 1 to 8
*1 Displays a maximum of 58 function icons including the installed applications and the
functions that can be used when options are installed.
*2 8 task icons can be displayed.
2-15
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Available Functions to Display on Desktop
Function
Icon
Description
Reference page
Copy*1
Displays the Copy screen.
page 5-18
Send*1
Displays the Send screen.
page 5-22
FAX*2
Displays the FAX screen.
Refer to the FAX
Operation
Guide.
Custom Box*1
Displays the Custom Box
screen.
page 5-53
Job Box*1
Displays the Job Box screen.
page 4-18
Removable
Memory*1
Displays the Removable Memory
screen.
page 5-65
FAX Box*2
Displays the FAX Box screen.
Refer to the FAX
Operation
Guide.
Internet Browser
Displays the Internet Browser
screen.
page 5-69
Send to Me
(E-mail)*3
Displays the Send screen. The
E-mail address of the logged-in
user is set as the destination.
page 5-39
Send to Me from
Box (E-mail)*3
Displays the Custom Box
screen. The E-mail address of
the logged-in user is set as the
destination.
page 5-58
Program
Calls up the registered program.
The icon will change according
to the function of the program.
page 5-10
Application Name*4
Displays the selected
applications.
page 5-13
*1
*2
*3
*4
Selected at the time of shipment from factory.
Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
The icon of the application appears.
2-16
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Available Functions to Display on Taskbar
Function
Icon
Status/Job Cancel*1
/
Description
Displays the Status screen. If an
error occurs, the icon will show "!".
Once the error clears, the display
will return to normal.
Device
Information*1
Displays the Device Information
screen. Check the system and
network information.
Reference
page
―
page 2-18
You can also check information on
the options that are used.
Language*1
Displays the Language setting
screen in System Menu.
page 8-10
Paper Setting*1
Displays the Paper setting screen in
System Menu.
page 8-7
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct is set and a list of
information relating to the machine
that can use the network appears.
page 8-49
System Menu*1
Displays the System Menu screen.
page 8-2
Help*1
Displays the Help screen.
page 2-25
Program*1
Displays the program list screen.
page 5-10
Magnifies the text and icons on the
screen. Pressing the Accessibility
icon switches the icon to the
Standard icon. Press the Standard
icon to return to the previous view.
page 2-26
Displays the Message Board
screen.
page 8-30
Accessibility/
Standard
/
Message Board
NOTE
To use this function, set "Message
Board" to [ON] in System Menu.
Command Center RX User
Guide
*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.
2-17
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Display for Device Information
Shows device information. Allows you to check system and network information, as well as options that are used.
1 [Home] key > [Device Information]
2 Check the device information.
Tab
Description
Identification/Wired
Network
You can check ID information such as the model name,
serial number, host name and location, and the IP
address of the wired network.
Wi-Fi
You can check ID information such as the model name,
serial number, host name and location, and the IP
address of the wireless network.
FAX*1
You can check the local fax number, local fax name,
local fax ID and other fax information.
Software Ver./Capability
You can check the software version and performance.
Option
You can check information on the options that are used.
*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
Display Setting Screen
The following procedure is an example of the Copy screen.
1 Shows an image of the output
paper.
7
Copies
10
Preview
8
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
1
9
Auto
100%
Shortcut 3
Normal 0
2 Original : Shows the original size
when the original is
placed.
Zoom : Shows the
magnification of the
document to be printed.
Paper : Shows the size of the
output paper.
Shortcut 4
2
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Quick Setup
Proof Copy
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Zoom
Shortcut 5
4 Set the copy functions.
Shortcut 6
5 Remaining amount of toner.
Off
Off
Image Quality
3 Displays the Quick Setup screen.
Density
Combine
Layout/Edit
Staple
/Punch
Advanced
Setup
Program
2016/02/02 10:10
Status
6 Displays the time.
7 Displays registered shortcuts.
c010101_01-3bar
8 Displays the output tray.
3
4
5
6
9 Displays the paper source.
10 Displays the original position.
2-18
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Functions Key
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Copies
Preview
Original
Size
Paper
Selection
Mixed Size
Originals
Original
Orientation
Fold
Collate/
Offset
Staple
/Punch
Paper Output
Function key
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Tab
Proof Copy
Quick Setup
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Status
Program
c0102
Using the Screen
Touch panel keys that are pressed are outlined in red.
System Menu
Quick Setup Wizard
Counter
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Common Settings
Home
Copy
Send
Document Box/Removable Memory
FAX
Printer
Report
1/2
Close
m01010101
Status
Select [
2-19
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set
Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a nonselectable state.
Normal
Grayed out
Off
Off
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Off
Off
Off
Off
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Hidden
In the following cases, the key is
grayed out and cannot be selected.
•
Cannot be used in combination
with a feature that is already
selected.
•
Use prohibited by user control.
•
[Preview] has been selected.
•
For functions that cannot be
changed when using proof copy.
Combine
Staple
/Punch
Cannot be used because an option
is not installed.
NOTE
If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case, select
the [Reset] key and try again.
If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is selected, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the
function by user control. Check with the administrator of the machine.
Original Preview
You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.
NOTE
• To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to the following:
Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details (page 5-52)
• The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.
1
Display the screen.
2
Place the originals.
[Home] key > [Copy] key
2-20
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
3
Display a preview image.
1 Select [Preview].
The machine starts scanning the original. When scanning is completed, the preview image
appears on the panel.
Copies
Shortcut 1
Preview
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Zoom
Density
Shortcut 5
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Proof Copy
Quick Setup
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Off
Off
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Shortcut 6
Program
Advanced
Setup
c010101_01
2 Select [Detail].
You can check the finished image in greater detail.
Copies
Press Start key to start printing.
Press [Cancel] to change settings.
Shortcut 1
Preview
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Cancel
Quick Setup
Zoom
Density
Shortcut 5
Detail
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Off
Off
Image Quality
Shortcut 6
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Layout/Edit
Program
Advanced
Setup
c010101_03
1
2
Preview:
3
1 In magnified view, you can
move the range of display.
2015101010574501
No.
4
2 Zoom out.
3 Zoom in.
100%
Size
: A4
Density
: Normal 0
1/6
Close
c0301
Status
2-21
5
6
4 In multiple-page documents,
you can change pages by
entering the desired page
number.
5 In multiple-page documents,
you can use these buttons to
change pages.
6 Close the Preview screen.
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Duplex Printing
Settings for duplex printing appear.
Preview:
2015101010574501
No.
100%
Size
: A4
Density
: Normal 0
Side
: Front Page
Binding
: Left/Right
1/6
Image
Close
C0301_02
Status
NOTE
• To change the quality or the layout, select [Cancel] or the [Stop] key.
Change the settings and select [Preview] again to see a preview image with the new
settings.
• Depending on the function you are using, even if you scan a multi-page original, only
the first page can be previewed.
3 If there is no problem with the preview image, press the [Start] key.
Copying starts.
Using the Preview Screen
When the Preview screen is displayed, you can do the following by moving the finger that is touching the touch panel.
Function
Description
Drag
With the finger touching the touch panel, slide the finger to move the position of the
displayed preview.
Pinch in
Pinch out
With two fingers touching the touch panel, widen or tighten the space between the two
fingers to zoom in and out on the view.
2-22
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Entering Numbers
When entering numbers, numeric keys appear on the touch panel if you select the [Numeric Keypad] key on the
operation panel or select the area in which the number is entered.
1 Enter numbers and symbols.
5
2 Clear entered numbers.
3 Quick No. Search key.
Using the Quick No. Search Key (page 2-24)
4 Entry by numeric keys is confirmed.
Using the Enter Key (page 2-24)
1
2 3 4
5 Close the numeric keypad.
NOTE
• Numeric keys do not appear on the touch panel if an optional numeric keypad is installed.
• Alphabetic letters appear on numeric keys if an optional FAX Kit is installed. Alphabetic letters are used to
remember the FAX number.
Example: When entering the number of copies
Copies
Copies
Shortcut 1
Preview
Shortcut 1
Preview
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Shortcut 3
Normal 0
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Zoom
Shortcut 4
Density
Original
Zoom
Paper
Shortcut 5
Proof Copy
Quick Setup
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Off
Off
Image Quality
Shortcut 6
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Preview
Program
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Zoom
Density
Shortcut 5
Proof Copy
Quick Setup
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Off
Off
Image Quality
Shortcut 6
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
c010101_01
Program
c010101_01
Example: When entering a one-touch key number
Destination
Destination
Enter Destination.
Enter Destination.
Destination
Detail
A OFFICE
abcd@efg.com
B OFFICE
10.181.56.22:65535
Member:
C OFFICE
On Hook
Direct
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
Destination
Status
Chain
CCC
0007
GGG
Quick Setup
DDD
Org./Sending
Data Format
C OFFICE
Color/
Image Quality
Direct
1/100
Advanced
Setup
E-mail
Addr Entry
Folder Path
Entry
(0001 - 1000)
On Hook
0011
FAX No.
Entry
0001
i-FAX
Addr Entry
0010
1/1
Enter One Touch key number
using # keys.
FAX No.
Entry
JJJ
Address
Book
B OFFICE
No.
EEE
0009
III
E-mail
Addr Entry
Recall
0005
Detail
abcd@efg.com
A OFFICE
Folder Path
Entry
Delete
0004
0008
HHH
1/1
3
Detail/Edit
0003
Destination
Address
Book
AAA
Cancel
0006
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
FFF
Program
Destination
s0101_05
Status
2-23
i-FAX
Addr Entry
BBB
0007
GGG
Quick Setup
OK
0009
0008
HHH
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
0010
1/100
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
s0101_03
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Example: When searching for an address number
Address Book
Dest.
No.
Address Book
Address Book
Addr Book
Type
Sort
Name
Name
Detail
0001
ABCD
abcd@efg.com
0002
TUVW
tuvw@xyz.com
0003
Group1
Member:
Address Book
Addr Book
Dest.
No.
Type
Sort
Name
0001
ABCD
0002
TUVW
0003
Group1
0004
Group2
0005
Group3
Name
Detail
Search(Name)
ABC
3
0004
Group2
Member:
2
0005
Group3
Member:
4
DEF
GHI
E-mail
JKL
MNO
Folder
PQRS TUV
FAX
WXYZ
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/2
Add/Edit
Address Book
Detail
0-9
ABC
Group
i-FAX
DEF
GHI
Add/Edit
Address Book
1234
Detail
Cancel
JKL
FAX
OK
Group
i-FAX
OK
Cancel
s02010101
Status
Search(No.)
1/2
(0001 - 2500)
Folder
E-mail
Cancel
Enter four digits of address number
using # keys.
OK
s02010101_02
Status
NOTE
• Moving your finger while touching the top of the numeric keypad enables you to freely move to any key. (Drag
operation)
Copies
Shortcut 1
Preview
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Density
Shortcut 5
Proof Copy
Quick Setup
Zoom
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Off
Off
Image Quality
Shortcut 6
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Layout/Edit
Program
Advanced
Setup
c010101_01
• For copy and print screens, you can set numeric keys to be displayed in advance. In addition, you can select the
layout for numeric keys that are used on the application.
Numeric Keypad Settings (page 8-31)
Using the Enter Key
The Enter key has the same function as the key with the Enter mark ( ), such as the [OK  ] key and the [Close  ].
Using the Quick No. Search Key
The Quick No. Search key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel. Use the Quick No.
Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys. For example, you can
specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by its program number.
For more information on speed dialing, refer to the following:
Specifying Destination (page 5-41)
Destination
Enter Destination.
Destination
Detail
Address
Book
abcd@efg.com
A OFFICE
B OFFICE
1/1
Enter One Touch key number
using # keys.
C OFFICE
Folder Path
Entry
(0001 - 1000)
On Hook
Direct
E-mail
Addr Entry
0011
FAX No.
Entry
0001
AAA
i-FAX
Addr Entry
BBB
Cancel
0006
FFF
Destination
0007
GGG
OK
0009
0008
HHH
Quick Setup
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
0010
1/100
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
s0101_03
Status
2-24
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.
To show the Help screen for a function, select [Help] on the panel of the setting screen of that function. The Help screen
shows explanations of functions and how to use them.
1
Display the Paper Selection screen.
2
Select [Help] on the panel.
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Copies
Paper Selection
Auto
Cassette
A4
Plain
A3
Plain
Original
Zoom
Paper
Preview
: A4
: 100%
: A4
MP Tray
--Plain
A4
Plain
B4
Plain
MP Tray
A5
Plain
Proof Copy
Paper Set.
OK
Cancel
Add Shortcut
c020102
Status
Selecting Paper Source
Select paper source by choosing a
Cassette or MP Tray.
Setting Procedure
1. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing].
2. Press [Paper Selection].
1/2
Other Help
End
h0201020201_02
Status
Selecting [Help] on the Home Screen
Show the Help list.
1
1 Help titles.
Selecting Paper Source
2 Displays information about functions and
machine operation.
Select paper source by choosing a
Cassette or MP Tray.
2
3 Show the screen of the tab that includes the
function explained in Help. (In the case of this
screen, the screen that appears after step 1 of
"Setting Procedure" is performed will appear.)
Setting Procedure
1. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing].
2. Press [Paper Selection].
6
5
1/2
3
Try It
Other Help
End
h0201020201_01
Status
4
4 Displays the Help list.
5 Closes the Help screen and returns to the
original screen.
6 Scrolls up and down when the help text cannot
be displayed in its entirety on a single screen.
2-25
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View)
You can magnify the text and keys displayed on the touch panel. You can also select items and move to the next screen
using the numeric keys.
NOTE
• This function can be used on the Home screen and on the functions that were registered via Copy/Send Quick
Setup.
• To configure any functions that are not displayed on the Accessibility screen, you need to return to the original view.
Select the [Accessibility Display] key again.
While using the Copy or Send functions, select the [Accessibility Display] key.
Large keys and text appear on the touch panel.
Copies
uc0102
Status
You can also control the screen using the numeric key corresponding to the number in circle. (Example: Press the [2]
key on the numeric key pad to zoom.)
Control the functions according to the display on the screen.
2-26
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter
your login user name and login password.
NOTE
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator
privileges and change your login user name or login password.
Login
Normal login
1
Enter the login user name and login password to login.
1 If this screen is displayed during operations, select [Login User Name] to enter the login
user name.
1
Login
User Name
2
Login
Password
abcdef
# Keys
********
# Keys
3
Cancel
Login
lg0301
Status
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
2 [Login Password] > Enter the login password > [OK]
NOTE
2
•
[# Keys] can be selected to enter the number with the numeric keys on the operation
panel.
•
If [Network Authentication] is selected as the user authentication method,
authentication destinations are displayed and either [Local] or [Network] can be
selected as the authentication destination.
•
To authenticate by ID card, select [ID Card Login].
Select [Login].
2-27
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Simple Login
Select the user to login.
01
02
03
A
B
C
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
No.
1/2
Keyboard
Login
lg0601
Status
If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.
NOTE
If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.
Simple Login Settings (page 9-27)
Logout
To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user
name/login password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
•
When the machine enters the sleep state.
•
When the auto panel reset function is activated.
2-28
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Default Settings of the Machine
The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu. Before using this machine, configure such settings
as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed.
NOTE
For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:
Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)
Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of
the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
.
NOTE
• To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:
Date/Timer/Energy Saver (page 8-66)
• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.
Command Center RX User Guide
1
Display the screen.
2
Configure the settings.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]
Item
Description
Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed
location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer
time, configure settings for summer time.
Date/Time
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine.
If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be
displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),
Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is
displayed in Western notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
2-29
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Network Setup
Configuring the Wired Network
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),
TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.
Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-7)
For other network settings, refer to the following:
Network (page 8-47)
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
IPv4 setting
1
2
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wired Network
Settings" [Next] > "TCP/IP Setting" [Next] > "IPv4" [Change]
Configure the settings.
When using DHCP server
[DHCP]: Set to [On].
When setting the static IP address
[DHCP]: Set to [Off].
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255).
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
When using the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
2-30
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the
machine OFF and then ON.
Restart Network (page 8-57)
NOTE
Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you
configure this setting.
In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Command Center RX.
• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off"
• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.
Setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
2-31
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Configuring the Wireless Network
When the wireless network function is available or the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed on the machine
and the connection settings are configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN)
environment. The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuration Method
Configuring the Connection
from the Operation Panel
on This Machine
Description
Reference Page
Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the
network in a wizard-style screen, without setting
indivisually in System menu.
Quick Setup Wizard (page 242)
Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure
the network in details from System menu.
Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-49)
Wireless Network (page 8-59)
Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
This is the tool included in the Product Library. You
can configure the connection according to the
instructions provided by the wizard.
Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
(page 2-32)
Setting the Connection by
Using the Setup Utility of
IB-51
This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-51. You
can use it on both Windows and Mac OS.
IB-51 Operation Guide
Configuring Connections
on the Web Page
The connection can be set from the Command
Center RX.
Command Center RX User
Guide
For the IB-51, the connection can be set on the
dedicated Web page.
IB-51 Operation Guide
NOTE
When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default), select the desired setting on "Primary
Network (Client)".
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device
with the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (WiFi Direct).
NOTE
• Before using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool, connect your computer to this machine locally with wired LAN cable or Wi-Fi
Direct.
• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [ON]) and Restart Network from
the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.
• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the
machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.
• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.
Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-49)
Wireless Network (page 8-59)
Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable
1
Connect the machine with a computer
1 Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.
2-32
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
2 Turn on the computer.
IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is generated automatically.
2
Insert the DVD.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
3
Display the screen.
1 Click [View License Agreement]
and read the License Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
1
2
4
Select [Maintenance].
5
[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]
1
2
6
Configure the settings.
1 [Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2 [Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]
2-33
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
3 [Easy setup] > [Next]
The machine is detected.
NOTE
• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search
the machine.
• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or
[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to
search the machine.
4 Select the machine > [Next]
5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.
6 Configure the communication settings > [Next]
7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]
The network is configured.
Wireless LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct
1
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct
Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]
2
Configure the settings.
3
Restart the network.
[On] > [OK]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"
[Start] > [Yes]
4
Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.
5
Insert the DVD.
Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-36)
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
2-34
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
6
Display the screen.
1 Click [View License Agreement]
and read the License Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
1
2
7
Select [Maintenance].
8
[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]
1
2
9
Configure the settings.
1 [Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2 [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]
3 [Advanced setup] > [Next]
Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or
host name to search the machine.
4 Select the machine > [Next]
5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.
6 Configure the communication settings > [Next]
7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]
The network is configured.
2-35
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Setting Wi-Fi Direct
Setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to print from the Wi-Fi Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct
1
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct
Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]
2
Configure the settings.
3
Restart the network.
4
[On] > [OK]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"
[Start] > [Yes]
Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld
device.
If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].
The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct
Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.
1
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct
Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]
2
Configure the settings.
3
Restart the network.
[On] > [OK]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"
[Start] > [Yes]
4
[Home] key > [Wi-Fi Direct]
5
Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.
6
Configure the handheld device.
1 [Settings] > [Wi-Fi]
2 Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.
2-36
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
3 Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]
The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.
Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button
When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the
network using push button.
1
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct
Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]
2
Configure the settings.
3
Restart the network.
[On] > [OK]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"
[Start] > [Yes]
4
[Home] key > [Wi-Fi Direct]
5
Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and
select [Push Button] on the screen of operation panel
simultaneously.
The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.
IMPORTANT
You can connect up to three handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices
that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the alreadyconnected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:
• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer
• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
Select [Home] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Connected Device List] > [Disconnect All]
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu
Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 8-49)
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX
Command Center RX User Guide
2-37
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Configuring NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) is the internal standard for near field communication in which the data communication
distance is limited to approximately 10 cm. Establishing data communication simply requires you to show the handheld
device supporting NFC to this machine.
The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuring Connections on the Web Page
You can set NFC from the Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Configure the NFC from the System Menu.
NFC (page 8-64)
This section presents an example for configuring the NFC from the System Menu.
1
Display the screen.
2
Configure the settings.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "NFC" [Change]
[On] > [OK]
2-38
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function
Energy Saver Function
If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Low Power Mode to
reduce power consumption. If a further period of time elapses without the machine being used, the machine
automatically enters Sleep Mode, which minimizes power consumption.
Low Power Mode
If the machine is not operated for a certain period of time, the energy saver indicator will light up and the screen will
become dark to reduce power consumption. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode.
"Low power." will be displayed on the screen.
The amount of time before entering Low Power Mode: 3 minutes (default setting).
If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax
data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform one of the following actions.
•
Select any key on the operation panel.
•
Touch the touch panel.
•
Open the optional original cover or the optional document processor.
•
Place originals in the optional document processor.
Recovery time from Low Power Mode is as follows.
•
Within 15 seconds
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
NOTE
If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.
Sleep
To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save
a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
Energy Saver indicator
If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform the following actions.
•
Select any key on the operation panel.
•
Touch the touch panel.
•
Place originals in the optional document processor.
Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows.
•
Within 17 seconds
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
2-39
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.
The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows.
•
10 minutes (default setting).
To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-42)
NOTE
If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep Mode is preceded.
Sleep Rules (models for Europe)
You can set whether Sleep Mode operates for each function. When the machine enters Sleep Mode, the ID card cannot
be recognized.
For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-68)
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for
Europe)
This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal Sleep Mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be set
separately for each function. Printing from a computer connected with a USB cable is not available while the machine is
asleep. The time required for the machine to wake up from power save mode and resume normal operation will be
longer than for normal Sleep Mode.
NOTE
If the optional Network Interface Kit is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.
For more information on Sleep Level (Energy Saver) Mode settings, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-42)
Energy Saver Recovery Level
This machine can reduce power consumption when recovering from Energy Saver Mode.
For EnergySaver RecoveryLevel, "Full Recovery", "Normal Recovery" or "Power Saving Recovery" can be selected.
The factory default is "Normal Recovery".
For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-42)
EnergySaver RecoveryLevel (page 8-68)
Weekly Timer Settings
Set the machine to automatically turn OFF and wake up at times specified for each day.
For more information on Weekly Timer Settings, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-42)
2-40
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function
Power Off Timer (models for Europe)
If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off. The Power Off Timer is used to set the
time until the power turns off.
The factory setting for the time until the power turns off: 3 days
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-69)
2-41
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
Quick Setup Wizard
For FAX functions, paper settings, Energy Saver functions and network settings, the following settings can be configured
in a wizard-style screen.
FAX Setup
Configures basic fax settings. This function is displayed when the optional FAX Kit
is installed.
FAX Operation Guide
Dialing Mode (Port 1, Port 2*1)*2
1. Dialing/RX Mode
Reception Mode
Auto (DRD)*3
2. Local FAX Information
Local FAX Name (Port 1, Port 2*1)
Local FAX Number (Port 1, Port 2*1)
Local FAX ID
TTI
3. Sound
FAX Speaker Volume
FAX Monitor Volume
Job Finish Buzzer
Rings (Normal)*4
4. Rings
Rings (TAD)*4
Rings (FAX/TEL)*4
5. Output
Media Type
Paper Output (Port 1, Port 2*1)*5
Reduced RX Size
Power Off Setup
Energy Saver Setup
6. Redial
Retry Times
Show Power Off Message
—
Configures sleep mode and low power mode.
1. Sleep Mode
For Europe
Sleep Timer
Sleep Rules
Except for Europe
Sleep Timer
Sleep Level
2. Low Power Mode
Low Power Timer
3.Recovery Mode
Energy Saver Recovery Level
4.Weekly Timer Settings
Weekly Timer
Schedule*6
Retry Times*6
Retry Interval*6
2-42
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
Network Setup
Configures network settings.
1. Network
Network Selection
Wi-Fi*7
DHCP*8
IP Address*9
Subnet Mask*9
Default Gateway*9
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
This is displayed when the option of two FAX Kits has been installed.
Inch version only.
DRD reception mode is available for some countries.
This setting does not appear in some regions.
This function is displayed when the optional Job Separator, Mailbox or 4,000-Sheet Finisher is installed. When an
Inner Finisher or a 1,000-Sheet Finisher is installed with the machine, this function is not displayed.
This function is displayed when [Weekly Timer] is set to [On].
This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wi-Fi].
This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wired Network].
This function is displayed when [DHCP] is set to [Off].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
1
Display the screen.
2
Select a function.
3
Configure the settings.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Quick Setup Wizard]
Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.
NOTE
If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following:
Help Screen (page 2-25)
2-43
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
Control
Description
End
Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.
Previous
Returns to the previous item.
Skip
Advances to the next item without setting the current item.
Next
Advances to the next screen.
Back
Returns to the previous screen.
Complete
Register the settings and exit the wizard.
2-44
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
Software on DVD (Windows)
You can use either [Express Install] or [Custom Install] can be selected for the installation method. [Express Install] is
the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [Express Install], use [Custom Install].
For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:
Custom Install (page 2-48)
Software
KX DRIVER
Description
Express
Install
This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.
Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are
supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full
advantage of the features of the machine.
Use this driver to create PDF files.
KX XPS DRIVER
This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification)
format developed by Microsoft Corporation.
―
KPDL mini-driver/PCL minidriver
This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There
are some restrictions on the machine features and option features
that can be used with this driver.
―
FAX Driver
This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer
software application as a fax via the machine.
―
Kyocera TWAIN Driver
This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAINcompliant software application.
Kyocera WIA Driver
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that
enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such
as a scanner and an image processing software application. An
image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant software application,
which is convenient when a TWAIN-compliant software application is
not installed in the computer.
―
KYOCERA Net Viewer
This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the
network.
―
Status Monitor
This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an
ongoing reporting function.
File Management Utility
This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a
specified network folder.
―
KYOCERA Net Direct Print
This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe
Acrobat/Reader.
―
FONTS
These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be
used in a software application.
2-45
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
• WIA Driver and KX XPS DRIVER cannot be installed on Windows XP.
Installing Software in Windows
Express Install
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Express Install].
For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:
Custom Install (page 2-48)
1
Insert the DVD.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
2
Display the screen.
1 Click [View License Agreement]
and read the License Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
1
3
2
Select [Express Install].
2-46
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4
Install the software.
1
2
3
You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the
standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name.
Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it
is turned on and click
(Reload).
• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
• To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to
install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
5
Finish the installation.
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test
page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.
2-47
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
NOTE
When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting
will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the
machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.
Printer Driver User Guide
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-55)
Custom Install
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Custom Install].
1
Insert the DVD.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
2
Display the screen.
1 Click [View License Agreement]
and read the License Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
1
3
2
Select [Custom Install].
2-48
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4
Install the software.
1 Select the device to be installed.
1
2
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port
name. Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and
that it is turned on and click
(Reload).
• If the desired device does not appear, select [Add custom device] to directly select
the device.
2 Select the driver to be installed.
1
2
3
2-49
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3 Click [Utility] tab and select the utility to be installed.
1
2
3
4 Click [Install].
NOTE
To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to
install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
2-50
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
5
Finish the installation.
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test
page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
NOTE
When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting
will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the
machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.
Printer Driver User Guide
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-55)
Uninstalling the Software
Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.
NOTE
Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
1
Display the screen.
Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the search box.
Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs],
[Kyocera], and [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.
2-51
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
2
Uninstall the software.
Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.
1
2
3
Finish uninstalling.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the software uninstallation procedure.
NOTE
• The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.
• In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to
uninstall the software.
2-52
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software in Mac Computer
The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Mac computer.
NOTE
• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].
Printer (page 8-39)
• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.
Bonjour (page 8-53)
• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.
1
Insert the DVD.
Double-click the [Kyocera] icon.
2
Display the screen.
2
1
Double-click [Kyocera OS X x.x] depending on your Mac OS version.
3
Install the Printer Driver.
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.
If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
2-53
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4
Configure the printer.
1 Open System Preferences and add the printer.
1
2
2 Select [Default] and then select the driver after clicking on the item that appears in "Name".
1
2
3
4
NOTE
When using an IP connection, click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the
host name or IP address. The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in
"Name". Change if needed.
3 Select the options available for the machine.
1
2
4 The selected machine is added.
2-54
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting TWAIN Driver
Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then
[TWAIN Driver Setting]. TWAIN Driver screen appears.
2 Click [Add].
2
Configure TWAIN Driver.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Enter the machine name.
2 Select this machine from the list.
3 Enter the machine's IP address or host name.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
6 Click [OK].
NOTE
When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.
2-55
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3
Finish registering.
NOTE
Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.
2-56
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting WIA Driver
Register this machine to the WIA Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box.
Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras
screen appears.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].
1
2
2
Configure WIA Driver.
2
3
1
4
5
1 Click the [Settings] tab.
2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host name.
3 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 Click [OK].
2-57
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter
Checking the Counter
Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
1
Display the screen.
2
Check the counter.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Counter]
2-58
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Additional Preparations for the
Administrator
In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and
configure the settings as needed.
Sending Documents to a PC
To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))
To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your
computer.
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-20)
To E-mail Scanned Images (Send as E-mail)
You can send a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
E-mail Settings (page 2-65)
Strengthening the Security
This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with
Administrator rights.Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login
user name and password.
In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this
machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)
I want to...
Restrict the users of the machine.
Function
Reference page
User Login
page 9-2
Authentication Security
page 9-5
Auto Panel Reset
page 8-66
ID Card Settings*1
page 9-30
Local Authorization
page 9-18
Group Authorization Set.
page 9-19
Guest Authorization Set.
page 9-22
Prevent another user from handling the
documents stored in the machine.
Custom Box
page 5-48
Output the document stored in the
machine at the time when user operates
the device via operation panel.
Remote Printing
page 8-30
Restrict the basic functions that can be
used.
*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.
2-59
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
I want to...
Function
Data Overwrite*1
Reference page
Encryption*1
Refer to the Data
Security Kit (E)
Operation Guide.
PDF Encryption Functions
page 6-72
Completely delete the data on the machine
before disposing of the machine.
Data Sanitization
page 8-63
Record the operation history of users.
Login History Settings
page 8-44
Device Log History Settings
page 8-45
Secure Comm. Error Log
page 8-46
IPP over SSL
page 8-55
HTTPS
page 8-55
LDAP Security
Refer to the Command
Center RX User
Guide.
SMTP Security
page 8-53
POP3 Security
page 8-53
FTP Encrypted TX
page 6-76
Enhanced WSD (SSL)
page 8-56
IPSec
page 8-53
SNMPv3
page 8-56
Software Verification
page 8-63
Prevent the data stored in the machine
from being leaked.
Protect the transmission from interception
and wiretapping.
Verify the software in the machine.
*1 The optional Data Security Kit is required.
2-60
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Command Center RX
If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.
This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.
Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login].
Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,
Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator
privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name:
Login Password:
Admin
Admin
Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.
Setting
Description
Administrator
General
User
Device
Information
The machine's structure can be checked.
Job Status
Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing
jobs, scheduled jobs, and job log history.
Document Box
Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document
box.
*1
Address Book
Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups.
*1
Device Settings
Configure the advanced settings of the machine.
―
Function
Settings
Configure the advanced function settings.
―
Network
Settings
Configure the network advanced settings.
―
Security
Settings
Configure the security advanced settings.
―
Management
Settings
Configure the advanced management settings.
―
*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.
NOTE
The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.
FAX Operation Guide
2-61
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Accessing Command Center RX
1
Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
Examples:
https://10.180.81.3/ (for IP address)
https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well
as their current status.
NOTE
If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,
configure the certificate.
Command Center RX User Guide
You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.
2
Configure the function.
Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and
Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user
to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation
menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown
below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name:
Login Password:
Admin
Admin
2-62
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Changing Security Settings
1
Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
3 Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4 Click [Security Settings].
2
Configure the Security Settings.
From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.
2-63
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
NOTE
For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
Changing Device Information
1
Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
3 Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4 From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].
3
1
2
2-64
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
2
Specify the host name.
Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings]
menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart".
E-mail Settings
By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and
to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
In addition, configure the following.
•
SMTP settings
Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"
•
The sender address when the machine sends E-mails
Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"
•
The setting to limit the size of E-mails
Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
1
Display the screen.
Display the SMTP Protocol screen.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
3 Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
2-65
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
4 From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].
1
2
2
Configure the settings.
Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".
2-66
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
3
Display the screen.
Display the E-mail Settings screen.
From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].
1
2
4
Configure the settings.
Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.
Setting
SMTP
Description
Set to send e-mail from the machine.
SMTP Protocol
Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP
Protocol" is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and
set the SMTP protocol to [On].
SMTP Server Name*1
Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Number
Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default
port number is 25.
SMTP Server Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication
Protocol
To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for
authentication.
SMTP Security
Set SMTP security.
Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the
[Protocol Settings] page.
Connection Test
Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under
the settings without sending a mail.
Domain Restriction
To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter
the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected.
Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.
2-67
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Setting
POP3
POP3 Protocol
Check Interval
Run once now
Description
You don't need to set the following items when you only
enable the function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set
the following items if you want to enable the function of
receiving e-mail on the machine.
Command Center RX User Guide
Domain Restriction
POP3 User Settings
E-mail
Send
Settings
E-mail Size Limit
Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in
kilobytes. When E-mail size is greater than this value, an
error message appears and E-mail sending is cancelled.
Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP
server. If not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail
sending regardless of the size limit.
Sender Address*1
Specify the sender address for when the machine sends Emails, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or
non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the
machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender
address is 128 characters.
Signature
Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will
appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for
further identification of the machine. The maximum length
of the signature is 512 characters.
Function Defaults
Change the function default settings in [Common/Job
Default Settings] page.
*1 Be sure to enter the items.
5
Click [Submit].
2-68
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Registering Destinations
1
Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
3 Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4 From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].
3
1
2
5 Click [Add].
2
Populate the fields.
1 Enter the destination information.
Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the
same as when registering via operation panel.
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-30)
2 Click [Submit].
2-69
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Creating a New Custom Box
1
Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
3 From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].
3
1
2
4 Click [Add].
2
Configure the Custom Box.
1 Enter the box details.
Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. For details on the fields to
populate, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
2 Click [Submit].
2-70
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Printing a document stored in a Custom Box
1
Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
3 From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].
1
3
2
4 Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.
2-71
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
2
Print the document.
2
1
1 Select the document you wish to print.
Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.
2 Click [Print].
3 Configure settings for printing, click [Print].
2-72
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
Transferring Data from Our Other Products
By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.
This section explains how to transfer data between our products.
Migrating the Address Book
The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer on the
included DVD.
For details on operating the KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following:
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Backing Up Address Book Data to PC
1
Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.
2
Create a backup.
1 Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and
select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
1
2
2 Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
1
2
2-73
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
3 Select destination device group and click [Next].
1
2
4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
1
2
5 Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on
target device], and then click [Next].
1
2
3
2-74
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
6 Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].
1
2
NOTE
If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and
then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters
are distinguished (case sensitive)).
Login User Name:
Login Password:
Admin
Admin
7 Click on [Save to file].
8 Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].
For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".
2-75
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
9 After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.
Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine
1
Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.
2
Load the Address Book data.
1 Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select
[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
1
2
2 Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
1
2
2-76
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
3 Select destination device group and click [Next].
1
2
4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
1
2
5 Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target
device], and then click [Next].
1
2
3
Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's
Address Book from entry No.1.
2-77
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
6 Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].
1
2
7 Click [Finish].
The write process of the Address Book data starts.
8 Once the write process is complete, click [Close].
2-78
3
Preparation before
Use
This chapter explains the following operations.
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3
Loading in Cassette 1 .............................................................................................................................. 3-4
Loading in Cassette 2 .............................................................................................................................. 3-7
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ................................................................................ 3-10
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ................................................................................................... 3-14
Loading in the Side Feeder .................................................................................................................... 3-16
Precautions for Outputting Paper ..................................................................................................................... 3-18
Paper Stopper ........................................................................................................................................ 3-18
Envelope Stack Guide ........................................................................................................................... 3-18
Stack Level Adjuster .............................................................................................................................. 3-19
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-20
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name .............................................................. 3-20
Making a note of the user name and domain name .............................................................................. 3-21
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-22
Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-25
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-30
Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-30
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ................................................................... 3-37
3-1
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Precaution for Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.
In addition, note the following points.
•
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded
may cause a jam.
•
Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.
Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the
paper storage bag.
•
Leaving paper in the cassette for a long time may cause a discoloration of paper by heat
from the cassette heater.
•
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by
removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is
stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image
quality.
NOTE
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like
logo or company name, refer to the following:
Paper (page 11-13)
3-2
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units
Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.
1
2
3
6
No.
4
5
Name
Paper Size
7
Paper Type
1
Cassette 1
A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K, ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return
postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom 1 to
4
2
Cassette 2
3
Cassette 3
4
Cassette 4
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R,
B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku
hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom 1 to 4
5
Cassette 3
6
Cassette 4
7
Cassette 5
A4, Letter, B5 (Fixed to one of sizes.)
Capacity
Page
Plain, Rough,
Vellum, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond,
Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched,
Letterhead,
Envelope, Thick,
High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
500 sheets
(80 g/m2)
page 3-4
Plain, Rough,
Vellum, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond,
Color, Prepunched,
Letterhead, Thick,
High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
1,500 sheets
(80 g/m2)
page 3-14
3,000 sheets
(80 g/m2)
page 3-16
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper
jams or other faults.)
• For higher quality color printing, use special color paper.
3-3
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading in Cassette 1
1
Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
NOTE
Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.
2
Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
NOTE
When using Legal size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it
down.
3-4
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3
Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the cassette.
4
Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
5
Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely
against the paper.
If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
3-5
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
6
Gently push the cassette back in.
7
Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and
type of paper to be placed.
8
Display the screen.
9
Configure the function.
[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 1" [Next]
Select the paper size and paper type.
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
NOTE
Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
3-6
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading in Cassette 2
1
Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
NOTE
Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.
2
Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
NOTE
When using 12×18" size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it
down.
3-7
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3
Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the cassette.
NOTE
When using SRA3/12×18", A3, or Ledger paper, adjust the auxiliary guide accordingly.
4
Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
3-8
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
5
Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely
against the paper.
If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
6
Gently push the cassette back in.
7
Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and
type of paper to be placed.
8
Display the screen.
9
Configure the function.
[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 2" [Next]
Select the paper size and paper type.
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
NOTE
Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
3-9
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes
Load envelope or cardstock in the cassettes. Here, we'll explain the procedures for cassette 1, as an example.
1
Pull Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.
NOTE
Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.
2
Remove the envelope feed guide.
3
Expand the lever of the envelope feed guide when loading envelopes
larger than Envelope C5 which has a width of 162 mm (6.4").
When loading cardstock, go to step 5.
3-10
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
4
Attach the envelope feed guide as shown in the illustration.
5
Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
6
Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right
sides of the cassette.
The illustration below shows that the lever of the envelope feed guide is expanded.
3-11
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
7
Load the envelope with the print side facing up.
Example: When printing the address.
IMPORTANT
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of
envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the
wrong direction or on the wrong face.
• Ensure that loaded envelopes do not exceed the level indicator.
NOTE
Approximately 100 post cards or 30 envelopes can be set.
8
Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely
against the paper.
If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
3-12
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
9
Gently push Cassette 1 back in.
10 Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > ”Cassette 1” [Next]
11 Configure the function.
Select the paper size and type of envelope.
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
12 Set by using the printer driver on the PC.
Select the paper size and type of envelope using the printer driver on the PC.
Printing on Standard Sized Paper (page 4-4)
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)
3-13
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder
The procedures here represent the cassette 3.
1
Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
2
Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
3
Gently push the cassette back in.
3-14
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
4
Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and
type of paper to be placed.
5
Display the screen.
6
[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 3" [Next] > "Media
Type" [Change]
Configure the function.
Select the paper type.
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
3-15
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading in the Side Feeder
1
Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
2
Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing down.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
3-16
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3
Gently push the cassette back in.
4
Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and
type of paper to be placed.
5
Display the screen.
6
[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 5" [Next] > "Media
Type" [Change]
Configure the function.
Select the paper type.
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
3-17
Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper
Precautions for Outputting Paper
Paper Stopper
When using paper A3/Ledger or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.
NOTE
When using the Job Separator for output, you can if needed open the paper stopper on the Job Separator.
Envelope Stack Guide
To use an envelope, open the Envelope Stack Guide as shown below.
3-18
Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper
Stack Level Adjuster
If the paper output to the Job Separator is significantly curled, you can extend the Stack Level Adjuster as described in
the figure.
Extending the Stack Level Adjuster
Restoring the Stack Level Adjuster
3-19
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Preparation for Sending a Document to a
Shared Folder in a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 8.1 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other
versions of Windows.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Making a note of the computer name and full
computer name
Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.
1
Display the screen.
In Windows 8.1, right-click [PC] in the Start screen and select [Properties]. Or, right-click the
Window icon and select [System].
In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [Computer] from [Libraries],
and then select [Properties].
NOTE
In Windows XP, right-click [My Computer] and select [Properties]. The [System
Properties] dialog box appears. Click the [Computer Name] tab in the window that
appears.
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Computer] and then [System
Properties].
In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [System].
2
Check the computer name.
Check the computer name and full computer name.
Screen example:
Computer name: PC001
Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com
Windows XP:
If the full computer name does not have a dot (.), the full computer name and the computer
name are the same.
If the full computer name has a dot (.), the text string in front of the dot (.) in the full computer
name is the computer name.
Example:
PC001.abcdnet.com
PC001 is the computer name
PC001.abcdnet.com is the full computer name
3-20
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
After checking the computer name, click the
"System Properties" screen.
[Close] button to close the
In Windows XP, after checking the computer name, click the [Cancel] button to close the
"System Properties" screen.
Making a note of the user name and domain name
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1
Display the screen.
Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Command Prompt" in the search box. Select [Command
Prompt] in the search list.
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [All Programs] (or [Programs]),
[Accessories] and then [Command Prompt].
In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Command Prompt].
The Command Prompt window appears.
2
Check the domain name and user name.
At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].
Check the user name and domain name.
Screen example:
User Name:
james.smith
Domain Name: ABCDNET
3-21
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared
Folder
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group.
1 Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], [Appearance and
Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
In Windows XP, click [My Computer] and select [Folder Options] in [Tools].
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Appearance
and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
In Windows 10, open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then
[Folder Options].
2
1
Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.
2
3
Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced
settings".
In Windows XP, click the [View] tab and remove the checkmark from
[Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".
1
Create a folder.
1 Create a folder on your computer.
For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.
3-22
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property], and click [Sharing] and
[Advanced Sharing].
1
2
In Windows XP, right-click the "scannerdata" folder and select [Sharing and Security] (or
[Sharing]).
2
Configure permission settings.
1 Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.
1
2
In Windows XP, select [Share this folder] and click the [Permissions] button.
2 Make a note of the [Share name].
3 Click the [Add] button.
3-23
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
4 Specify the location.
1
1
2
1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page 3-21 is the same as the domain
name:
If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Locations] button,
select the computer name, and click the [OK] button.
Example: PC001
If the computer name that you made a note of on page 3-21 is not the same as the
domain name:
If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does
not appear in "From this location", click the [Locations] button, select the text after the
dot (.), and click the [OK] button.
Example: abcdnet.com
Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-21)
2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK]
button.
Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a
user.
5 Set the access permission for the user selected.
1 Select the user you entered.
2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the
"Change" and "Read" permissions
1
3 Press [OK].
2
3
In Windows XP, go to step 7.
NOTE
"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen
security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]
checkmark.
6 Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.
7 Check the details set in the [Security] tab.
3-24
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
1 Select the [Security] tab.
1
2 Select the user you entered.
If the user does not appear on "Group or
user names", click [Edit] button to add user
in a similar way of "configuration of
permission settings".
2
3
3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on
[Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and
"Read & execute" permissions.
4 Click the [Close] button.
4
In Windows XP, make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow] checkbox for the "Modify"
and "Read & execute" permissions, and click the [OK] button.
Configuring Windows Firewall
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
1
Check file and printer sharing.
1 In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then
[Windows Firewall].
NOTE
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
3-25
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.
1
2
3
2
Add a port.
1 In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and
[Check firewall status].
2 Select [Advanced settings].
3 Select [Inbound Rules].
3-26
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
4 Select [New Rules].
5 Select [Port].
1
2
6 Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter
"445" then click [Next].
1
2
3
3-27
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
7 Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.
1
2
8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.
1
2
9 Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].
1
2
3-28
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
In Windows 7
1 In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and
Security], and then [Allow a program through Windows Firewall].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2 Configure the settings.
Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-25)
In Windows XP or Windows Vista
1 In Windows XP, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], and then
[Windows Firewall].
In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Security],
and then [Turn Windows Firewall on or off].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2 Click the [Exceptions] tab and then the [Add port...] button.
3 Specify Add a Port settings.
Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port.
Enter "445" in "Port Number". Select [TCP] for "Protocol".
4 Click [OK] button.
In Windows 10
1 In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control Panel],
[System and Security], and then [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2 Configure the settings.
Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-25)
3-29
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address
Book
Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.
The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (Only on products with the fax
function installed).
NOTE
• Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-69)
• Editing of the Address Book and One Touch Keys can be restricted to administrators.
Edit Restriction (page 8-65)
Adding a Destination (Address Book)
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a
group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE
If registering and editing of the Address Book is restricted to administrators, you can edit the Address Book by logging
in with administrator privileges.
Edit Restriction (page 8-65)
Command Center RX User Guide
Registering a contact address
A maximum of 2,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (Only on products with the
fax function installed).
1
2
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "Address Book" [Add/Edit] > [Add] >
[Contact] > [Next]
Add the name.
1 Select "Address Number" [Change].
2 Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter "0000".
NOTE
Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of
2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when
you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address
number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
3 Select [OK].
The screen shown in step 1 reappears.
3-30
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
4 Select "Name" [Change].
5 Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and
select [OK].
The screen shown in step 1 reappears.
NOTE
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
3
Add the address.
E-mail Address
"E-mail Address" [Change] > Enter the E-mail address > [OK]
NOTE
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
3-31
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
The Folder (SMB) Address
"Host Name", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login Password" [Change] > Enter the
information > [OK]
NOTE
For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the information
that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating shared folders,
refer to the following:
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-20)
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item
Description
Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name*1
Computer name
Up to
70 characters
Path
Share name
Up to
128 characters
For example: scannerdata
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
share name\folder name in shared folder
Login User
Name*2
If the computer name and domain name are the
same:
Up to
64 characters
User Name
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Login Password
Windows logon password
(Case sensitive.)
Up to
64 characters
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 445.
*2 When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\"
cannot be used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user name
needs to be input by using "@."
(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)
To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select "Search Folder from Network" or "Search
Folder by Host Name" [Next].
If you selected "Search Folder from Network" [Next], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",
and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
If you pressed "Search Folder by Host Name"[Next], you can search all PCs on the network
for a destination.
A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you
want to specify in the screen that appears, and select [Next]. The login user name and login
password entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the
shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [Next]. The
address of the selected shared folder is set.
Select the folder from the Search Results list.
3-32
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE
• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
• Select [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the
connection fails, check the entries you made.
The Folder (FTP) Address
"Host Name", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login Password" [Change] > Enter the
information > [OK]
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item
Descriptions
Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name*1
Host name or IP address of FTP server
Up to
70 characters
Path*2
Path for the file to be stored
For example: User\ScanData
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home
directory.
Up to
128 characters
Login User Name
FTP server login user name
Up to
64 characters
Login Password
FTP server login password
Up to
64 characters
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:21)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 21.
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is
combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.
NOTE
• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
• Select [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the
connection fails, check the entries you made.
4
Check if the destination entry is correct > [Save]
The destination is added to the Address Book.
To register the registered address in a one-touch key, select [Save] > [Yes]
NOTE
Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-37)
3-33
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Add the group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a
group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE
To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed
before proceeding. Up to 100 destinations for the E-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, 100 destinations for the i-FAX,
and a total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per group.
1
2
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key> [Edit Destination] > "Address Book" [Add/Edit] > [Add] >
[Group] > [Next]
Add the name.
1 Select "Address Number" [Change].
2 Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2,500).
To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".
NOTE
• Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of
2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears
when you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the
address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
3
Select [OK]. The "Add Group" screen reappears.
4 Select "Name" [Change].
5 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book > [OK]
The "Add Group" screen reappears.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
3
Select the members (destinations).
1 [Member] > [Add]
2 Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group > [OK]
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-44)
If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 2 to 3.
3-34
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
4
Check if the selected destination was added to the group >
[Save]
The group is added to the Address Book.
To register the registered address in a one-touch key, select [Save] > [Yes]
NOTE
Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-37)
Editing Address Book Entries
Edit the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "Address Book" [Add/Edit]
2 Select a destination or group to edit > [Detail]
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Specifying Destination (page 5-41)
2
Edit the destination.
Editing a Contact
1 Change "Name", "Address Number" and destination type and address.
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-30)
2 [Save] > [Yes]
Register the changed destination.
Add a destination to a group
1 Change "Name" and "Address Number".
Add the group (page 3-34)
2 [Member] > [Add]
3 After you have completed the changes, [Save] > [Yes]
Register the changed destination.
To delete any destination from the group
1 [Member] > Select the delete destination > [Delete] > [Yes]
2 After you have completed the changes, [Save] > [Yes]
Register the changed destination.
3-35
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Deleting Address Book Entries
Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key> [Edit Destination] > "Address Book" [Add/Edit]
2 Select a destination or group to delete.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Specifying Destination (page 5-41)
2
[Delete] > [Yes]
Delete the contact or group.
3-36
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch
Key)
Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key. A maximum of 1,000 destinations can be registered.
NOTE
• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.
Specifying Destination (page 5-41)
• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Command Center RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-69)
• If registering and editing of the One Touch Keys is restricted to administrators, you can edit the One Touch Keys by
logging in with administrator privileges.
Edit Restriction (page 8-65)
Command Center RX User Guide
1
Display the screen.
2
Add One Touch Keys.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "One Touch Key" [Add/Edit]
1 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination > [Add/Edit]
Selecting [No.] or the Quick No. Search key on the numeric keypad enables direct entry of
a One Touch Key number.
NOTE
For the Quick No. Search key, refer to the following:
Using the Quick No. Search Key (page 2-24)
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
Edit Destination - One Touch Key
1
Add a One Touch key.
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0003
0004
0005
2
No.
CCC
Add/Edit
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
Delete
1/50
Detail
Close
m034701
2 Select "Display Name" [Change].
3 Enter the One Touch Key name displayed in the send base screen > [OK]
NOTE
Up to 24 characters can be entered.
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
4 Select "Destination" [Change].
The Address Book appears.
3-37
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
5 Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number > [Next]
Selecting [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Specifying Destination (page 5-41)
6 Select [Save].
The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
Editing One Touch Key
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "One Touch Key" [Add/Edit]
2 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) to edit. Selecting [No.] or the Quick No.
Search key on the numeric keypad enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
2
Changing the Registered Information.
1 Select [Add/Edit].
2 Select a new destination (contact or group). Selecting [Detail] shows the detailed
information of the selected destination.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Specifying Destination (page 5-41)
3 [OK] > [Save] > [Yes]
Add the destination to the One Touch Key.
Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "One Touch Key" [Add/Edit]
2 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) to edit. Selecting [No.] or the Quick No.
Search key on the numeric keypad enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
2
Delete the Registered Information.
Select [Delete] > [Yes]
The data registered in the One Touch Key is deleted.
3-38
4
Printing from PC
This chapter explains the following topics:
Printer Driver Properties Screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................................................ 4-3
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) ................................................................... 4-3
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................................................ 4-4
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6
Banner Printing ........................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Canceling Printing from a Computer ...................................................................................................... 4-15
Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing by Google Cloud Print .............................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ....................................................................................................................... 4-16
Printing with NFC ................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Printing Data Saved in the Printer .................................................................................................................... 4-18
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job .............................................................. 4-18
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................................................ 4-19
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ........................................................................ 4-19
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................................................ 4-20
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box .......................................................................... 4-20
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-21
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ......................................................................... 4-21
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-22
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 4-22
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-23
Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-23
Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-23
Quick View State .................................................................................................................................... 4-23
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................ 4-24
Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-24
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-24
Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-25
Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-25
Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-26
4-1
Printing from PC >
Printer Driver Properties Screen
The printer driver properties screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.
Printer Driver User Guide
1
3
2
No.
1
Description
[Quick Print] tab
Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click
an icon, it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
[Basic] tab
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,
destination, and duplex printing.
[Layout] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine
mode, poster printing, and scaling.
[Finishing] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and
stapling.
[Imaging] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.
[Publishing] tab
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP
film.
[Job] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine.
Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later.
Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient
when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see.
[Advanced] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
4-2
Printing from PC >
No.
2
Description
[Profiles]
Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's
a convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
3
[Reset]
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
Displaying the Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display
Help as explained below.
1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of
the screen.
1
2 Click the item you want to know about.
2
NOTE
The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings
(Windows 8.1)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when
printing. For the settings, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
1
In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and
then [Devices and Printers].
2
Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the
[Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3
Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.
4
Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
4-3
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printing from PC
This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.
NOTE
• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD
(Product Library).
• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.
• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multi purpose tray before
performing the following procedure.
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray (page 5-6)
Printing on Standard Sized Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the
print settings screen of the printer driver.
NOTE
Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-7)
1
Display the screen.
Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
4-4
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
1
2 Select the [Basic] tab.
3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.
To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock
or envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu
and select the media type.
2
3
4 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3
Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
4-5
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab
of the print settings screen of the printer driver.
The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.
NOTE
To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:
Original / Paper Settings (page 8-11)
1
Display the screen.
1 In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3 Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.
2
Register the paper size.
1 Click the [Basic] tab.
1
2
2 Click the [Page Size...] button.
3 Click the [New] button.
3
4
5
7
4 Enter the paper size.
4-6
6
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
5 Enter the name of the paper.
6 Click the [Save] button.
7 Click the [OK] button.
8 Click the [OK] button.
8
3
Display the print settings screen.
4
Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.
Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
1
2 Select the [Basic] tab.
4-7
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.
3
2
4
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu
and select the media type.
NOTE
If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media
type" menu.
4 Select the paper source in the "Source" menu.
5 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
5
Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
4-8
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Banner Printing
When a document length from 470.1 mm (18.5") to a maximum of 1,220.0 mm (48") is specified for printing, the print job
is treated as banner printing.
Max. number of sheets
1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when optional banner tray is attached*1)
Paper width
210 mm to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper length
470.1 mm to 1,220 mm (18.5" to 48")
Paper weight
136 to 163 g/m2
Media type
Heavy 2
*1 When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously For details,
refer to the follows:
Using the Banner Tray (Option) (page 4-12)
Using the Multi Purpose Tray
1
Display the screen.
2
Configure the settings.
Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
1
2 Select the [Basic] tab.
2
3
3 Click the [Page Size...] button.
4-9
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
3
Register the paper size.
1
2
3
4
5
1 Click the [New] button.
2 Enter the length (470.1 mm (18.51") or longer), and width of the custom paper size being
registered.
3 Enter the name of the paper.
4 Click the [Save] button.
5 Click the [OK] button.
4
Configure the print paper size.
1 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 3.
1
2
3
2 Click "Source" menu and select [Multipurpose tray].
3 Click "Media type" menu and select [Plain].
4 Click the [OK] button.
NOTE
When banner printing, a resolution of 600 dpi is set.
4-10
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
5
Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
When you execute printing in this case, a message appears on the machine's operation panel.
Place the paper in the Multi Purpose tray, continue to support it so that it does not fall, and
select [Continue]. To cancel printing, select [Cancel].
Job No.:
Job Name:
User Name:
Use MP tray to print on the following paper.
Set paper and press [Continue].
8.5x47"
Custom 1
Cancel
Continue
e0404
Status
IMPORTANT
• If an output tray that cannot be used for banner printing such as Mailbox (option) is
selected in the printer driver, the output tray automatically changes to a tray that
can be used.
• After pressing [Continue], support the paper with both hands so that it feeds in
correctly.
• After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does not fall. When
using the inner tray as the output location, do not stand up the stopper.
Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing
multiple banner sheets.
Message Banner Print (page 8-29)
4-11
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Using the Banner Tray (Option)
When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously.
The operation procedure for setting the banner paper by using the printer driver is the same as that of using the multi
purpose tray.
Using the Multi Purpose Tray (page 4-9)
NOTE
The paper length supported in banner tray is 470.1 mm to 1,220 mm (18.5" to 48").
1
Open the multi purpose tray.
Open the multi purpose tray until it stops.
Do not extend the multi purpose auxiliary tray.
2
Attach the banner tray.
1 Release the paper width guide lock on the banner tray and open to the maximum width.
2 Attach the banner tray to the multi purpose tray.
4-12
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
3
Load paper.
1 Open the paper width guides on the multi purpose tray to the maximum width.
Make sure that the banner tray is attached so that the paper width guides on the banner
tray are outside the paper width guides on the multi purpose tray.
2 Load banner paper so that it passes under the paper clamp bar.
3 Loop the banner paper back and place the end on the paper support.
4-13
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
4 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper.
IMPORTANT
If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
5 Adjust the paper width guides on the banner tray to the same width as the paper width
guides on the multi purpose tray and lock.
IMPORTANT
Remove the paper when banner printing finishes, or when you are not using the banner tray.
NOTE
The print confirmation screen can be set in System Menu to not appear when the banner tray is attached. This will
allow continuous printing on multiple sheets. Refer to the follows:
Message Banner Print (page 8-29)
4-14
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Canceling Printing from a Computer
To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:
NOTE
When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:
Canceling Jobs (page 5-21)
1
Double-click the printer icon (
) displayed on the taskbar at
the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog
box for the printer.
2
Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select
[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.
4-15
Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device
Printing from the Handheld Device
This machine supports the AirPrint, Google Cloud Print and Mopria. According to the supported OS and application, you
can print the job from any handheld device or computer without installing a printer driver.
Printing by AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later
products.
To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Printing by Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google. This service enables a user with a Google account to print
from a machine connected to the Internet.
The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.
It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be
registered from a PC connected to the same network.
Printing by Mopria
Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products.
Mopria Print Service needs to be installed and enabled in advance.
For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the
wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly
on a peer to peer basis.
The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.
When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by
specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.
When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.
4-16
Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device
Printing with NFC
When the Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct has been configured in advance, the network between this machine and handheld
device will be configured by simply tapping an NFC tag.
Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-32)
Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-36)
4-17
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Data Saved in the Printer
You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary.
If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box
(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.
Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.
Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-18)
Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.
You can print the documents from the following boxes.
Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-19)
Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-20)
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-21)
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-22)
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing
the Job
1
Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
2
Select the machine from the "Name" menu.
3
Click the [Properties] button.
4
Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check
box to set the function.
The Print dialog box displays.
The Properties dialog box displays.
NOTE
For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
4-18
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Documents from Private Print Box
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job
from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by
entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon
completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]
3 Select the creator of the document > [Open]
2
Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print]
2 Enter the access code.
3 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
4 Select [Start Print].
Printing starts.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print
Box
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]
3 Select the creator of the document > [Open]
2
Delete the document.
Select the document to delete > [Delete] > Enter the access code
User:
User 1
File Name
Date and Time
Size
1 File
2015/10/10 09:40
21 MB
2 File
2015/10/10 09:45
30 MB
3 File
2015/10/10 09:50
36 MB
4 File
2015/10/10 09:55
21 MB
5 File
2015/10/10 10:00
30 MB
Print
Delete
1
2/3
Detail
2
Close
b0202
Status
The document is deleted.
4-19
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Stored Job Box
In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as
necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job
Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]
3 Select the creator of the document > [Open]
2
Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print]
2 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
3 Select [Start Print].
Printing starts.
NOTE
If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be
displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]
3 Select the creator of the document > [Open]
2
Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete > [Delete]
2 If the document is protected by an access code, enter the code.
The document is deleted.
4-20
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a
document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies
are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be
stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE
• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.
• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-38)
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]
3 Select the creator of the document > [Open]
2
Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print]
2 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
3 Select [Start Print].
Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]
3 Select the creator of the document > [Open]
2
Delete the document.
Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
4-21
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining
copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while
maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can
change the number of copies to print.
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]
3 Select the creator of the document > [Open]
2
Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print]
2 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
3 Select [Start Print].
Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold
Box
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]
3 Select the creator of the document > [Open]
2
Delete the document.
Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
4-22
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status
Monitor)
The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.
NOTE
When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.
• KX DRIVER is installed.
• Either [Enhanced WSD] or [Enhanced WSD(SSL)] is enabled.
Network (page 8-47)
Accessing the Status Monitor
The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.
Exiting the Status Monitor
Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.
•
Exit manually:
Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.
•
Exit automatically:
The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.
Quick View State
The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.
1 Printing progress tab
2 Paper tray status tab
3 Toner status tab
4 Alert tab
1
2
3 4 5
6
5 Expand button
6 Settings icon
Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.
4-23
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Printing Progress Tab
The status of the print jobs is displayed.
1 Status icon
2 Job list
2
1
Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.
Paper Tray Status Tab
Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.
Toner Status Tab
The amount of toner remaining is displayed.
4-24
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Alert Tab
If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.
Status Monitor Context Menu
The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.
•
Command Center RX
If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the
Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings. This menu is not displayed when using USB
connection.
Command Center RX User Guide
•
Notification…
This sets the display of the Status Monitor.
Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-26)
•
www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
Open our website.
•
Exit
Exits the Status Monitor.
4-25
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Status Monitor Notification Settings
The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.
Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.
1
Select Enable event notification.
2
Select an event to use with the text to speech function in
Available events.
3
Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.
If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is
executed.
Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.
NOTE
The available file format is WAV.
When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text box.
4-26
5
Operation on the Machine
This chapter explains the following topics:
Using FMU Connection to Scan an
Original ............................................. 5-37
Sending to Different Types of Destinations
(Multi Sending) ............................................ 5-38
Send to Me (E-mail) .................................... 5-39
Configuring Settings before Sending ... 5-39
Sending a Document to the Mail
Address of the Logged In User ......... 5-39
Canceling Sending Jobs ............................. 5-40
Handling Destination ................................... 5-41
Specifying Destination ...................... 5-41
Choosing from the Address Book ..... 5-41
Choosing from the One Touch Key ... 5-43
Choosing from the Speed Dial .......... 5-43
Checking and Editing Destinations ... 5-44
Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-45
Recall ................................................ 5-46
How to use the FAX Function ..................... 5-47
Using Document Boxes .............................. 5-48
What is Custom Box? ....................... 5-48
What is Job Box? .............................. 5-48
What is Removable Memory Box? .... 5-49
Fax Box ............................................. 5-49
Basic Operation for Document Box .. 5-49
Creating a New Custom Box ............ 5-53
Editing Custom Box .......................... 5-54
Deleting Custom Box ........................ 5-55
Storing Documents to a Custom Box 5-55
Printing Documents in Custom Box .. 5-56
Saving Scanned Documents to a
Custom Box ...................................... 5-57
Sending Documents in Custom Box . 5-57
Sending Documents in Custom Box
to E-mail Address of Logged In User. 5-58
Moving Documents in Custom Box ... 5-60
Copying Documents in Custom Box
into Other Boxes ............................... 5-60
Copying Documents in Custom Box
to Removable Memory ...................... 5-61
Joining Documents in Custom Box ... 5-61
Deleting Documents in Custom Box . 5-62
Job Box ....................................................... 5-63
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ........... 5-63
Form for Form Overlay ..................... 5-63
Operating using Removable USB Memory . 5-65
Printing Documents Stored in
Removable USB Memory ................. 5-65
Saving Documents to USB Memory
(Scan to USB) ................................... 5-67
Check the USB Memory Information 5-68
Removing USB Memory ................... 5-68
Using the Internet Browser ......................... 5-69
Launching and Exiting the Browser .. 5-69
Using the Browser Screen ................ 5-70
Manual Staple ............................................. 5-71
Loading Originals .......................................... 5-2
Placing Originals on the Platen ........... 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document
Processor ............................................ 5-3
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ...... 5-6
Program ...................................................... 5-10
Registering Programs ........................ 5-11
Recalling Programs ........................... 5-11
Editing Programs .............................. 5-12
Deleting Programs ............................ 5-12
Application .................................................. 5-13
Installing Applications ....................... 5-13
Activating Applications ...................... 5-14
Deactivating Applications .................. 5-15
Uninstalling Applications ................... 5-15
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and
Document Box Settings) ............................. 5-16
Adding Shortcuts ............................... 5-16
Editing Shortcuts ............................... 5-17
Deleting Shortcuts ............................. 5-17
Copying ....................................................... 5-18
Basic Operation ................................ 5-18
Proof Copy ........................................ 5-20
Interrupt Copy ................................... 5-21
Canceling Jobs ................................. 5-21
Frequently-Used Sending Method .............. 5-22
Sending Document via E-mail ..................... 5-23
Configuring Settings before Sending .. 5-23
Sending Scanned Document via
E-mail .................................................. 5-23
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a
Computer (Scan to PC) ............................... 5-24
Configuring Settings before Sending .. 5-24
Sending Document to Desired Shared
Folder on a Computer ....................... 5-24
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP
Server (Scan to FTP) .................................. 5-27
Configuring Settings before Sending .. 5-27
Sending Document to Folder on an
FTP Server ....................................... 5-27
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ................... 5-29
Configuring Settings before Sending 5-29
Scanning Document Using
Application ........................................ 5-29
Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box ... 5-30
Configuring Settings before Sending 5-30
Scanning Document Stored in a Box 5-30
Useful Sending Method ............................... 5-31
WSD Scan .................................................. 5-32
Installing the Driver ........................... 5-32
Executing WSD scan ........................ 5-33
DSM Scan ................................................... 5-35
Configuring Settings before Sending 5-35
Executing DSM Scan ........................ 5-35
Scanning with File Management Utility ....... 5-37
Configuring Settings before Sending 5-37
5-1
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.
•
Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.
•
Document Processor: Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals.
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
Category
Detail
Original Type
Sheets
Booklet
Supported Sizes
Maximum 11.69" × 17"/
297 × 432 mm
A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R,
Ledger (11" × 17"/
279 × 432 mm), Letter-R
(8.5" × 11"/ 215.9 × 279.4 mm)
and 8K
Minimum 2.00" × 2.00"/
50 × 50 mm
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2
2 Align it flush against the original size
indicator plates with the back left corner
as the reference point.
1
NOTE
• A5 is detected as A4-R. Set the paper size to A5 by using the function key on the touch panel.
Original Size (page 6-18)
• For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
Original Orientation (page 6-23)
When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2
2 Align it flush against the original
size indicator plates with the back
left corner as the reference point.
1
5-2
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
NOTE
• When you wish to copy the booklet which is smaller than Letter-R, align the gutter (center of booklet) to the
Statement-R of the original size indicator plates, and select [Letter-R] on OriginalSize. When you wish to copy the
booklet which is larger than Letter-R, align the gutter (center of booklet) to the Letter of the original size indicator
plates, and select [Ledger] on OriginalSize. Select [Preview] to show a preview image and adjust the gutter to right
or left to fit the image as necessary.
Original Preview (page 2-20)
• A5 is detected as A4-R. Set the paper size to A5 by using the function key on the touch panel.
Original Size (page 6-18)
• For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes (page 3-10)
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Multi Purpose Tray (page 5-8)
CAUTION
Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen
glass.
• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open position.
Loading Originals in the Document Processor
The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are
scanned.
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Detail
Document Processor (Automatic 2-Sided)
Document Processor (Dual scan DP)
Type
DP-7100
DP-7110
Weight
35 to 160 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)
35 to 220 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2)
Sizes
Maximum A3/Ledger (11.69" × 17"/
297 × 432 mm) (Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/
297 × 1,900 mm) to Minimum A6-R/Statement-R
(4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm)
Maximum A3/Ledger (11.69" × 17"/
297 × 432 mm) (Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/
297 × 1,900 mm) to Minimum A6-R/Statement-R
(4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm)
No. of
sheets
Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled paper, Vellum
Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled paper, Vellum
paper: 140 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets) paper: 270 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 93 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 180 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
Art paper: 1 sheet
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the
document processor may become dirty.
•
Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before
loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
•
Originals with adhesive tape or glue
•
Originals with cut-out sections
•
Curled original
•
Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
5-3
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
•
Carbon paper
•
Crumpled paper
IMPORTANT
• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on
the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top
cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.
1
Adjust the original width guides.
2
Place the originals.
1 Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the
leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go. The original loaded indicator
lights when the original is placed correctly.
NOTE
For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
Original Orientation (page 6-23)
5-4
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
IMPORTANT
• Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,
readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
• Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the
maximum level may cause the originals to jam.
• Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way
that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).
2 Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set (Original size: B4/Legal or more).
DP-7100/DP-7110
5-5
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:
Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-14)
For the paper type setting, refer to the following:
Media Type Setting (page 8-15)
Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT
• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the
paper you are using.
• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may
cause a paper jam.
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.
•
A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 150 sheets
•
B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets
•
Thick paper (209 g/m2): 10 sheets
•
Thick paper (157 g/m2): 50 sheets
•
Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 50 sheets
•
Hagaki (Cardstock): 30 sheets
•
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2:
10 sheets
•
OHP film: 10 sheet
•
Coated: 10 sheets
•
Banner paper: 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48"): 1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when
optional banner tray is attached)
•
Index tab dividers: 15 sheets
NOTE
• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:
Original / Paper Settings (page 8-11)
• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the
following:
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
• Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following:
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
1
Open the multi purpose tray.
5-6
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
2
Adjust the multi purpose tray size.
3
Load paper.
Paper sizes are marked on the multi purpose tray.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multi
purpose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
IMPORTANT
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.
• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
• When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left
over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first
remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
4
Specify the type of paper loaded in the multi purpose tray using
the operation panel.
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
5-7
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Multi Purpose Tray
Load the paper with the print side facing down. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
Example: When printing the address.
1 Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard)
2 Hagaki (Cardstocks)
3 Portrait form envelopes (Open the flap)
4 Landscape form envelopes (Close the
flap)
1
2
3
4
IMPORTANT
• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to
load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE
When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:
Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-7)
Loading Index Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
1
Prepare paper.
Sort the pages so that the 1st page is at the back.
1
2
3
1
2
3
5-8
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
2
Orient the paper in the same orientation.
Place the paper print side down, oriented so that the tabs are on the trailing side of the paper
when it feeds in.
123
1 2 3
1
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1
3
2
3
1
2
3
Load paper.
Load paper in the tray.
1
1
1
1
For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
Index paper must meet the following conditions.
Item
Description
Paper size
A4/Letter
Paper weight
136 to 256 g/m2
Number of tabs
1 to 15
Length of tabs
30 mm or less
5-9
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
Operation on the Machine > Program
Program
By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number as
needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.
The programs below have been preregistered. The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in your
environment.
Program name
Description
Default Registration
ID Card Copy
Use this when you want to copy a driver's
license or an insurance card.
When you scan the front and back of the
card, both sides will be combined and copied
onto a single sheet.
Copying Functions
Combine: [2 in 1]
Continuous Scan: [On]
Original Size: A5/Statement
Paper Selection: Cassette 1
Zoom: Auto Zoom
Eco Copy
Use this to save toner consumption when
printing.
This changes color printing to black & white
with lighter density, so that the toner
consumption can be reduced.
Copying Functions
EcoPrint: [On] (Level [5])
Newspaper Copy
Use this when you want to copy a newspaper
article, or other originals printed on a colored
substrate.
This adjusts the image quality so that the
color of the substrate or the text on the
reverse side will not show on the copy.
Copying Functions
Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]
Background Density Adj.: [Auto]
Technical Drawing Copy
Use this when you want to copy a drawing
that contains shapes drawn with lines, and
graphics. Use this also when you want to
copy colored lines in black & white.
Copying Functions
Original Image: [Text]
Sharpness (All): [+3]
Background Density Adj.: [Auto]
Confidential Stamp
Use this to show a translucent text
"Confidential" on the center of the document.
Copying Functions
Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]
Stamp: Confidential
Font Size: middle
Font Color: [Black]
Stamp Position: [Center]
Display Pattern: [Transparent]
NOTE
Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program.
If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.
5-10
Operation on the Machine > Program
Registering Programs
The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Copy]
2 Select the [Program] tab while the copy mode is accessed.
2
Register the program.
1 [Add] > Select a number (01 to 50) for the program number > [Next]
NOTE
If you select a program number already registered, the currently registered functions can
be replaced with a new set of functions.
2 Enter the new program name > [Save]
The program is registered.
To display a registered program on the Home screen, select [Yes] on the confirmation
screen that appears, proceed to step 2-3.
3 Specify the position in which you want to display the icon of registered program.
4 Select [Save].
Recalling Programs
1
Recall the program.
1 Select [Program] in the Home screen, or the key of the registered program.
Selecting the key of the registered program will recall the program. If you selected
[Program], proceed to step 1-2.
2 Select the key for the program number you want to recall.
Select [No.] or the Quick No. Search key on the numeric keypad to enter the program
number (01 to 50) directly for recalling.
NOTE
If the program cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the
program might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.
2
Execute the program.
Place the originals > [Start] key
NOTE
[Program] can be pressed in each function to call up the program registered for the
function.
5-11
Operation on the Machine > Program
Editing Programs
You can change program number and program name.
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Program]
2 Select [Edit].
2
Edit the program.
1 Select the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to change.
2 Select [Edit] to change the program number and program name.
Registering Programs (page 5-11)
3 [Save] > [Yes]
Deleting Programs
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Program]
2 Select [Edit].
2
Delete the program.
1 Select the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to delete.
2 [Delete] > [Yes]
5-12
Operation on the Machine > Application
Application
The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.
Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are
available.
For details, consult your sales representative or dealer.
Installing Applications
To use applications, first install the application in the machine and then activate the application.
NOTE
You can install applications and certificates on the machine. The number of applications you can run may vary
according to the type of application.
1
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]
NOTE
• If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
• Select [Print Report] to print an application report.
2
Install the application.
1 [Add] > [OK]
2 Insert the removable memory containing the application to be installed into the USB
Memory Slot.
NOTE
When the message "Removable Memory was recognized. Displaying files. Are you
sure?" is displayed, select [No].
3 Select the application to be installed > [Install]
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].
5-13
Operation on the Machine > Application
4 Select [Yes].
Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the
installation may take some time.
Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.
NOTE
• To install another application, repeat steps 2-3 and 2-4.
• To remove the removable memory, select [Remove Memory] and wait until the
message "Removable Memory can be safely removed." appears. Then remove the
removable memory.
Activating Applications
1
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
2
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
Activate the application.
1 Select the desired application > [Activate]
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].
2 Enter the license key > [Official]
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen
does not appear, go to step 3-3. To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without
entering the license key.
3 Select [Yes].
IMPORTANT
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you
will no longer be able to use the application.
• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
3
Select the application icon in the Home screen.
Select the application icon.
The application will start up.
5-14
Operation on the Machine > Application
Deactivating Applications
1
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
2
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
Deactivate the application.
Select the desired application to exit > [Deactivate]
NOTE
Select [x] on the screen if you want to exit the already activated application.
The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.
Uninstalling Applications
1
Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
2
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
Deactivate the application.
1 Select the application you want to delete > [Delete]
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].
2 Select [Yes].
5-15
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Registering Shortcuts
(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
You can register shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. The settings for
the selected function can also be registered. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as
necessary.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in
which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.
1
In each function, display the configuration screen you want to
register.
2
Register the shortcuts.
1 Select the setting you want to add.
2 Select [Add Shortcut].
Copies
Memo Page
Layout
Off
Layout A
Top
L to R
Top
R to L
None
Layout B
Border Line
: A4
: 50%
: A4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Preview
Top
L to B
Top Edge
on Top
Top
R to B
Original
Orientation
Proof Copy
Add Shortcut
OK
Cancel
c023003
Status
3 Select the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to register.
NOTE
If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can
be replaced with a new one.
4 Enter the shortcut name > [Save].
Copies
Memo Page
Preview
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Quick Setup
Zoom
Density
Shortcut 5
Proof Copy
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Off
Off
Combine
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Staple
/Punch
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
c010101_05
The shortcut is registered.
5-16
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Editing Shortcuts
1
In the setup screen of each function, select [Add Shortcut] in
the bottom of the screen.
2
Edit the shortcut
1 Select [Edit].
2 Select the shortcut key you want to edit.
3 Select "Shortcut No" [Change] or "Shortcut Name" [Change] > Change the settings >
[OK].
4 [Save] > [Yes]
Deleting Shortcuts
1
In the setup screen of each function, select [Add Shortcut] in
the bottom of the screen.
2
Delete the shortcut
1 Select [Edit].
2 Select the shortcut key you want to delete > [Delete this Shortcut] > [Yes]
5-17
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Copying
The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.
Basic Operation
1
[Home] key > [Copy]
2
Place the originals.
1 Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
2 Check the preview image.
Check the Original, Zoom, and Paper settings.
Copies
Shortcut 1
Preview
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Quick Setup
Zoom
Density
Shortcut 5
Proof Copy
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Off
Off
Image Quality
Combine
Staple
/Punch
Layout/Edit
Shortcut 6
Advanced
Setup
Program
c010101_01
NOTE
Select [Preview] to show a preview image.
Original Preview (page 2-20)
3
Select the functions.
To configure the settings for functions, select the function key.
How to Select Functions (page 6-2)
5-18
Operation on the Machine > Copying
4
Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.
Select the [Numeric Keypad] key or the area for inputting the number of sheets to display the
numeric keypad. Specify the desired number up to 999.
Copies
Shortcut 1
Preview
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Quick Setup
Zoom
Density
Shortcut 5
Proof Copy
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Off
Off
Image Quality
Shortcut 6
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Program
c010101_04
5
Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
NOTE
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the
original will be scanned while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the
reserved copy job is printed. If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], [Reserve Next] will
appear. Select [Reserve Next] and configure the necessary settings for the copy job.
Reserve Next Priority (page 8-32)
Copies
Job No.:
000021
Job Name:
Scanner Setting
doc20151010101034
User Name:
-----
Printer Setting
Scanned Pages
Copies
A4
A4
100%
2-sided
2-sided
Collate
Plain
Top Edge on Top
Tray A
Cancel
Reserve Next
a01c02
Status
5-19
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Proof Copy
It is possible to copy one sheet before copying a large number of sheets. This enables you to check the contents and
finishing and copy the desired number of sheets without scanning the original if you are satisfied with the result. If you
want to make changes, you can change the settings and copy only one sheet again.
1
Configure the settings.
2
Select [Proof Copy].
Place the originals onto the machine, and configure the copy settings.
Copies
Shortcut 1
Preview
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original
Zoom
Paper
Paper
Selection
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Density
Shortcut 5
Proof Copy
Quick Setup
Zoom
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Off
Off
Image Quality
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
c010101_04
3
Check.
Check contents and finishing.
Modify copy settings according to results. All functions except for functions whose keys are
grayed out on the touch panel can be corrected.
To perform a proof copy again, select [Proof Copy].
4
Press the [Start] key.
Remaining sheets are copied.
5-20
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
NOTE
• If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and
printing resumes.
You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay as required.
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-67)
• The interrupt copy function may be unavailable depending on the status of document finisher usage. In this case, try
the priority override.
Priority Override (page 6-65)
1
Configure the settings.
1 Select the [Interrupt] key.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.
2
Press the [Start] key.
3
When interrupt copying ends, select the [Interrupt] key.
Interrupt copying begins.
The machine resumes the paused print jobs.
Canceling Jobs
1
Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.
2
Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned
The copy job is canceled.
When there is a job printing or on standby
Canceling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]
NOTE
If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], the Copying screen appears in the touch panel. In such case, selecting the [Stop]
key or [Cancel] will cancel the printing job in progress.
Reserve Next Priority (page 8-32)
5-21
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
Frequently-Used Sending Method
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In
order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is
recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.
•
Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
Sending Document via E-mail (page 5-23)
•
Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 5-24)
•
Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 5-27)
•
Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 5-29)
NOTE
• Different sending options can be specified in combination.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-38)
• The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
FAX Operation Guide
5-22
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail
Sending Document via E-mail
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
Configuring Settings before Sending
Before sending an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings using the Command Center RX.
E-mail Settings (page 2-65)
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail
1
[Home] key > [Send]
2
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
3
In the basic screen for sending, select [E-mail Addr Entry].
4
Enter destination E-mail address > [OK]
Up to 128 characters can be entered.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. Up to
100 E-mail addresses can be specified.
You can register the entered E-mail address in the Address Book by selecting [Add Address
Book]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination.
Destinations can be changed later.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-45)
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.
Broadcast (page 8-34)
5
Select the functions.
Press tabs to display other functions.
Send (page 6-5)
6
Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
5-23
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
Sending Document to Desired Shared
Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer.
Configuring Settings before Sending
Before sending a document, configure the following settings.
•
Make a note of the computer name and full computer name
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name (page 3-20)
•
Make a note of the user name and domain name
Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-21)
•
Create a shared folder and make a note of a shared folder
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 3-22)
•
Configure the Windows firewall
Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-25)
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a
Computer
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
1
[Home] key > [Send]
2
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
3
In the basic screen for sending, select [Folder Path Entry].
4
Enter the destination information.
1 Select [SMB].
5-24
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
2 Select the key of each item > enter the destination data > [OK].
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
The table below lists the items to be set.
Item
Detail
Max.
characters
Host Name *1
Computer name
Up to
70 characters
Path
Share name
Up to
128 characters
For example: scannerdata
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
share name\folder name in shared folder
Login User Name*2
If the computer name and domain name are
the same:
Up to
64 characters
User Name
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are
different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Login Password
Windows logon password
(Case sensitive.)
Up to
64 characters
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 445.
*2 When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\"
cannot be used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user
name needs to be input by using "@."
(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)
To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select "Search Folder from Network" or "Search
Folder by Host Name" [Next].
If you selected "Search Folder from Network" [Next], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",
and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
If you pressed "Search Folder by Host Name"[Next], you can search all PCs on the network
for a destination.
Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to
specify in the screen that appears, and select [Next]. The login user name and login password
entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the
shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [Next]. The
address of the selected shared folder is set.
Select the folder from the Search Results list.
5-25
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
5
Check the status.
1 Check the information.
Change the delay as required.
2 Select [Connection Test] to check the connection.
"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If
"Cannot connect." appears, review the entry.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
You can specify a combine total of up to 10 SMB and FTP destination folders.
You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to
Address Book].
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.
Broadcast (page 8-34)
6
Select [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-45)
7
Select the functions.
Select tabs to display other functions.
Send (page 6-5)
8
Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
5-26
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP
Server (Scan to FTP)
Configuring Settings before Sending
Before sending a document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).
Protocol Settings (page 8-53)
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
1
[Home] key > [Send]
2
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
3
In the basic screen for sending, select [Folder Path Entry].
4
Enter the destination information.
1 Select [FTP].
2 Select the key of each item > enter the destination data > [OK].
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
5-27
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
The table below lists the items to be set.
Item
Data to be entered
Max.
characters
Host Name *1
Host name or IP address of FTP server
Up to
70 characters
Path*2
Path to the receiving folder
For example: User\ScanData
Up to
128 characters
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home
directory.
Login User Name
FTP server login user name
Up to
64 characters
Login Password
FTP server login password
Up to
64 characters
(Case sensitive.)
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:21)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 21.
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is
combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.
5
Check the status.
1 Check the information.
Change the delay as required.
2 Select [Connection Test] to check the connection.
"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If
"Cannot connect." appears, review the entry.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add Address
Book].
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.
Broadcast (page 8-34)
6
Select [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-45)
7
Select the functions.
Select tabs to display other functions.
Send (page 6-5)
8
Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
5-28
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
Configuring Settings before Sending
Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-55)
Setting WIA Driver (page 2-57)
Scanning Document Using Application
This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.
1
Display the screen.
1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.
2 Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application
software.
2
Configure the scan settings.
Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
3
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
4
Scan the originals.
Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.
5-29
Operation on the Machine > Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box
Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box
Follow the steps as below for scanning a document stored in a custom box using the TWAIN driver.
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
Configuring Settings before Sending
Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-55)
Scanning Document Stored in a Box
This subsection explains how to scan an original using an application supporting TWAIN.
1
Display the screen.
1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.
2 Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application
software.
2
Display lists of documents.
1 Select a custom box stored a document.
If a password has been set for the box, the password entry screen appears. Enter the
password and click the [OK] button. When you select a box, the document files in the
Custom Box appear in "Document List".
2 Set how to display the document data. Click the [Setting] button to select each item.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
3 Click [OK] button.
3
Scan the originals.
1 Select the document data to be scanned from "Document List".
Enter the document data name in the Search (Name) to find the data having the same
document data name or the document data name with the same beginning.
Click the [Detail] button to display the selected document data. When the document data
includes multiple pages, select the checkbox beside the pages you want to scan. The
selected pages will be scanned.
NOTE
In this case, the scanned page or the selected document data will not be deleted from
the Custom Box.
2 Click the [Acquire] button.
The document data is scanned.
5-30
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
Useful Sending Method
You can specify the following useful scanning (sending) methods.
WSD Scan: Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
WSD Scan (page 5-32)
DSM Scan: A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a scan
process from Active Directory.
DSM Scan (page 5-35)
Scanning with File Management Utility: Scans a document using the settings of File Management Utility and saves it to
a specified network folder or PC.
Scanning with File Management Utility (page 5-37)
Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending): Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses,
folders, etc.) in a single operation.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-38)
Send to Me (E-mail): Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.
Send to Me (E-mail) (page 5-39)
5-31
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE
• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and
"WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.
WSD Scan (page 8-54)
• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
Installing the Driver
For Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Microsoft Windows Server 2012
1
Click [Search] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [View
devices and printers].
2
Install the driver.
Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the
installation is completed.
For Windows 7
1
Display [Network] in the Start menu.
Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Network].
NOTE
When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.
1 Right-click [Start] and click [Property] in the menu that appears.
2 Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and
click [Customize].
3 When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box
and click [OK].
5-32
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
2
Install the driver.
Right-click the machine's icon and then click [Install].
NOTE
If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].
If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].
During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver
Software Installation" screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the
[Driver Software Installation] screen, the installation is completed.
For Windows 10
1
Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control
Panel] and then [View devices and printer].
2
Install the driver.
Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the
installation is completed.
Executing WSD scan
1
[Home] key > [Send]
2
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
3
Display the screen.
Select [WSD Scan/DSM Scan].
If DSM Scan is set to [Off] in the network settings, select [WSD Scan] and go to step 4.
DSM Scan (page 8-54)
4
Scan the originals.
Procedure using this machine
1 [From Operation Panel] > [Next]
5-33
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
2 Select the destination computer > [OK]
Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.
You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [Detail].
3 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
4 Press the [Start] key.
Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.
Procedure from Your Computer
1 [From Computer] > [Start]
2 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.
5-34
Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan
DSM Scan
A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a scan process
from Active Directory. This function only supports the computers installed Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server
2012.
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
Configuring Settings before Sending
If you are performing DSM scan, check the items below.
•
The machine is connected to an Active Directory on the network that the scan process can reference.
•
"DSM Scan", "LDAP" and "HTTP" are set to [On] in Network.
Protocol Settings (page 8-53)
•
"SSL" is set to [On] in Network.
Security Settings (page 8-57)
•
[Network Authentication] is set in.
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
NOTE
If the Active Directory that the scan process can reference is not on the network authentication server, DSM must be
set in Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Executing DSM Scan
1
[Home] key > [Send]
NOTE
Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, select
[Cancel] to display the screen for sending.
2
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
5-35
Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan
3
Display the screen.
Select [WSD Scan/DSM Scan].
If WSD Scan is set to [Off] in the network settings, select [DSM Scan] and go to step 5.
WSD Scan (page 8-54)
4
[DSM Scan] > [Next]
5
Select the scan process to be used > [OK].
Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.
To check the settings, select [Detail].
6
7
Change the settings and add destinations as needed.
Only E-mail addresses can be added as destinations.
In the send base screen, select [Detail/Edit], [Destination], and then [Address Book] or
[E-mail Addr Entry], and add a destination.
In some scan processes, it may not be possible to change settings or add destinations.
Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
5-36
Operation on the Machine > Scanning with File Management Utility
Scanning with File Management Utility
"FMU Connection" is installed on the machine as a standard application.
FMU Connection can be used to scan an original according to the settings configured with "File Management Utility" on
the provided DVD, and save the image data and scanning information on a specified server or in a specified folder.
Unlike regular transmission functions, this application lets you use metadata such as the scan date and time and the
data format.
Configuring Settings before Sending
The first time you use FMU Connection, you must activate it in System Menu.
Application (page 8-73)
To use this function, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for the
multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. To install File Management Utility, refer
to the following.
Installing Software (page 2-45)
NOTE
For information on using File Management Utility, refer to the following:
File Management Utility User Guide
Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original
1
Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the
computer (or server) on which File Management Utility is
installed.
2
Place the original.
3
Select [FMU Connection].
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary
information and select [Next].
5
When the scan settings screen appears, press each item and
configure the necessary settings.
FMU Connection starts.
The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.
6
Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
5-37
Operation on the Machine > Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
Sending to Different Types of Destinations
(Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP), fax numbers and i-FAX. This is
referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in
a single operation.
No. of broadcast items: Up to 500
However, number of items are restricted for the following sending options.
•
E-mail: Up to 100
•
Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 10 SMB and FTP
•
i-FAX: Up to 100
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or
folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one
time.
NOTE
• If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be specified.
Broadcast (page 8-34)
5-38
Operation on the Machine > Send to Me (E-mail)
Send to Me (E-mail)
When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
Configuring Settings before Sending
To use this function, configure the followings.
To use this function, the function icon must be displayed in the home screen.
Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)
An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
Sending a Document to the Mail Address of the
Logged In User
1
Select [Home] key.
2
Select [Send to Me (E-mail)].
5-39
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs
Canceling Sending Jobs
1
Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.
2
Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned
Job Cancel appears.
When there is a job sending or on standby
Canceling job screen appears.
Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]
NOTE
Selecting the [Stop] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.
5-40
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Handling Destination
This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.
Specifying Destination
Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly:
•
Choosing from the Address Book
Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-41)
•
Choosing from the External Address Book
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
•
Choosing from One Touch key
Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-43)
•
Choosing from the Speed Dial
Choosing from the Speed Dial (page 5-43)
•
Choosing from the FAX
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.
Default Screen (page 8-33)
• If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other
party number using the numeric keypad.
Choosing from the Address Book
For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following:
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-30)
1
In the basic screen for sending, select [Address Book].
NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
2
Select the destinations.
Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations
are indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use an address book on the LDAP server,
select "Addr Book" [Ext Address Book].
5-41
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
You can change the order in which the destinations are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.]
from the "Sort".
NOTE
• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be selected. This also
applies to a group in which multiple destinations are registered.
Broadcast (page 8-34)
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. Advanced search by type or by
initial letter is also available.
Address Book
Address Book
Addr Book
Dest.
1
2
3
4
No.
Type
Sort
Name
Name
Detail
0001
ABCD
abcd@efg.com
0002
TUVW
tuvw@xyz.com
0003
Group1
Member:
3
0004
Group2
Member:
2
0005
Group3
Member:
4
Search(Name)
ABC
DEF
E-mail
GHI
JKL
MNO
Folder
PQRS TUV
WXYZ
FAX
Search(No.)
1/2
Add/Edit
Address Book
Detail
0-9
Group
i-FAX
Cancel
Keys used
OK
s02010101
Status
Search type
Subjects searched
1
Search by name
Search by registered name.
2
Search by number
Search by registered address number.
3
Advanced search
by initial letter
Advanced search by initial letter of registered name.
4
Advanced search
by destination
Advanced search by type of registered destination
(E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX, i-FAX or Group).
(FAX: Only when the optional FAX Kit is installed. iFAX: Only when the optional Internet FAX Kit is
activated.)
You can set this function up so that destination types
are selected when the address book is displayed.
For details, refer to the following:
Narrow Down (page 8-65)
3
Accept the destination > [OK]
Destinations can be changed later.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-45)
.
NOTE
• To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete and select [Delete].
• You can set the default "Sort" settings.
Sort (page 8-65)
5-42
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Choosing from the One Touch Key
In the basic screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.
NOTE
If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, select [ ] or [ ] to scroll and view
next or previous One Touch Keys. This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.
For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-37)
Destination
Enter Destination.
Destination
Detail
Address
Book
1/1
E-mail
Addr Entry
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook
Direct
0001
AAA
Chain
0002
0003
BBB
0006
FFF
CCC
0007
DDD
HHH
Quick Setup
Delete
0004
0008
GGG
Destination
Detail/Edit
FAX No.
Entry
0005
No.
0010
1/100
EEE
0009
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
Recall
i-FAX
Addr Entry
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
s0101_04
Status
Choosing from the Speed Dial
Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to 1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial).
In the basic screen for sending, select [No.] or the Quick No. Search key on the numeric keypad and use the numeric
keys to enter the speed dial number in the numeric entry screen.
NOTE
If you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit, select [OK].
Destination
Enter Destination.
Destination
Detail
Address
Book
1/1
E-mail
Addr Entry
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook
Direct
0001
AAA
Chain
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
Destination
Detail/Edit
0003
CCC
0007
GGG
Quick Setup
0004
DDD
0008
HHH
Delete
FAX No.
Entry
0005
No.
0010
1/100
EEE
0009
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
Recall
i-FAX
Addr Entry
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
s0101_04
Status
5-43
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Checking and Editing Destinations
1
Display the screen.
Specify the destination.
Specifying Destination (page 5-41)
2
Check and edit the destination.
Select a destination and select [Detail/Edit] to check it. The entered addresses can be edited
if they have been specified.
Select a destination and select [Delete] to remove the destination from the list..
NOTE
• When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination, the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same destination again, and select [OK].
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-33)
• When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears
after pressing the [Start] key.
Dest. Check before Send (page 8-33)
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-45)
5-44
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Confirmation Screen of Destinations
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing
the [Start] key.
Dest. Check before Send (page 8-33)
Destination
Check the destination list through the last page.
After checking the list, press [Check] and then Start key.
Destination
1
Detail
A OFFICE
1234567890
1/1
Detail
Delete
Check
2
Cancel
02/02/2013 s0501
10:10
Status
1 Select [
] or [
] to confirm all destination.
Selecting [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]
To add the destination, select [Cancel] and then return to the destination screen.
2 Select [Check].
NOTE
Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot
select [Check] unless you have confirmed all destination.
5-45
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Recall
Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to
the same destination, select [Recall], and you can call the destination you sent on the destination list.
1
Select [Recall].
The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.
NOTE
When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also
displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.
2
Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
NOTE
• When [On] is selected in "Dest. Check before Send", a destination confirmation screen is
displayed when you press the [Start] key.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-45)
• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.
- When you turn the power off
- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)
- When you log out
5-46
Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function
How to use the FAX Function
On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make
use of FAX functionality.
FAX Operation Guide
5-47
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Using Document Boxes
Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer and sharing it with multiple users.
The available Document Boxes are as follows: Custom Box, Job Box, Removable Memory Box, and Fax Box.
What is Custom Box?
Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You
can create or delete a Custom Box.
The following operations are possible:
•
Creating a new Custom Box
•
Printing Document in a Custom Box
•
Saving scanned documents to a Custom Box
•
Sending Documents in a Custom Box
•
Editing Documents in a Custom Box
•
Deleting Documents in a Custom Box
NOTE
The operation on Custom Box you perform from operation panel can also be made using Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
What is Job Box?
Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", "Repeat Copy Box",
and "Form for Form Overlay Box". These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE
• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.
Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-38)
• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:
Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-18)
Repeat Copy Box
Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies
later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs (page 5-63)
NOTE
Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.
Form for Form Overlay Box
Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the
forms or images for overlaying.
Form for Form Overlay (page 5-63)
5-48
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
What is Removable Memory Box?
A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data
directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory
in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).
Fax Box
Fax Box store the fax data. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of FAX functionality.
FAX Operation Guide
Basic Operation for Document Box
This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom
boxes.
NOTE
In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User Logon
privileges, refer to the following:
Editing Custom Box (page 5-54)
Box List
1 Listing the boxes by owner in alphabetical order.
1
2
2 Listing the boxes by name in alphabetical order.
3
3 Listing the boxes by number in ascending/
descending order.
No.
0001
Name
Owner
SALES
Used
Anonymous
63 MB
9
8
7
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/1
4
Store File
Custom Box
Status
Detail
Add/Edit Box
6
Open
Program
b0101_01
5
5-49
4 Saves the document in the selected box.
5 Displays the details for the selected box.
6 Opens the selected box.
7 Registers new boxes and checks, modifies or
deletes box information.
8 A box can be searched for by Box No.
9 A box can be searched for by Box Name.
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as
thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.
List
3
1 Switches between list display and thumbnail
display.
1
2
2 Listing the documents by time of update in
ascending/descending order.
Box:
4
5
File Name
Date and Time
9
Size
0001
2015101009404501
2015/10/10 09:40
21 MB
0002
2015101009504511
2015/10/10 09:50
21 MB
0003
2015101010004521
2015/10/10 10:00
21 MB
Search(Name)
1/1
Page Selection
Detail
Preview
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
8
7
6
4 Selecting more than one document at a time.
5 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.
6 Previews the selected document.
7 Select a document in the Document List and
select [Detail] to display the details for the
selected document.
Store File
Close
b020101
Status
3 Listing the documents by name in alphabetical
order.
8 Select a document in the Document List and
select [Page Selection] to display the selected
document.
9 Listing the documents by size in ascending/
descending order.
Thumbnail
1
2
3
1 Selecting more than one document at a time.
Box:
2 Highlighting a document to display its details
with [Detail].
SALES
Search(Name)
3 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.
0001
201510101057....
201510101057....
1/1
4 Prints, sends, joins, moves, copies or deletes
the selected documents.
Detail
Detail
Preview
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
5
5 Saves the document in the open box.
Close
b020102
Status
4
NOTE
You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note that you cannot
select multiple documents when you are sending documents.
5-50
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Viewing Box Details
1
Select [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen.
2
Highlight the box whose box details you wish to check and
select [Detail/Edit].
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
3
Check the box details.
4
[Cancel] > [Close]
The display returns to the default Document Box screen.
Editing Box Details
1
Select [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen.
2
Highlight the box whose box details you wish to check and
select [Detail/Edit].
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
3
Check the box details.
4
If you have changed the details, select [Save] and then select
[Yes] in the confirmation screen.
To edit details, select [Change] of the detail you wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and
select [OK].
If you do not change the details, select [No].
5
Select [Close].
The display returns to the default Document Box screen.
5-51
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details
1
Select (highlight) a document to preview and then select
[Preview] or [Detail].
2
Preview the document or check the document details.
The operations available in the preview screen are shown below.
2
1 Zoom in.
1
2 Zoom out.
3
Preview:
2015101010574501
6
No.
100%
Size
: A4
Resol.
: 300x300dpi
Color
: Full Color
4 Press to select any page of the open document
and print, send or copy to removable memory.
Selecting a page (page 5-52)
1/6
5
Select Pages to Process
3 When you have zoomed in, you can use these
keys to move the displayed area.
6 In multiple-page documents, you can change
pages by entering the desired page number.
Close
b0703
Status
5 In multiple-page documents, you can use these
buttons to change pages.
4
NOTE
The preview display can be controlled by moving your finger(s) on the touch panel.
Original Preview (page 2-20)
3
Confirm the document(s) and select [Close].
Selecting a page
When printing, sending, or copying a document within a Custom Box, you can specify any pages at will.
Select [Page Selection] in the document list screen of the Custom Box, or [Select Pages to Process] in the Preview
screen, to display the page selection screen.
Select the pages you want to work with, and select [Print], [Send], or [Copy to Memory].
2
2 Selecting more than one document at a time.
doc0001820130526224855
File:
3 Highlighting the selected document.
Selected Pages:
3
4
1 Displaying the number of pages selected.
1
1
pages
7
Select Range
Enter Pages
1/2
2/2
1/1
6
5
Print
Send
5 Selected pages can be printed, sent, or copied
to custom box.
6 You can specify the pages you want to select by
selecting [Enter Pages].
7 You can specify a range of selection by
selecting [Select Range].
Copy to
Memory
Cancel
Status
4 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.
b020103
Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-56)
Sending Documents in Custom Box (page 5-57)
Moving Documents in Custom Box (page 5-60)
5-52
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Creating a New Custom Box
NOTE
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations. They
cannot be performed with user privileges.
- Creating a box
- Deleting a box of which owner is another user.
1
Display the screen.
2
Register the Custom Box.
1 [Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit Box]
1 [Add] > Enter the information for each item > [OK]
The table below lists the items to be set.
Item
Description
Box No.
Enter the box number by selecting [+], [-] or number keys. The box
number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique
number. If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be
automatically assigned.
Box Name
Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
Owner*1
Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that
appears.
Permission*2
Select whether to share the box.
Box
Password
User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to
protect the box. Entering a password is not mandatory. Enter the same
password of up to 16 characters in both [Password] and [Confirm
Password].
This can be set if [Shared] is selected in Permission.
Usage
Restriction
The usage for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction
enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes
by selecting [-], [+] or number keys. You can enter a limit between 1 and
30,000 (MB).
5-53
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Item
Description
Auto File
Deletion
Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.
Select [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the
numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are
stored. You can enter any number between 1 and 31 (day(s)). To
disable automatic file deletion, select [Off].
Free Space
Displays the free space on the box.
Overwrite
Setting
Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when
new documents are stored. To overwrite old documents, select
[Permit]. To retain old documents, select [Prohibit].
Delete after
Printed
Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is
complete. To delete the document, select [On]. To retain the document,
select [Off].
*1 Displayed when the user login administration is enabled.
*2 Not displayed when "Owner" is set to [No Owner].
2 Select [Add].
The Custom Box is created.
Editing Custom Box
1
Display the screen.
2
Edit the custom box.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit Box]
1 Select the box > [Detail/Edit] > Enter the information for each item > [OK] > [Edit]
NOTE
• When you have logged in as a user, you can only edit a box whose owner is set to that
user.
• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.
When user login administration is enabled, the settings that can be changed varies
depending on the privileges of the logged in user.
Privileges
Administrator
Settings that can be changed
Box Name
Box No.
Owner
Permission
Box Password
Usage Restriction
Auto File Deletion
Overwrite Setting
Delete after Printed
5-54
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Privileges
User
Settings that can be changed
Box Name
Box Password
Permission
Auto File Deletion
Overwrite Setting
Delete after Printed
Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-53)
3
[Save] > [Close]
The display returns to the default Document Box screen.
Deleting Custom Box
1
Display the screen.
2
Delete the custom box.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Detail/Edit]
Select the box > [Delete] > [Yes]
NOTE
• When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete a box whose owner is set to that
user.
• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.
Storing Documents to a Custom Box
Custom box stores the print data which is sent from a PC. For the operation of the printing from the PC, refer to the
following:
Printer Driver User Guide
5-55
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Printing Documents in Custom Box
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Custom Box]
2 Select the box containing the document you want to print.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
3 Select [Open].
2
Print the document.
1 Select the document in the list that you want to print by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Select [Print].
3 Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-8)
NOTE
Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.
Registering Programs (page 5-11)
Recalling Programs (page 5-11)
If a document stored from a computer is selected, the print settings selection screen
appears.
•
To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved), select
[Print As Is]. Select [Start Print] to start printing.
•
To change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings] and change the print
settings.
After a document saved in the machine is selected, the [Use File Settings] key may
appear in the setting screen for the feature to be used.
•
To use the settings saved with the document, select [Use File Settings].
•
If you need to change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings].
4 Press the [Start] key.
Printing of the selected document begins.
5-56
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box
1
Display the screen.
2
Place the originals.
[Home] key > [Custom Box]
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
3
Store the document.
1 Select the box > [Store File]
2 Select the functions.
To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [tabs], other
selectable functions will be shown as a list.
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-8)
NOTE
• Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.
• Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.
Registering Programs (page 5-11)
Recalling Programs (page 5-11)
3 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box.
Sending Documents in Custom Box
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-60)
1
Display the screen.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
5-57
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
2
Send the document.
1 Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
You cannot select and send multiple documents.
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Select [Send].
NOTE
Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear.
3 Set the destination.
For more information on selecting destinations, refer to the following:
Specifying Destination (page 5-41)
4 Set the sending size, original image, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-8)
NOTE
Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.
Registering Programs (page 5-11)
Recalling Programs (page 5-11)
5 Press the [Start] key.
Sending of the selected document begins.
Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address
of Logged In User.
When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
Setting before send
Before using this function, the following are necessary.
•
The function icon must be displayed in the home screen.
Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)
•
An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
Sending to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
Send to the E-mail address of the logged in user. The procedure is as follows.
5-58
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
1
Select [Home] key.
2
Select [Send to Me from BOX (E-mail)].
NOTE
When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.
5-59
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Moving Documents in Custom Box
1
Display the screen.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Move the documents.
1 Select the document in the list that you want to move by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 [Move/Copy] > [Move to Custom Box] > [Next] > select the destination of move > [Move/
Copy] > [OK]
The selected document is moved.
NOTE
If the box to which the document is to be moved is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.
Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes
1
Display the screen.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Copy the documents.
1 Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 [Move/Copy] > [Copy to Custom Box] > [Next] > select the destination of copy > [Copy] >
[OK]
The selected document is copied.
NOTE
If the box to which the document is to copied is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.
5-60
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Copying Documents in Custom Box to Removable
Memory
1
Display the screen.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Copy the documents.
1 Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 [Move/Copy] > [Copy to Removable Memory] > [Next] > select the destination of copy >
[Next] > [Copy] > [OK]
The selected document is copied.
Joining Documents in Custom Box
You can join documents within a custom box into one file.
NOTE
You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the documents to be
joined beforehand.
1
Display the screen.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Join the document.
1 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
You can join up to 10 documents.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Select [Join].
5-61
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
3 Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined.
Highlight the document you want to rearrange and select [Up] or [Down] to move it to the
correct place in the sequence.
4
[Next] > [File Name] > Enter the file name for the joined document > [OK]
NOTE
Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
5 [Join] > [Yes]
The documents are joined.
NOTE
After joining, the original documents are left unchanged. Delete the documents if they
are no longer needed.
Deleting Documents in Custom Box
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Custom Box]
2 Select the box containing the document > [Open]
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Delete the document.
1 Select the document in the list that you want to delete by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
• [Delete] is disabled until a document is selected.
• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 [Delete] > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
5-62
Operation on the Machine > Job Box
Job Box
This section explains the Repeat Copy Box and the Form for Form Overlay Box. For Private Print/Stored Job Box and
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box, refer to the following:
Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-18)
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs
Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies
later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted. This
section explains how to print documents saved by the Repeat Copy function.
Repeat Copy (page 6-66)
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Repeat Copy] > [Open]
2
Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print]
If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys.
2 Specify the number of copies to print as desired > [Start Print]
Printing begins.
The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the power switch is turned off.
Form for Form Overlay
Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the
forms or images for overlaying.
Storing a Form
You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the job box. One page can be registered in one form.
1
Place the original.
2
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Form for Form Overlay] > [Open]
3
Store the forms.
1 Select [Store File].
2 If necessary, select the image quality of original, scanning density, etc. before the original is
scanned.
3 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and stored in the [Form for Form Overlay] box.
5-63
Operation on the Machine > Job Box
Deleting a Form Stored
You can delete the form stored in the job box
1
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 [Form for Form Overlay] > [Open]
2
Delete the forms.
Select the form to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]
The form is deleted.
5-64
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory
Operating using Removable USB Memory
Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB
memory without having to use a computer.
The following file types can be printed:
•
PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)
•
TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
•
JPEG file
•
XPS file
•
OpenXPS file
•
Encrypted PDF file
In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine.
The following file types can be stored:
•
PDF file format
•
TIFF file format
•
JPEG file format
•
XPS file format
•
OpenXPS file format
•
High-compression PDF file format
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB
Memory
NOTE
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Memory Slot.
1
Plug the USB memory.
1 Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.
5-65
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory
2 When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying
files. Are you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes].
Displays the removable memory screen.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.
2
Print the document.
1 Select the folder containing the file to be printed.
The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
NOTE
• 1,000 documents can be displayed.
• To return to a higher level folder, select [Back].
2 Select the file to be printed > [Print]
3 Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-14)
NOTE
After a document saved in the machine is selected, [Use File Settings] may appear in
the setting screen for the feature to be used.
• To use the settings saved with the document, press [Use File Settings].
• If you need to change the print settings, select the desired feature.
4 Press the [Start] key.
Printing of the selected file begins.
5-66
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
You can store scanned documents to a removal USB memory.
NOTE
The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.
1
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
2
Plug the USB memory.
1 Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.
2 When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying
files. Are you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes] to display the removable memory screen.
Displays the Removable Memory screen.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.
3
Store the document.
1 Select the folder where the file will be stored > [Open].
The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
2 Select [Store File].
3 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-14)
4 Check the storing image.
5-67
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory
5 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.
Check the USB Memory Information
1
In the removable memory screen, select [Memory Information].
2
Once you confirm the information, select [Close].
Removing USB Memory
IMPORTANT
Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
1
Display the screen.
2
Select [Remove Memory].
[Home] key > [Remove Memory]
Select [OK], and remove the USB memory after "Removable Memory can be safely removed."
is displayed.
NOTE
USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.
Device/Communication (page 7-13)
5-68
Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser
Using the Internet Browser
If the machine is connected to the network, you can browse the Internet on the touch panel.
NOTE
To use the internet browser, "Internet Browser Setting" must be set to [On] in Internet.
Internet (page 8-72)
Launching and Exiting the Browser
Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Internet Browser]
The Internet browser starts up.
2 Use the browser screen to browse web pages.
For information on how to use the browser screen, refer to the following:
Using the Browser Screen (page 5-70)
3 To exit the browser, select [X] (Close) and then select [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.
NOTE
You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed.
Browser Environment (page 8-72)
5-69
Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser
Using the Browser Screen
The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.
1
2
1 Title bar: Displays the page title.
3
2 Text box: Pressing the text box displays a
keyboard that allows you to type text.
KYOCERA Document Solutions | Solutions
4
3 Close: Closes the Internet browser and returns
you to the application list screen.
4 Scroll bars: These allow you to scroll the
displayed page up, down, left and right by
selecting [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] or by moving one
of the slide bars with your finger.
5 Back/Forward: Displays the previous page or
the next page.
Enter URL
Search
Menu
6 Reload: Updates the page.
webapl0101
Status
5
6 7
8
9
10
7 Home page: Displays your specified home page.
You can set your home page.
11 12
Browser Environment (page 8-72).
8 Enter URL: Use this to display a desired web
page by entering the URL for that page.
9 Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page):
Displays a search menu in which you can select
"Retrieval in page" or an Internet search site.
Search Internet: Use the selected search site to
search with the entered keyword.
Retrieval in page: Search from the entered
keyword in the currently displayed page. You can
continue your search by selecting [SearchUp] or
[SearchDown].
10 Menu: Displays the browser setup menu. You
can use this menu to specify the browser's
display magnification, set the text encoding
scheme and check the server certificate.
11 Loader/Progress bar: Shows the status of page
loading. When the browser is loading a web
page, the loader changes to an animated
display.
12 Security lock icon: Displayed when you are
viewing a protected page.
NOTE
Selecting the [Reset] key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application
list screen without displaying the browser exit.
5-70
Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple
Manual Staple
You can staple copied paper manually without any print operation. It is useful when you have forgotten to set the staple
sort mode before starting copying, or when you want to staple originals.
NOTE
• This function requires the optional Document Finisher:
4,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-26)
• If there are no staples when manual stapling is performed, the stapling position lamps and stapling position key
LEDs all blink. Add staples.
Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher) (page 10-13)
• Manual stapling cannot be executed when the machine is in operation.
Maximum number of sheets available for manual stapling
Paper weight
Paper size
52 - 90 g/m2
(14.0 - 24.0 lb. Bond)
91 - 105 g/m2
(24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K
65 sheets
55 sheets
A3, B4, Folio, Ledger
30 sheets
30 sheets
Use the keys on the control section of the Finisher (optional) for manual stapling.
1 Stapling position lamps
1
2
2 Stapling position key
3
3 Stapling key / lamp
1
Press the stapling position key on the stapling control section.
2
Set the staple position.
The shutter of the paper exit area is opened and this equipment enters into the manual staple
mode.
Press the stapling position key to select the stapling position
(Back
/ Front
/ 2 Points
).
Operation is not possible while the stapling position lamps are blinking. Operate after the
lamps light solidly.
5-71
Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple
3
Load the paper.
Straighten the edges of the paper well and place
the paper front side down in the shutter opening
of the output unit.
B
A
If the near side of the paper (
) will be stapled,
place the paper against the front guide (A).
If the far side of the paper (
) will be stapled,
place the paper against the back guide (B).
If the edge of the paper (
) will be stapled at
two points, place the paper with the center
aligned to the center point between the two side
guides (A and B).
CAUTION
Do not insert your hand inside the open shutter.
NOTE
• Press the stapling position key before you place the paper. Once the paper is placed, the
stapling position key cannot be used.
• The stapling lamp lights when the paper is properly placed. If it does not light, replace the
paper.
4
Staple the paper.
Let go of the paper, and then press the stapling key.
Stapling starts. Stapling finishes and the output is delivered to tray.
CAUTION
Be sure that your hands are away from the paper while stapling is in progress.
Finishing the manual staple mode
Press the stapling position key several times until the stapling position lamps turn off. The shutter of the paper exit area
closes. It means that manual stapling is finished.
If no operation is performed for approx. 10 seconds, the manual staple mode will be automatically finished.
NOTE
The time after which manual staple mode is automatically exited can be changed.
Manual Staple (page 8-27)
5-72
6
Using Various Functions
This chapter explains the following topics:
Auto Image Rotation .........................
Negative Image .................................
Mirror Image ......................................
Job Finish Notice ..............................
File Name Entry ................................
Priority Override ................................
Repeat Copy .....................................
DP Read Action ................................
Skip Blank Page ................................
2-sided/Book Original, Book Original
Sending Size .....................................
File Format ........................................
File Separation ..................................
Scan Resolution ................................
E-mail Subject/Body ..........................
Send and Print ..................................
Send and Store .................................
FTP Encrypted TX ............................
File Size Confirmation .......................
Delete after Printed ...........................
Delete after Transmitted ...................
Storing Size .......................................
Long Original .....................................
Encrypted PDF Password .................
JPEG/TIFF Print ................................
XPS Fit to Page ................................
Functions Available on the Machine ............. 6-2
About Functions Available on the
Machine .............................................. 6-2
How to Select Functions ..................... 6-2
Copy ................................................... 6-2
Send ................................................... 6-5
Custom Box (Store File, Printing,
Send) .................................................. 6-8
Removable Memory
(Store File, Printing Documents) ....... 6-14
Functions .................................................... 6-17
Original Size ..................................... 6-18
Paper Selection ................................ 6-19
Mixed Size Originals ......................... 6-20
Original Orientation ........................... 6-23
Fold ................................................... 6-24
Collate/Offset .................................... 6-25
Staple/Punch ..................................... 6-26
Paper Output .................................... 6-30
Density .............................................. 6-31
Original Image .................................. 6-31
EcoPrint ............................................ 6-32
Color Selection ................................. 6-32
Sharpness ......................................... 6-33
Contrast ............................................ 6-33
Background Density Adj.
(Background Density Adjustment) .... 6-34
Prevent Bleed-thru ............................ 6-34
Zoom ................................................. 6-35
Combine ........................................... 6-38
Margin/Centering, Margin,
Centering .......................................... 6-40
Border Erase ..................................... 6-41
Booklet .............................................. 6-43
Duplex ............................................... 6-46
Cover ................................................ 6-49
Form Overlay .................................... 6-50
Erase Shadowed Areas .................... 6-51
Page # .............................................. 6-51
Insert Sheets/Chapters ..................... 6-53
Memo Page ...................................... 6-54
Image Repeat ................................... 6-56
Text Stamp ........................................ 6-57
Bates Stamp ..................................... 6-60
Continuous Scan .............................. 6-63
6-1
6-63
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-65
6-65
6-66
6-67
6-67
6-68
6-69
6-70
6-74
6-74
6-75
6-75
6-75
6-76
6-76
6-76
6-76
6-77
6-77
6-78
6-78
6-78
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Functions Available on the Machine
About Functions Available on the Machine
This machine provides the various functions available.
How to Select Functions
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Copies
Preview
Original
Size
Paper
Selection
Mixed Size
Originals
Original
Orientation
Fold
Collate/
Offset
Staple
/Punch
Paper Output
Function key
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Tab
Proof Copy
Quick Setup
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Program
Status
c0102
Copy
For details on each function, see the table below.
Tab
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Configure the
settings for
originals, paper,
and finishing such
as collate and
staple.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Original Size
Specify the original size to be scanned.
page 6-18
Paper Selection
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that
contains the required paper size.
page 6-19
Mixed Size
Originals
Scans the documents of different sizes that are
set in the document processor at all once.
page 6-20
Original
Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-23
Fold
Fold the finished documents.
page 6-24
Collate/Offset
Offsets the output by page or set.
page 6-25
Staple/Punch
Staples or punches printed documents.
page 6-26
Paper Output
Specify the output tray.
page 6-30
6-2
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Function key
Adjust density.
page 6-31
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-31
EcoPrint
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this
function for test prints or any other occasion
when high quality print is not required.
page 6-32
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-33
Background
Density Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such
as newspapers.
page 6-34
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleedthrough when scanning thin original.
page 6-34
Contrast
You can adjust the contrast between light and
dark areas of the image.
page 6-33
Zoom
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-35
Combine
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed
page.
page 6-38
Margin/Centering
Margin:
page 6-40
Add margins (white space). In
addition, you can set the margin width
and the back page margin.
Centering: Centers the original image on the
paper when copying onto paper
different from the original size.
Layout/Edit
Configure the
settings for duplex
printing and stamp.
Reference
page
Density
Image Quality
Configure the
settings for density
and quality of
copies.
Description
Border Erase
Erases the black border that forms around the
image.
page 6-41
Booklet
Scan multiple original pages, then print copies so
that they can be folded into a single booklet, with
a cover.
page 6-43
Duplex
Produces two-sided copies.
page 6-46
You can also create single-sided copies from twosided originals.
6-3
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Layout/Edit
Configure the
settings for duplex
printing and stamp.
Advanced
Setup
Configure the
settings for
continuous
scanning, mirror
image copies, and
Skip Blank Page
function.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Form Overlay
Prints the original document overlaid with a form
or image.
page 6-50
Erase Shadowed
Areas
When scanning with the document processor or
original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
page 6-51
Page #
Adds page numbers to the finished documents.
page 6-51
Cover
Adds a cover to the finished documents.
page 6-49
Insert Sheets/
Chapters
Insert a separator sheet, or make the first page of
the chapter the front page.
page 6-53
Image Repeat
Tiles the original image on one sheet of paper.
page 6-56
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-57
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-60
Memo Page
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes.
page 6-54
Continuous Scan
Scans a large number of originals in separate
batches and then produce as one job.
page 6-63
Auto Image
Rotation
When original and paper source size are the
same, but their orientation is different, rotate
image 90 degrees when copying.
page 6-63
Negative Image
Inverts black and white portions of the image for
printing.
page 6-64
Mirror Image
Copies the mirrored image of the original.
page 6-64
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
page 6-64
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-65
Priority Override
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top
priority.
page 6-65
Repeat Copy
Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as
necessary after a copy job is completed.
page 6-66
DP Read Action
When the document processor is used, select
the scanning operation for the document
processor. This function is displayed when the
document processor is installed.
page 6-67
Skip Blank Page
When there are blank pages in a scanned
document, this function skips the blank pages
and prints only pages that are not blank.
page 6-67
6-4
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Send
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Destination
Sending Image
Original
Size
Mixed Size
Originals
2-sided/Book
Original
Original
Orientation
Sending Size
File Format
File
Separation
Long
Original
Function key
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Tab
Destination
Quick Setup
Org./Sending
Data Format
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
Program
s0103
Status
For details on each function, see the table below.
Tab
Org./Sending
Data Format
Configure the
settings for
original type and
file format.
Function key
Description
Reference page
Original Size
Specify the original size to be scanned.
page 6-18
Mixed Size
Originals
Scans the documents of different sizes that are
set in the document processor at all once.
page 6-20
2-sided/Book
Original, Book
Original
Select the type and orientation of the binding
based on the original.
page 6-68
Original
Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-23
Sending Size
Select size of image to be sent.
page 6-69
File Format
Specify the image file format. Image quality level
can also be adjusted.
page 6-70
File Separation
Creates several files by dividing scanned original
data page by specified number of pages, and
sends the files.
page 6-74
Long Original
Reads long-sized original documents using a
document processor. This function requires the
optional document processor.
page 6-77
6-5
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Function key
Description
Density
Adjust density.
page 6-31
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-31
Scan Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
page 6-74
FAX TX Resolution
Select fineness of images when sending FAX.
Color Selection
Select the color mode setting.
page 6-32
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-33
Background
Density Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such
as newspapers.
page 6-34
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hides background colors and image bleedthrough when scanning thin original.
page 6-34
Contrast
You can adjust the contrast between light and
dark areas of the image.
page 6-33
Color/
Image Quality
Configure the
settings for
density, quality
of copies, and
color balance.
Reference page
6-6
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Advanced
Setup
Configure the
settings for
transmission
copy, encrypted
transmission,
and file size
confirmation.
Function key
Description
Reference page
Zoom
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-35
Centering
Centers the original image on the paper when
sending onto paper different from the original
size.
page 6-40
Border Erase
Erases the black border that forms around the
image.
page 6-41
FAX Delayed
Transmission
Set a send time.
Continuous Scan
Scans a large number of originals in separate
batches and then produce as one job.
page 6-63
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
page 6-64
Erase Shadowed
Areas
When scanning with the document processor or
original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
page 6-51
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-65
i-FAX Subject/
Body
Adds subject and body when sending a
document by i-FAX.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
FAX Direct
Transmission
Sends FAX directly without reading original data
into memory.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
FAX Polling RX
Dial the destination and receive documents for
Polling Transmission stored in the polling box.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Send and Print
Prints a copy of the document being sent.
page 6-75
Send and Store
Stores a copy of the document being sent in a
Custom Box.
page 6-75
FTP Encrypted TX
Encrypts images when sending via FTP.
page 6-76
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-57
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-60
File Size
Confirmation
Checks the file size before sending/storing the
original.
page 6-76
FAX TX Report
Print a report of fax transmission results.
Skip Blank Page
When there are blank pages in a scanned
document, this function skips the blank pages
and sends only pages that are not blank.
page 6-67
E-mail Subject/
Body
Adds subject and body when sending a
document.
page 6-75
6-7
Refer to the FAX
Operation
Guide.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send)
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Free Space
200.0MB
Storing Image
Function key
Original
Zoom
Store
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Original
Size
Mixed Size
Originals
2-sided/Book
Original
Original
Orientation
Storing Size
Prevent
Bleed-thru
Density
Original
Image
Scan
Resolution
Color
Selection
Sharpness
Background
Density Adj.
Preview
Tab
Quick Setup
1/2
Functions
Program
Back to List
b050201
Status
For details on each function, see the table below.
Store File
Tab
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Original Size
Specify the original size to be scanned.
page 6-18
Mixed Size
Originals
Scans the documents of different sizes that are
set in the document processor at all once.
page 6-20
2-sided/Book
Original, Book
Original
Select the type and orientation of the binding
based on the original.
page 6-68
Original
Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-23
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored.
page 6-77
Functions
Configure the
settings when
storing the
document in the
Custom Box.
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleedthrough when scanning thin original.
page 6-34
Density
Adjust density.
page 6-31
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-31
Scan Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
page 6-74
Color Selection
Select the color mode setting.
page 6-32
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-33
Background
Density Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such
as newspapers.
page 6-34
Zoom
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-35
Centering
Centers the original image on the paper when
storing onto paper different from the original size.
page 6-40
6-8
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Function key
Reference
page
Border Erase
Erases the black border that forms around the
image.
page 6-41
Continuous Scan
Scans a large number of originals in separate
batches and then produce as one job.
page 6-63
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
page 6-64
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-65
Erase Shadowed
Areas
When scanning with the document processor or
original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
page 6-51
Skip Blank Page
When there are blank pages in a scanned
document, this function skips the blank pages
and stores only pages that are not blank.
page 6-67
Contrast
You can adjust the contrast between light and
dark areas of the image.
page 6-33
Functions
Configure the
settings when
storing the
document in the
Custom Box.
Description
6-9
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Print
Tab
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Paper Selection
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that
contains the required paper size.
page 6-19
Collate/Offset
Offsets the output by page or set.
page 6-25
Staple/Punch
Staples or punches printed documents.
page 6-26
Paper Output
Specify the output tray.
page 6-30
Combine
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed
page.
page 6-38
Margin/Centering
Margin:
page 6-40
Add margins (white space). In
addition, you can set the margin width
and the back page margin.
Centering: Centers the original image on the
paper when copying onto paper
different from the original size.
Functions
Configure the
settings for paper
selection and
duplex printing
when printing from
the Custom Box.
Booklet
Print document so that it can be folded into a
single booklet, with a cover.
page 6-43
Duplex
Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided,
or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided.
page 6-46
Cover
Adds a cover to the finished documents.
page 6-49
Form Overlay
Prints the original document overlaid with a form or
image.
page 6-50
Page #
Adds page numbers to the finished documents.
page 6-51
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
page 6-64
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-65
Delete after
Printed
Automatically deletes a document from the box
once printing is complete.
page 6-76
Priority Override
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top
priority.
page 6-65
EcoPrint
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this
function for test prints or any other occasion
when high quality print is not required.
page 6-32
Zoom
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-35
Fold
Fold the finished documents.
page 6-24
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-57
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-60
6-10
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Image Quality
Configure the
settings for density
and quality of
copies.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Density
Adjust density.
page 6-31
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-31
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-33
Background
Density Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such
as newspapers.
page 6-34
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleedthrough when scanning thin original.
page 6-34
Contrast
page 6-33
You can adjust the contrast between light and
dark areas of the image.
6-11
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Send
Tab
Description
Reference
page
Sending Size
Select size of image to be sent.
page 6-69
File Format
Specify the image file format. Image quality level
can also be adjusted.
page 6-70
Function key
FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX.
Functions
Configure the
settings for file
format and FAX
transmission when
sending from the
Custom Box.
Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
Centering
Centers the original image on the paper when
sending onto paper different from the original
size.
FAX Delayed
Transmission
Set a send time.
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
page 6-64
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-65
E-mail Subject/
Body
Adds subject and body when sending a
document.
page 6-75
i-FAX Subject/
Body
Adds subject and body when sending a
document by i-FAX.
Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
FTP Encrypted TX
Encrypts images when sending via FTP.
page 6-76
Delete after
Transmitted
Automatically deletes a document from the box
once transmission is complete.
page 6-76
Zoom
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-35
File Separation
Creates several files by dividing scanned original
data page by specified number of pages, and
sends the files.
page 6-74
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-57
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-60
File Size
Confirmation
Checks the file size before sending/storing the
original.
page 6-76
FAX TX Report
Print a report of fax transmission results.
6-12
page 6-40
Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Color/
Image Quality
Configure the
settings for density,
quality of copies,
and color balance.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Density
Adjust density.
page 6-31
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-31
Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
page 6-74
Color Selection
Select the color mode setting.
page 6-32
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-33
Background
Density Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such
as newspapers.
page 6-34
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleedthrough when scanning thin original.
page 6-34
Contrast
page 6-33
You can adjust the contrast between light and
dark areas of the image.
6-13
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents)
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Free Space
200.0MB
Storing Image
Function key
Original
Zoom
Store
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Original
Size
Mixed Size
Originals
2-sided/Book
Original
Original
Orientation
Storing Size
Prevent
Bleed-thru
Density
Original
Image
Scan
Resolution
Color
Selection
Sharpness
Background
Density Adj.
1/3
Tab
Quick Setup
Functions
RemoveMemory
Back to List
b050401
Status
For details on each function, see the table below.
Store File
Tab
Functions
Configure the
settings for color
selection and
document name
when storing the
document in the
removable memory.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Original Size
Specify the original size to be scanned.
page 6-18
Mixed Size
Originals
Scans the documents of different sizes that are
set in the document processor at all once.
page 6-20
2-sided/Book
Original, Book
Original
Select the type and orientation of the binding
based on the original.
page 6-68
Original
Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-23
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored.
page 6-77
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleedthrough when scanning thin original.
page 6-34
Density
Adjust density.
page 6-31
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-31
Scan Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
page 6-74
Color Selection
Select the color mode setting.
page 6-32
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-33
Background
Density Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such
as newspapers.
page 6-34
Zoom
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-35
Centering
Centers the original image on the paper when
storing onto paper different from the original size.
page 6-40
Border Erase
Erases the black border that forms around the
image.
page 6-41
Continuous Scan
Scans a large number of originals in separate
batches and then produce as one job.
page 6-63
6-14
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Description
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
page 6-64
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-65
Erase Shadowed
Areas
When scanning with the document processor or
original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
page 6-51
Skip Blank Page
When there are blank pages in a scanned
document, this function skips the blank pages
and stores only pages that are not blank.
page 6-67
Contrast
You can adjust the contrast between light and
dark areas of the image.
page 6-33
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-57
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-60
File Format
Specify the image file format. Image quality level
can also be adjusted.
page 6-70
File Separation
Creates several files by dividing scanned original
data page by specified number of pages, and
sends the files.
page 6-74
Long Original
Reads long-sized original documents using a
document processor. This function requires the
optional document processor.
page 6-77
Functions
Configure the
settings for color
selection and
document name
when storing the
document in the
removable memory.
Reference
page
Function key
6-15
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Printing Documents
Tab
Functions
Configure the
settings for paper
selection and
duplex printing
when printing from
the removable
memory.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Paper Selection
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that
contains the required paper size.
page 6-19
Collate/Offset
Offsets the output by page or set.
page 6-25
Staple/Punch
Staples or punches printed documents.
page 6-26
Paper Output
Specify the output tray.
page 6-30
Margin
Add margins (white space). In addition, you can
set the margin width and the back page margin.
page 6-40
Duplex
Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets.
page 6-46
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
page 6-64
Priority Override
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top
priority.
page 6-65
EcoPrint
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this
function for test prints or any other occasion
when high quality print is not required.
page 6-32
Fold
Fold the finished documents.
page 6-24
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-57
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-60
Encrypted PDF
Password
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF
data.
page 6-78
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size when printing JPEG or
TIFF files.
page 6-78
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the
selected paper size when printing XPS file.
page 6-78
6-16
Using Various Functions > Functions
Functions
On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.
Icon
Description
Access to the function is indicated by icons.
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Example: Select the [Org./Paper/Finishing] tab in the
Copy screen to use the function.
Access to the function is indicated by icons.
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Example: Select the [Org./Sending Data Format] tab in
the Send screen to use the function.
Access to the function is indicated by icons.
Custom
Box
Functions
Example: Select the [Functions] tab in the Custom Box
screen to use the function.
Access to the function is indicated by icons.
USB
Memory
Functions
Example: Select the [Functions] tab in the Removable
Memory screen to use the function.
6-17
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Size
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Copy
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Specify the original size to be scanned.
Select [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
Item
Standard Sizes
1
Standard Sizes
2
Value
Description
Metric models:
Auto, A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R,
B4, B5, B5-R, B6-R, B6, Folio,
216×340 mm
Inch models:
Auto, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, Statement, 11×15",
Oficio II
Metric models:
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, Statement, 11×15",
Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Inch models:
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4,
B5-R, B5, B6-R, B6, Folio, 8K,
16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm
Have the size of original detected
automatically, or select from the
standard sizes.
Select from standard sizes except
Standard Sizes 1.
Others
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard),
Custom 1 to 4*1
Select from postcard or the custom
sized originals.
Size Entry
Metric
X: 50 to 432 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
Enter the size not included in the
standard sizes 1 and 2.*2
Y: 50 to 297 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
When you have selected [Size Entry],
select [+] or [-] to set the sizes of "X"
(horizontal) and "Y" (vertical). Select
[# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
entry.
Inch
X: 2.00 to 17.00"
(in 0.01" increments)
Y: 2.00 to 11.69"
(in 0.01" increments)
*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to the following:
Custom Original Size (page 8-11)
*2 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:
Measurement (page 8-15)
NOTE
Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.
6-18
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper Selection
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Copy
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size.
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
NOTE
• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-7)
• Cassettes after Cassette 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
To select [MP tray], select [Paper Size] and [Media Type], and specify the paper size and the media type. The available
paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Item
Paper
Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Metric models:
A3*1*3, A4-R*2*3, A4*2*3, A5-R*2*3, A5*2,
A6-R*2*3, B4*1*3, B5-R*2*3, B5*2*3,
B6-R*2*3, Folio*2*3, 216×340 mm*4,
SRA3*1*3
Inch models:
Ledger*1*3, Letter-R*2*3, Letter*2*3,
Legal*2*3, Statement*2*3, Executive,
12×18"*1*3, Oficio II
Metric models:
Ledger*1*3, Letter-R*2*3, Letter*2*3,
Legal*2*3, Statement*2*3, Executive,
12×18"*1*3, Oficio II, 8K*4, 16K-R, 16K
Inch models:
A3*1*3, A4-R*2*3, A4*2*3, A5-R*2*3, A5*2,
A6-R*2*3, B4*1*3, B5-R*2*3, B5*2*3,
B6-R*2*3, Folio*2*3, 8K*4, 16K-R, 16K,
216×340 mm*4, SRA3*1*3
Description
Select from the standard size.
Select from standard sizes
except Standard Sizes 1.
Others
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4*4, Hagaki (Cardstock)*3, Oufuku Hagaki (Return
postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*5
Select from special standard
sizes and custom sizes.
Size
Entry
Metric
X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Enter the size not included in
the standard size.*6
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)
Media type
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Value
When you have selected
[Size Entry], use [+]/[-] or the
numeric keys to set the sizes
of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"
(vertical). Select [# Keys] to
use the numeric keys for
entry.
Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (52 to 105 g/m2), Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted*7, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*7, Letterhead*7, Thick (106 g/m2 and more),
Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8*7
Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette (excluding cassette 1).
Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette.
Paper size is automatically detected in the Multi Purpose Tray.
This paper cannot be used in Cassette 1.
For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following:
Custom Paper Size (page 8-12)
6-19
Using Various Functions > Functions
*6 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:
Measurement (page 8-15)
*7 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:
Media Type Setting (page 8-15)
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
Special Paper Action (page 8-14)
IMPORTANT
When paper size and the media type for MP tray is specified, [Paper Settings] is selected. Note that if [MP
Tray] is pressed at this point, the settings will be canceled.
NOTE
• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multi purpose tray, a confirmation screen
appears. When [Auto] is selected and the same size of paper as the detected original size is not loaded, a paper
confirmation screen appears. Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and press [Continue] to start
copying.
Mixed Size Originals
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Scans the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor at all once.
This function cannot be used if platen is used. Different Width is not displayed in inch models.
Copying
Metric Models
Item
Value
Description
Off
Mixed Size
Copies
Original Width
Same Width, Different Width
Select options for the width of set original.
Same Size
Copies
Original Width
Same Width, Different Width
Select options for the width of set original.
Top Page
Direction
Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left
Select the original orientation of the first
page.
Inch Models
Item
Value
Description
Off
Mixed Size Copies
—
Originals are detected individually for size
and copied to the same size paper as
originals.
Same Size
Copies
Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left
Select the original orientation of the first
page.
Top Page
Direction
6-20
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending
Item
Mixed Size Originals
Value
Description
Off
Same Width
Scans and sends multiple sheets of the
same width using the document processor.
Different Width
Scans and sends multiple sheets of
different width using the document
processor.
Storing
Item
Value
Description
Off
Mixed Size Originals
Same Width
Scans and sends multiple sheets of the
same width using the document processor.
Different Width
Scans and sends multiple sheets of
different width using the document
processor.
Supported Combinations of Originals
Same Width
When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.
•
B4 and B5
•
Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
•
Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
Example: B4 and B5
NOTE
When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to
[On] for "Folio".
Folio and A4
Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-13)
Different Width (Available for metric models only)
The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
•
A3, B4, A4, B5
•
B4, A4-R, B5
•
A4-R, B5-R, Folio
6-21
Using Various Functions > Functions
Example: A3, B4, A4, B5
*
*
* Set the original of A4 and B5 with vertical orientation.
NOTE
• Number of sheet that can be placed in the document processor: up to 30 sheets
• When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to
[On] for "Folio".
A4-R, B5-R, and Folio
Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-13)
IMPORTANT
When placing originals of different width, arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are
aligned, and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned in this
way, they may not be scanned correctly, and skewing or original jams may result.
Selecting How to Copy Originals
Set the paper size (copy size) when printing scanned document. Select whether you wish to create individual copies on
different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size paper.
NOTE
This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
Mixed Size Copies
Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals.
B4
A4-R
B5
B4
B5
B4
A4-R
B5
Same Size Copies
Originals are all copied to the same size paper.
B4
A4-R
6-22
B4
B4
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Orientation
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Copy
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.
•
Zoom (XY Zoom)
•
Page #
•
Duplex
•
Booklet
•
Margin/Centering
•
Stapling/Punch (optional feature)
•
Border Erase
•
2-sided/Book Original
•
Combine
•
Text Stamp
•
Memo page
•
Bates Stamp
NOTE
If [On] is selected in the setting for Original Orientation in System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation
appears when you select any of the above functions.
Orientation Confirmation (page 8-18)
Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left] or [Auto].
Item
Image
Top Edge on
Top
Original
Original orientation
Original
Original orientation
Top Edge on
Left
Auto*1
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
NOTE
The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.
Orig. Orientation (Copy) (page 8-18)
6-23
Using Various Functions > Functions
Fold
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Copy
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Folds the finished documents. Select the fold method.
The following folding options and orientations are available.
Original orientation
Orientation: Landscape
Orientation: Portrait
Item
Bi-Fold
Saddle Stitch
Tri-Fold
Inside
R to L/B to T
L to R/T to B
Outside
R to L/B to T
L to R/T to B
NOTE
• Folding requires the optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher and the folding unit.
• For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be folded, refer to the following:
Folding Unit (page 11-27)
6-24
Using Various Functions > Functions
Collate/Offset
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Offsets the output by page or set.
Item
Image
Collate
Offset
Description
Scans multiple originals and delivers complete sets of
copies as required according to page number.
Without Document Finisher (Option)
Printed copies are produced after rotating each set (or
page*1) by 90 degrees.
NOTE
To use offsetting, the same size of paper as the selected
paper tray must be loaded in a different orientation in a
different paper tray.
The paper sizes supported in Offset: A4, B5, Letter and
16K.
With Document Finisher (Option)
Printed copies are segregated after each set of copies (or
after each page*1).
NOTE
•
The optional Document Finisher is required.
Inner Finisher (page 11-25)
1,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-25)
4,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-26)
•
The paper sizes supported in Offset: A3, A4, B4, B5,
216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Oficio II, 8K and
16K.
*1 If [Off] is selected for "Collate" setting, [Each Page] appears. When [On] is selected, [Each Set] appears.
6-25
Using Various Functions > Functions
Staple/Punch
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Copy
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Staple
NOTE
This function requires the optional Document Finisher. Note also that saddle stitching (center stapling) requires the
Folding Unit.
For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be stapled, refer to the following:
Inner Finisher (page 11-25)
1,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-25)
4,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-26)
Folding Unit (page 11-27)
Staples the finished documents. The staple position can be selected.
Item
Staple
Value
Description
Off
Top Left
Top Right
Select the staple position. For details on original
orientation and staple position, refer to the following:
Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page
6-29)
2 staples Left
2 staples Top
2 staples Right
Saddle Stitch
Select whether to fold the finished documents in two
with staples in the center.
When placing originals, be sure to place the cover page
at the bottom. For details on saddle stitching, refer to the
following:
Booklet (page 6-43)
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,
Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original document top edge
to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]
to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-26
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Orientation and Staple Position
1,000-Sheet Finisher, 4,000-Sheet Finisher
Original orientation
Paper orientation
Top Edge on Left
Paper orientation
Top Edge on Left
Paper orientation
Cassette paper load
direction
Cassette paper load
direction
Inner Finisher
Original orientation
Paper orientation
Cassette paper load
direction
Cassette paper load
direction
NOTE
One position staple is not slanted for the following paper sizes.
B5-R, 16K-R
6-27
Using Various Functions > Functions
Mixed Size Stapling
Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width as shown in the combinations below, the output can be
stapled.
•
A3 and A4
•
B4 and B5
•
Ledger and Letter
•
Ledger and Letter-R
•
8K and 16K
NOTE
A4
B5
Letter
A3
B4
Ledger
A4
B5
Letter
A3
B4
Ledger
• Number of sheets that can be stapled: up to 30 sheets.
• When performing Mixed Size Stapling, refer to the following:
Letter-R Legal
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)
Letter-R Legal
Punch
Punches holes in sets of finished documents.
NOTE
• This function requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.
• For details on paper sizes that can be punched, refer to the following:
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) (page 11-25)
Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) (page 11-27)
• The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole
punching.
Item
Punch
Value
Description
Off
2 holes Left
2 holes Top
Select the position of punch holes. For details on original
orientation and position of punch holes, refer to the
following:
2 holes Right
Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page
6-29)
3 holes Left
3 holes Top
3 holes Right
4 holes Left
4 holes Top
4 holes Right
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,
Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original document top edge
to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]
to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-28
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position
Image
Original
Original orientation
Print results
Glass platen
Document processor
NOTE
The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole
punching.
6-29
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper Output
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Specify the output tray.
with optional Job Separator
Item
Description
Inner tray
Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine.
Job Separator Tray
Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.
with optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher
Item
Description
Finisher Tray
Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document Finisher.
Job Separator Tray*1
Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.
*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.
with optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher
Item
Description
Tray A
Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.
Tray B
Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.
When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and tray B is set for the output
destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.
Job Separator Tray*1
Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.
*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.
with optional Mailbox
Item
Description
Tray A
Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.
Tray B
Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.
When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and tray B is set for the output
destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.
Job Separator Tray*1
Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.
Tray 1 to 7
Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox.
When [Heavy 3] to [Heavy 4] (164 g/m2 - 256 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is
set for the output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray B.
When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is set for the
output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.
*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.
6-30
Using Various Functions > Functions
NOTE
• This can be set when the optional Job Separator or Document Finisher (1,000-Sheet Finisher or 4,000-Sheet
Finisher) is installed. This cannot be set when the optional Inner Finisher is installed.
• The default setting for Paper Output can be changed.
Paper Output (page 8-17)
Density
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Adjust density.
(Value: [-4] (Lighter) to [+4] (Darker))
Original Image
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Select original image type for best results.
Copying
Item
Text+Photo*1 *2
Photo
Text*1
Graphic/Map*1
Value
Description
Printer Output
Best for mixed text and photo documents printed on this machine
originally.
Book/Magazine
Best for mixed text and photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Printer Output
Best for photos printed on this machine originally.
Book/Magazine
Best for photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo Paper
Best for photos taken with a camera.
Off
(Light Text/Fine Line)
Best for documents that are mostly text and were originally printed on
this machine.
On
(Light Text/Fine Line)
Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Printer Output
Best for maps and diagrams printed on this machine originally.
Book/Magazine
Best for maps and diagrams printed in a magazine.
*1 "Highlighter" can be selected.
Select to bring out text and markings made with a highlighter pen. Reproduces the color of the highlighter pen to the
extent possible.
*2 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
6-31
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Printing/Storing
Item
Description
Text+Photo
Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo
Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text*1
Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines. Select [Text], [Text (Fine Line)] or [Text (OCR)].
*1 The setting "for OCR" can be configured. When [Text (OCR)] is selected, scanning produces an image that is
suitable for OCR. This function is only available when Color Selection is set to Black and White.
Color Selection (page 6-32)
EcoPrint
Copy
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not
required.
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
[1] (Low) to [5] (High)
Adjust the Toner Save Level.
Color Selection
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the color mode setting.
Item
Description
Auto Color (Color/Gray)
Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and
white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white
documents in Grayscale.
Auto Color (Color/B & W)
Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and
white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white
documents in Black and White.
Full Color
Scans the document in full color.
Grayscale
Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.
Black & White
Scans the document in black and white.
6-32
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sharpness
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward
"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns
appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".
When [All] is selected, select [-3] to [3] (Blur - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
When [Text/Fine Line] is selected, select [0] to [3] (Normal - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
Less Sharp
Original
Item
All
Text/Fine Line
More Sharp
Value
Description
[+1] to [+3] (Sharpen)
Emphasizes the image outline.
[-1] to [-3] (Blur)
Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.
[0] to [3]
(Normal - Sharpen)
Makes letters and lines appear sharper.
Only text and fine lines are emphasized.
*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Contrast
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
Color/
Image Quality
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.
Lower
Original
Higher
Item
Description
[+1] to [+4] (Higher)
Increases the sharpness of colors.
[-1] to [-4] (Lower)
Creates smoother colors.
6-33
USB
Memory
Functions
Using Various Functions > Functions
Background Density Adj. (Background Density
Adjustment)
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.
This feature is used with full color and auto color. Background Density Adjustment is disabled if Auto Color detects black
and white originals.
If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the
density of the ground color.
Item
Description
Off
Does not adjust the ground color.
Auto
Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.
Manual
Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.
Prevent Bleed-thru
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
6-34
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
Copying
The following zoom options are available.
Standard Zoom
Auto
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
A3: 141%
A4
A5: 70%
Standard Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.
Use the numeric keys or select [+] or [-] to enter the any magnification.
6-35
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Value
Description
Standard Zoom
Metric
Auto,
400% Max., 200% A5>>A3,
141% A4>>A3 B5>>B4,
127% Folio>>A3,
106% 11x15">>A3,
100%,
90% Folio>>A4,
75% 11x15" >>A4,
70% A3>>A4 A4>>A5,
50%, 25% Min.
25 to 400% (in 1% increments)
Metric
(Asia Pacific)
Auto,
400% Max., 200% A5>>A3,
141% A4>>A3 B5>>B4,
122% A4>>B4 A5>>B5,
115% B4>>A3 B5>>A4,
100%,
86% A3>>B4 A4>>B5,
81% B4>>A4 B5>>A5,
70% A3>>A4 B4>>B5,
50%, 25% Min.
25 to 400% (in 1% increments)
Inch
Auto,
400% Max., 200% STMT>>Ledger,
154% STMT>>Legal,
129% Letter>>Ledger,
121% Legal>>Ledger,
100%,
78% Legal>>Letter,
77% Ledger>>Legal,
64% Ledger>>Letter,
50% Ledger>>STMT, 25% Min.
25 to 400% (in 1% increments)
6-36
Select a preset ratio.
Select [Auto] to use
Auto Zoom.
Select [+] or [-] to
change the displayed
magnification as
desired.
Select [# Keys] to use
the numeric keys for
entry.
Using Various Functions > Functions
XY Zoom
XY Zoom
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually. Magnifications can be set in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
Y
X
Item
XY Zoom
Value
Description
X: 25 to 400%
(in 1 mm increments)
Select vertical and horizontal
magnifications individually.
Y: 25 to 400%
(in 1 mm increments)
Select [+] or [-] to change the
displayed magnifications of "X"
(horizontal) and "Y" (vertical).
Select [# Keys] to use the numeric
keys for entry.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top
Edge on Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Printing/Sending/Storing
Item
Description
100%
Reproduces the original size.
Auto
Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.
NOTE
• To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Sending Size (page 6-69)
Storing Size (page 6-77)
• Some combinations of original size and paper size or sending size may cause the image to be positioned at the
edge of the paper. To center the original vertically and horizontally on the page, use the Centering function.
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering (page 6-40)
6-37
Using Various Functions > Functions
Combine
Copy
Layout/Edit
Custom
Box
Functions
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.
You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.
The following types of the boundary lines are available.
None
Item
Solid Line
Dotted Line
Positioning Mark
Value
Description
Off
2 in 1
Layout
L to R/T to B, R to L/B to T
Select the page layout of scanned
originals.
Border Line
None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the boundary line type.
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,
Auto*1
Select [Border Line] to select the page
boundary line, and select [OK].
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top
Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
4 in 1
Layout
Right then Down, Left then Down,
Down then Right, Down then Left
Select the page layout of scanned
originals.
Border Line
None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the boundary line type.
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,
Auto*1
Select [Border Line] to select the page
boundary line, and select [OK].
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top
Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-38
Using Various Functions > Functions
Layout image
Item
2 in 1
Image
L to R/T to B
R to L/B to T
4 in 1
Right then Down
Left then Down
Down then Right
Down then Left
NOTE
• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K.
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
6-39
Using Various Functions > Functions
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Copying/Printing
Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the margin width and the back page margin.
Centering: Centers the original image on the paper when copying onto paper different from the original size.
NOTE
The default setting for margin width can be changed.
Margin Default (page 8-19)
Item
Value
Description
Off
Margin
Left/Right
Top/Bottom
Back Page
Metric: -18 mm to +18 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
Inch: -0.75" to +0.75"
(in 0.01" increments)
Auto, Manual
Set the margin width.*1
Select [+] or [-] to enter the margins for "Left/
Right" and "Top/Bottom". Select [# Keys] to
use the numeric keys for entry.
For duplex copying, select [Back Page] and
select [Auto] or [Manual].
When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate
margin is applied automatically on the rear
page depending on a margin specified for the
front page and a binding orientation.
When [Manual] is set, you can set a different
margin than the front on the back. Set the
margin in the screen that is displayed. The
setting selections are the same as for the
front.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge
on Left, Auto*2
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select
[OK].
Centering*3
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge
on Left, Auto*2
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select
[OK].
6-40
Using Various Functions > Functions
*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.
Measurement (page 8-15)
*2 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
*3 Not displayed when printing from removable memory.
Sending/Storing
When you have sent/stored the original after specifying the original size and sending/storing size, depending on these
sizes, a margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the Centering function, the image is placed
with a margin equally created for all edges.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Border Erase
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Erases the black border that forms around the image.
The following modes are available.
Border Erase Sheet
Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
Original
Copy
Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such
as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.
Original
Copy
Individual Border Erase
You can specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
Original
Copy
NOTE
• The default setting for border erase width can be changed.
Border Erase Default (page 8-19)
• The default width for back page can be changed.
Border Erase to Back Page (page 8-19)
6-41
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Value
Description
Off
Border Erase
Sheet
Border
Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
Inch:
Border Erase
Book
Individual
Border Erase
0.00" to 2.00"
(in 0.01" increments)
Set the border erase width.*1
Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].
Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys
for entry.
Back Page
Same as Front Page, Do Not
Erase
For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page]
and then select [Same as Front Page] or
[Do Not Erase].
Border
Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
Set the border erase width.*1
Gutter
Inch:
0.00" to 2.00"
(in 0.01" increments)
Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].
Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys
for entry.
Back Page
Same as Front Page, Do Not
Erase
For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page]
and then select [Same as Front Page] or
[Do Not Erase].
Top
Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
Set the border erase width.*1
Bottom
Left
Inch:
0.00 to 2.00"
(in 0.01" increments)
Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].
Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys
for entry.
Right
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on
Left, Auto*2
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
Back Page
Same as Front Page, Do Not
Erase
For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page]
and then select [Same as Front Page] or
[Do Not Erase].
*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.
Measurement (page 8-15)
*2 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-42
Using Various Functions > Functions
Booklet
Copy
Layout/Edit
Functions
Custom
Box
The Booklet option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A
booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.
You can print the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose
tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to the following:
Paper Source for Cover (page 8-13)
NOTE
Using the optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies (fold them in two
with staples in the center). Supported paper sizes are A3, A4-R, B4, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II and 8K.
Type of original
Original size
Paper size
One-sided original,
Two-sided original
All*1
Book Original
A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R
and 8K
A3, A4-R, A4, A5, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Oficio II and 8K
*1 Except for custom sized originals.
Binding on the left side
The folded copies can be read from left to right.
Original
Copy
Binding on the right side
The folded copies can be read from right to left.
Original
Copy
Top binding
The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.
Original
Copy
6-43
Using Various Functions > Functions
Copying
Item
Value
Description
Off
1-sided >>
Booklet
Finishing
Cover
Binding Left,
Binding Right,
Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Not Print,
Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Select whether to add the cover. Select the
printing method for the cover to be
inserted.
Not Print,
Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and
specify the print setting for the cover to be
inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back
Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and
press [OK].
Off, Fold Only,
Saddle Stitch
To fold finished copies in half, select
[Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].
Off
Cover:
Front Cover
Print Setting
Cover:
Back Cover
Print Setting
Staple/Fold
To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/
Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].
2-sided >>
Booklet
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left,
Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
Original
Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top
Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing
Binding Left,
Binding Right,
Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Not Print,
Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Select whether to add the cover. Select the
printing method for the cover to be
inserted.
Not Print,
Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and
specify the print setting for the cover to be
inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back
Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and
press [OK].
Off, Fold Only,
Saddle Stitch
To fold finished copies in half, select
[Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].
Cover
Off
Cover:
Front Cover
Print Setting
Cover:
Back Cover
Print Setting
Staple/Fold
To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/
Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left,
Auto*1
6-44
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Book >>
Booklet*2
Value
Description
Original
Binding Left,
Binding Right
Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing
Binding Left,
Binding Right
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Cover
Off, Cover
Select whether to add the cover. Select
[Cover] to select [Cover], and select [OK].
Staple/Fold
Off, Fold Only,
Saddle Stitch
To fold finished copies in half, select
[Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].
To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/
Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
*2 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".
Printing
Item
Value
Description
Off
Booklet
Binding
Cover
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Not Print,
Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Select whether to add the cover. Select the
printing method for the cover to be
inserted.
Not Print,
Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and
specify the print setting for the cover to be
inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back
Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and
press [OK].
Off, Fold Only,
Saddle Stitch
To fold finished copies in half, select
[Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].
Off
Cover:
Front Cover
Print Setting
Cover:
Back Cover
Print Setting
Staple/Fold
Left, Right, Top
To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/
Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be folded or Saddle Stitch stapled varies depending on paper weight. For details,
refer to the following:
Folding Unit (page 11-27)
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to place the originals in page order.
6-45
Using Various Functions > Functions
Duplex
Layout/Edit
Copy
Functions
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
Functions
Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals.
The following modes are available.
One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd
number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
Original
Copy
A
def
ghi
ghi
abc
abc
def
abc
def
Original
The following binding options are available.
B
ghi
Copy
A Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
B Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation
when turning the pages.
Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets. The
optional document processor is required.
The following binding options are available.
Original
Copy
•
Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
•
Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. The optional
document processor is required.
Original
Copy
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Duplex mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) and Custom 1 to 4.
6-46
Using Various Functions > Functions
Book to One-sided
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book original.
The following binding options are available.
Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right.
Original
Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left.
Copy
NOTE
• The original sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
• The paper sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A4-R, A4, A5, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K
Book to Two-sided
Book to
2-sided
Produces two-sided copies from an open book original with
facing pages.
Book to
Book
3
4
2
5
0
3
2
3
4
2
3
5
0
2
Original
Copy
NOTE
• The original sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
• The paper sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A4-R, A4, A5, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K
Copying
Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided. Select the binding
orientation for original and finished documents.
Item
Value
Description
1-sided >> 1-sided
―
Disables the function.
1-sided >>
2-sided
Finishing
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on
Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
6-47
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Value
Description
2-sided >>
1-sided
Original
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of originals.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on
Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
2-sided >>
2-sided
Original
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on
Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
Book >>
1-sided*2
Original
Binding Left, Binding Right
Select the binding direction of originals.
Book >>
2-sided*2
Original
Binding Left, Binding Right
Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing
Book>>2-sided, Book>>Book
Select the desired Duplex option.
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
*2 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".
When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.
After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying.
Printing
Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets.
Item
Value
Description
1-sided
―
Disables the function.
2-sided
Left/Right
Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the
left or right.
Top
Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the
top.
6-48
Using Various Functions > Functions
Cover
Copy
Layout/Edit
Custom
Box
Functions
Adds a cover to the finished documents.
You can print the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source
than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray.
To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to the following:
Paper Source for Cover (page 8-13)
The printing method can be set for the covers. Specify a print setting for each cover.
Item
Value
Description
Off
Front Cover
Not Print, Front Only, Back
Only*1, Duplex*1
Different paper has to be inserted for the
first page of the document.
Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only],
[Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print
setting of the inserted paper.
Front and Back
Covers
Front Cover Print
Setting
Not Print, Front Only, Back
Only*1, Duplex*1
Different paper has to be inserted for the
first page and last page of the document.
Back Cover Print
Setting
Not Print, Front Only, Back
Only*1, Duplex*1
Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only],
[Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print
setting of the inserted paper.
*1 This item appears when finishing is set to 2-sided in "Duplex".
Duplex (page 6-46)
6-49
Using Various Functions > Functions
Form Overlay
Copy
Layout/Edit
Custom
Box
Functions
Prints the original document overlaid with a form or image.
Once you scan and register the form, the form is overlaid onto the original. You can also use a form that is already
registered in the Job Box.
Place the original for the form on top of the other originals. When using the optional document processor, the first page
of the originals should be placed on the top.
Density:
30%
Form
Original
Copy
Density:
100%
Item
Value
Description
Off
Select Stored
Form
Density
10% to 100%
Specify the density of the form to be
overlaid.
Select [+] or [-] in "Density".
Finishing
Image
Select Form*1
Transparent
The form is overlaid on the document.
Form on Original Image
The form is placed on top of the document.
Original Image on Form
The form is placed under the document.
―
Select the form to be overlaid from Job
Box.
Select [Select Form] to display the job
boxes that store documents which can be
used as a form. Select the desired form
from the list and select [OK].
Scan New
Form*2
Density
10% to 100%
Specify the density of the form to be
overlaid.
Select [+] or [-] in "Density".
Finishing
Image
Transparent
The form is overlaid on the document.
Form on Original Image
The form is placed on top of the document.
Original Image on Form
The form is placed under the document.
*1 Form must be previously registered in Job Box.
Form for Form Overlay (page 5-63)
*2 Not displayed when printing from the custom box.
6-50
Using Various Functions > Functions
Erase Shadowed Areas
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
When scanning with the document processor or original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Page #
Copy
Layout/Edit
Custom
Box
Functions
Adds page numbers to the finished documents.
The available formats for numbering are [-1-], [P.1] and [1/n]. The format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the
place of "n".
Original
[-1-]
[P.1]
[1/n]
Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n].
Item
Value
Description
Position
Top Left, Top Middle,
Top Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Middle,
Bottom Right, Detail
Select the print position of page number.
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed page number
position using numeric values, and to set the page
number position ([Same as Front Page], [Mirror Front
Page]) when a page number is placed on the back side
of the paper in duplex printing.
1st Page
1 to 10
To start page numbering from a page other than the first
page, select [+] or [-] in "1st Page" to specify the starting
page. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Start #
1 to 999
To start the numbering with a number other than 1,
select [+] or [-] in "Start Number" to specify the starting
number. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
entry.
Off
-1-, P.1,
1/n
6-51
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
-1-, P.1,
1/n
Value
Description
Count Blank
Page*1
―
When a scanned document contains blank pages, add a
check mark if you require blank pages to be numbered.
Remove the check mark to skip blank pages.
Last Page
Auto, Manual (-10 to 0)
If you do not want page numbering through to the last
page, select [Last Page]. Select [Manual] and select [+]
or [-] to specify the final page to be numbered (a
negative number of pages counting backwards from the
last page), and then select [OK]. Specify the desired
number up to -10. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric
keys for entry.
Font
Font sizes registered in
"Text (Text Stamp)" are
displayed.
Set the font size of page number.
Size
Text (Text Stamp)
(page 8-21)
Style
None, Bold, Italic,
Bold/Italic
Set the font style of page number. Select a font style by
checking the checkbox.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of page number.
Color
Black, White
Set the color of page number.
Density
10 to 100%
(in 10% increments)
Set the density of the color of page number.
Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping,
Overwrite
Set the display method of page number.
Denominator#*2
Auto, Manual (1 to 999)
The total number of pages "n" in the format [1/n] can be
changed manually. Select [Denominator #] and select
[Manual]. Select [+] or [-] to enter the total number of
pages and select [OK]. Select [# Keys] to use the
numeric keys for entry.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left,
Auto*3
Select the orientation of the original document top edge
to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]
to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
*1 Not displayed when printing from the custom box.
*2 This item appears when [1/n] is selected.
*3 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-52
Using Various Functions > Functions
Insert Sheets/Chapters
Copy
Layout/Edit
Insert a separator sheet, or make the first page of the chapter the front page when performing duplex printing.
The configured pages are displayed on the list.
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Add
Separator
Separator
Sheet
1 to 998
Enter document page numbers where
separators get inserted. Select [+] or [-]
to enter the page number. Select
[# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
entry.
Paper
Source
Cassette 1 to 5,
Multi purpose
tray
Select the source of the paper for the
separator.
Chapter
Page
2 to 998
Enter the page numbers of the original
document where you want to insert the
chapters. Select [+] or [-] to enter the
page number. Select [# Keys] to use the
numeric keys for entry.
Edit
―
Change the configuration of the chapter
page and separator. The method of
operation is the same as that of a new
addition.
Delete
―
Delete the page selected in the list.
Sheets Setting
Not Print, Front
Only, Back
Only*1, Duplex*1
Select [Not Print], [Front Only], [Back
Only], or [Duplex] for the print setting of
the inserted paper.
Chapter
*1 This item appears when finishing is set to 2-sided in "Duplex".
Duplex (page 6-46)
6-53
Using Various Functions > Functions
Memo Page
Copy
Layout/Edit
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes.
You can also print two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries.
Select [Layout A] or [Layout B] and select the page layout from "Layout".
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Memo mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, B4, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter-R,
Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K
Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page,
leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original
Copy
Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for printing onto half of a page,
leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original
Copy
Item
Value
Description
Off
Layout A
Layout
Left/Top, Right/Bottom
Select how to lay out the pages of scanned
original.
Border Line
None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the boundary line type. Select [Border
Line] to select the page boundary line, and select
[OK].
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original
Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
6-54
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Layout B
Value
Description
Layout
Top L to R, Top R to L,
Top L to B, Top R to B
Select how to lay out the pages of scanned
original.
Border Line
None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the boundary line type. Select [Border
Line] to select the page boundary line, and select
[OK].
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original
Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-55
Using Various Functions > Functions
Image Repeat
Layout/Edit
Copy
Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can also specify the area of the original to repeat.
Zoom Priority
Repeat an image of specified zoom ratio.
Original
Copy
Double Copy
Copy two image.
Original
Copy
Item
Value
Description
Off
Zoom Priority
Specify
Repeat
Area
Set the default screen.
Metric*1
X1: 0 to 431 mm
Y1: 0 to 296 mm
Inch
X1: 0.00 to 16.99"
Y1: 0.00 to 11.68"
To set the area of the original to be repeated, select [On] for
"Specify Repeat Area".
Select [+] or [-] to change the displayed magnification as
desired. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Off
On:
Start
On:
Area
Double
Copy
25 to 400% (in 1%
increments)
Metric
X2: 1 to 432 mm
Y2: 1 to 297 mm
Inch
X2: 0.01 to 17.00"
Y2: 0.01 to 11.69"
Select [+] or [-] to input the area of the original to be repeated.
Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Y1: Length from top left of
platen to top edge of repeat
area
X1: Length from top left of
platen to left edge of repeat
area
Y2: Height of repeat area
X2: Width of repeat area
Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet.
―
For example, you can double-copy an A5 original onto an A4
sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are
identical to the original.
*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.
Measurement (page 8-15)
6-56
Using Various Functions > Functions
Text Stamp
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
Copying/Printing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.
Printing Jobs (page 8-22)
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Stamp
Keyboard, Template 1 to 8
Select [Keyboard] and enter the text string to
be printed, or select a text stamp from the
displayed templates.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear.
For details on registering templates, refer to
the following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-21)
Stamp Method
Position
Each Print Page,
Each Original Page
Top Left, Top Middle, Top
Right, Middle Left, Center,
Middle Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,
Detail
6-57
Select the stamp method.
Select [Stamp Method] and set the stamp
method for text stamp.
Set the stamp position to be printed.
Select [Position] and select the text stamp
position.
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp
position using numeric values, and to set the
stamp position and angle when a stamp is
placed on the back side of the paper in duplex
printing.
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
On
Font
Value
Size
Registered font sizes are
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
the following:
Description
Set the font size of text stamp.
Font (Text Stamp) (page 821)
Character
Border
Off, Circle, Rectangle,
Underline
Set the character border and underline.
Style
None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font
style by checking the checkbox.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of text stamp.
Color
Black, White
Set the color of text stamp.
Density
10 to 100%
(in 10% increments)
Set the density of text stamp color.
Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping,
Overwrite
Set the display method of text stamp.
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge
on Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation
of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or
[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
Original Orientation
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-58
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Storing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.
Sending Jobs (page 8-24)
Storing Jobs (page 8-26)
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Stamp
Keyboard, Template 1 to 8
Select [Keyboard] and enter the text string to
be printed, or select a text stamp from the
displayed templates.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear.
For details on registering templates, refer to
the following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-21)
Position
Font
Top Left, Top Middle, Top
Right, Middle Left, Center,
Middle Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,
Detail
Size
Registered font sizes are
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
the following:
Set the stamp position to be printed.
Select [Position] and select the text stamp
position.
Select [Detail] to set the stamp position using
numeric values, and to set the stamp angle.
Set the font size of text stamp.
Font (Text Stamp) (page 821)
Character
Border
Off, Circle, Rectangle,
Underline
Set the character border and underline.
Style
None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font
style by checking the checkbox.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of text stamp.
Color
Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White
Set the color of text stamp.
Density
10 to 100%
(in 10% increments)
Set the density of text stamp color.
Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping,
Overwrite
Set the display method of text stamp.
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation
of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or
[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
Original Orientation
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-59
Using Various Functions > Functions
Bates Stamp
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
Copying/Printing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings.
Printing Jobs (page 8-22)
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Stamp
Date, User Name, Serial
Number, Numbering, Text 1,
Text 2
Set the stamp to be printed.
When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, select
[Change] below and enter the text string.
If you selected [Date], select [Date Format]
and select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY],
or [YYYY/MM/DD] to set the date format.
To set [Numbering], select [Numbering
Default] and set the starting sequence
number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed
Digit Number] > [On], you can set the
number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7
digits).
Position
Top Left, Top Middle, Top
Right, Middle Left, Center,
Middle Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,
Detail
6-60
Set the stamp position to be printed.
Select [Position] and select the bates stamp
position.
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp
position using numeric values, and to set the
stamp position when a stamp is placed on the
back side of the paper in duplex printing.
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
On
Font
Value
Size
Registered font sizes are
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
the following:
Description
Set the font size of bates stamp.
Font (Bates Stamp) (page
8-21)
Style
None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font
style by checking the checkbox.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of bates stamp.
Color
Black, White
Set the color of the bates stamp.
Density
10 to 100%
(in 10% increments)
Set the density of bates stamp color.
Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping,
Overwrite
Set the display method of the bates stamp.
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation
of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or
[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
Original Orientation
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-61
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Storing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings.
Sending Jobs (page 8-25)
Storing Jobs (page 8-26)
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Stamp
Date, User Name, Serial
Number, Numbering, Text 1,
Text 2
Set the stamp to be printed.
When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, press
[Change] below and enter the text string.
If you selected [Date], press [Date Format]
and select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY],
or [YYYY/MM/DD] to set the date format.
To set [Numbering], select [Numbering
Default] and set the starting sequence
number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed
Digit Number] > [On], you can set the
number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7
digits).
Position
Font
Top Left, Top Middle, Top
Right, Middle Left, Center,
Middle Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,
Detail
Size
Registered font sizes are
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
the following:
Set the stamp position to be printed.
Select [Position] and select the bates stamp
position.
Select [Detail] to specify the stamp position
using numeric values.
Set the font size of bates stamp.
Font (Bates Stamp) (page
8-21)
Style
None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font
style by checking the checkbox.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of bates stamp.
Color
Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White
Set the color of bates stamp.
Density
10 to 100%
(in 10% increments)
Set the density of bates stamp color.
Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping,
Overwrite
Set the display method of bates stamp.
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left, Auto*1
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation
of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or
[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
Original Orientation
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-62
Using Various Functions > Functions
Continuous Scan
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Send
Advanced
Setup
Functions
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.
Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [Finish Scan].
Select [On] to use continuous scanning. To use Job Build, select [Job Build]. You can set the functions that appear on
the screen during scanning.
(Value: [Off] / [On] / [Job Build])
1
1~10
11
11~20
21
21~30
1
1~30
Job Build
When [Job Build] is selected when copying or printing, the binding orientation for finished documents can be selected
from [Binding Left], [Binding Right] or [Binding Top].
The following functions can be selected during scanning.
Item
Description
Next Copy: On Back
In duplex copying, prints on the back side if the next page is to be printed on the front
side. Select [Next Copy: On Back] to use this function.
Next Copy: On Front
In duplex copying, prints on the front side if the next page is to be printed on the back
side. Select [Next Copy: On Front] to use this function.
Sheet Insertion
Inserts a blank paper in the next page. Select [Sheet Insertion] to use this function.
Auto Image Rotation
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the
orientations are different.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• You can select whether to rotate the image automatically in the default settings.
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-19)
• When you have enabled this function, you can select how the images are rotated.
Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-32)
6-63
Using Various Functions > Functions
Negative Image
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
This function is only available for black and white copy mode.
Mirror Image
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Copies the mirrored image of the original.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Job Finish Notice
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is also available that send a notice when a job is interrupted.
Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the
machine to finish.
NOTE
PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
Command Center RX (page 2-61)
E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
Item
Description
Off
Address Book
Select the notification destination from the address book.
Detail
Information on the selected destination can be viewed.
Address Book
Select the notification destination on the address book screen, then select [OK].
Notify when
interrupted
Add a check mark if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.
Address Entry
Notify when
interrupted
Enter E-mail address directly. Select [E-mail Address], enter the address (up to 128
characters) and select [OK].
Add a check mark if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.
6-64
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Name Entry
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Adds a file name.
Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status
using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Select [File Name], enter the file name (up to 32 characters), and select [OK].
To add date and time, select [Date and Time]. To add job number, select [Job No.]. The added information will be
displayed in "Additional Info".
Priority Override
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.
The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• This function is not available if current job was an override.
• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage. In this
case, try the interrupt copy.
Interrupt Copy (page 5-21)
6-65
Using Various Functions > Functions
Repeat Copy
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed.
For confidential documents, you can set up a password for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct
password must be entered to perform Repeat Copy.
To register a password, select [# Keys] and enter a 4-digit password.
IMPORTANT
• A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the power switch is turned off.
• If you forget the password, Repeat Copy cannot be performed for that document. Make a note of the
password beforehand if necessary.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit.
When the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to 0 (zero), this function cannot be
used.
Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 8-38)
You can select Repeat Copy as the default setting.
Repeat Copy (page 8-20)
Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying.
File Name Entry (page 6-65)
Repeat Copy
The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Job Box. Refer to Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs to print out the Repeat Copy
jobs.
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs (page 5-63)
6-66
Using Various Functions > Functions
DP Read Action
Copy
Advanced
Setup
When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document processor. This function is
displayed when the document processor is installed.
Item
Description
Speed Priority
Gives priority to scanning speed.
Quality Priority
Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.
Skip Blank Page
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are
not blank.
Blank pages can be set as pages that include ruled lines and a small number of characters.
The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the
document.
Select [Blank Pages + Ruled Lines], [Blank Pages Only] or [Blank Pages + Some Text] in [On].
NOTE
The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.
6-67
Using Various Functions > Functions
2-sided/Book Original, Book Original
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.
Item
1-sided
2-sided*1
Book*3
Value
Description
―
"2-sided/Book Original" is not set.
Binding
Binding Left/
Right, Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of originals.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left,
Auto*2
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
Binding
Binding Left,
Binding Right
Select the binding orientation of originals.
*1 Available when the optional document processor is used.
*2 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
*3 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".
Sample image
Value
2-sided
Image
Binding Left/Right
Binding Top
Book
Binding Left
Binding Right
6-68
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending Size
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
Select size of image to be sent.
Select [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or [Others] to select the storing size.
Item
Standard Sizes 1
Value
Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, A4, A5,
A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm
Inch models:
Standard Sizes 2
Select from Same as Original Size or
Standard Size.
Same as Original Size, Ledger,
Letter, Legal, Statement, 11×15",
Oficio II
Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement,
11×15", Oficio II, 8K, 16K
Inch models:
Others
Description
Select from standard sizes except
Standard Sizes 1.
A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 8K,
16K, 216×340 mm
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return
postcard)
Select from Hagaki (Cardstock).
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 6-18), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 6-35) are related to each other. For details, see the table
below.
Original size and sending size are
the same
different
Original Size (page 6-18)
Specify as necessary.
Specify as necessary.
Sending Size
Select [Same as Original Size].
Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-35)
Select [100%] (or [Auto]).
Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send
the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
6-69
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Format
Org./Sending
Data Format
Send
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.
Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], [OpenXPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.
Item
Value
Color mode
PDF *1*2*3
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
TIFF
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
JPEG
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale
XPS
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
OpenXPS
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
High Comp. PDF *1*2
Compression Ratio Priority,
Standard, Quality Priority
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale
*1 You can create Searchable PDF file by running OCR on the scanned document.
OCR Text Recognition (Option) (page 6-71)
*2 Set the PDF/A. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u]).
*3 Set PDF encryption.
PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-72)
NOTE
• When [High Comp. PDF] is selected, you cannot adjust the image quality.
• You can use PDF encryption functions.
PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-72)
• If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.
6-70
Using Various Functions > Functions
OCR Text Recognition (Option)
When [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] is selected for the file format, you can create Searchable PDF file by running OCR on the
scanned document. Select [OCR Text Recognition], and then [On], select the language of the document, and select [OK].
Item
Description
Off
Do not create Searchable PDF file.
On
Create Searchable PDF file.
Select the language to extract from the languages that appear on the touch
panel.
Auto Image
Rotation
Rotates image automatically by recognizing text orientation.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)
• This function cannot be set when you send from the Custom Box.
• If the proper language is not selected, PDF creation may take a long time or the creation may fail.
The default language can be changed in System Menu.
Primary OCR Language (page 8-20)
• If you do not set an original in the correct orientation, the text of the document may not be recognized as characters.
In addition, it may take some time to create the PDF. Check the following:
- The original orientation is correct.
- When setting the originals with the mixed orientation at once, [On] is selected for [Auto Image Rotation].
If you frequently use the originals with the mixed orientation, the default of [Auto Image Rotation] can be
changed in System Menu.
OCR Text Recognition (page 8-20)
• The accuracy of the text recognition depends on the original condition. The following condition may result in
decreasing the recognition accuracy.
-
Repeatedly copied documents (as copied copy)
Received faxes (with low resolution)
Originals with the character space too narrow or wide
Originals with the lines on the text
Originals with the special fonts
Binding part of the book
A handwritten texts
6-71
Using Various Functions > Functions
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and
editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Select [Others], [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] in [File Format], and select [Encryption].
Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in [Compatibility].
When [Acrobat 3.0 and later, Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit)] is selected
Item
Password to Open
Document
Value
Description
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)
and then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and
select [OK].
Password to Edit/Print
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)
and then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and
select [OK].
When you have entered the password and selected
[Detail] to edit/print document, you can specifically
limit the operation.
Printing Allowed
Not Allowed, Allowed
Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Changes Allowed
Not Allowed
Disables the change to the PDF file.
Commenting
Can only add commenting.
Page Layout except
extracting Pages
Can change the page layout except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Any except extracting Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Disable, Enable
Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF
file.
Copying of Text/
Images/Others
6-72
Using Various Functions > Functions
When [Acrobat 5.0 and later, Encryption Level: High(128-bit)] is selected
Item
Password to Open
Document
Value
Description
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)
and then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and
select [OK].
Password to Edit/Print
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)
and then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and
select [OK].
When you have entered the password and selected
[Detail] to edit/print document, you can specifically
limit the operation.
Printing Allowed
Changes Allowed
Copying of Text/
Images/Others
Not Allowed
Disables the printing of PDF file.
Allowed (Low Resolution
only)
Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
Allowed
Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Not Allowed
Disables the change to the PDF file.
Inserting/Deleting/Rotating
Pages
Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
PDF file.
Commenting
Can only add commenting.
Any except extracting Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Disable, Enable
Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF
file.
6-73
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Separation
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by specified number of pages, and sends the files.
NOTE
A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Set file separation.
Select [+] or [-] to specify the number of pages. Select
[# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Attach File to E-mail
All Files in 1 E-mail,
1 file per E-mail
Select how to attach the files to the E-mail. Select [All
files in 1 E-mail] to attach and send all files in a single
E-mail. Select [1 file per E-mail] to attach and send
1 file per E-mail.
Scan Resolution
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
(Value: [600 × 600dpi] / [400 × 400dpi Ultra] / [300 × 300dpi] / [200 × 400dpi Super] / [200 × 200dpi Fine] /
[200 × 100dpi Normal])
NOTE
The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and
longer send times.
6-74
Using Various Functions > Functions
E-mail Subject/Body
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
Adds subject and body when sending a document.
Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the E-mail subject/body.
NOTE
• The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.
• Select [Body 1], [Body 2], or [Body 3] to enter stored text for the body text. For details on registering templates,
refer to the following:
E-mail Subject/Body (page 8-20)
Send and Print
Send
Advanced
Setup
Prints a copy of the document being sent.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Send and Store
Send
Advanced
Setup
Stores a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• When [On] is selected, select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored.
If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears, enter the password.
• You can view information on the selected Custom Box by selecting [Detail].
Send
Send and Store
6-75
Using Various Functions > Functions
FTP Encrypted TX
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
Encrypts images when sending via FTP.
Encryption secures the document transmission.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Command Center RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure
Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.
Command Center RX User Guide
File Size Confirmation
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
Checks the file size before sending the original. To change the file size, change the settings of each function. When you
select [Recalculate], the file size is recalculated.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Delete after Printed
Custom
Box
Functions
Automatically deletes a document from the box once printing is complete.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Delete after Transmitted
Custom
Box
Functions
Automatically deletes a document from the box once transmission is complete.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
6-76
Using Various Functions > Functions
Storing Size
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Select size of image to be stored.
Select [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or [Others] to select the storing size.
Item
Standard Sizes 1
Value
Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, A4, A5,
A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm
Inch models:
Standard Sizes 2
Select from Same as Original Size or
Standard Size.
Same as Original Size, Ledger,
Letter, Legal, Statement, 11×15",
Oficio II
Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement,
11×15", Oficio II, 8K, 16K
Inch models:
Others
Description
Select from standard sizes except
Standard Sizes 1.
A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 8K,
16K, 216×340 mm
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return
postcard)
Select from Hagaki (Cardstock).
Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom
Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Original Size and the size you wish to
store as are
the same
different
Original Size (page 6-18)
Specify as necessary.
Specify as necessary.
Storing Size
Select [Same as Original].
Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-35)
Select [100%] (or [Auto]).
Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image
as the actual size (No Zoom).
Long Original
Send
Advanced
Setup
USB
Memory
Functions
Reads long-sized original documents using a document processor. This function requires the optional document
processor.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• Long originals are sent in black and white.
• Only a single side of a long original can be scanned.
• Originals of up to 1,900 mm / 74.8"*1 long can be scanned.
• This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set.
*1 1,600 mm/63" if fax functions are used.
6-77
Using Various Functions > Functions
Encrypted PDF Password
USB
Memory
Functions
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.
Enter the Password, and select [OK].
NOTE
For details on entering the password, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
JPEG/TIFF Print
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
Item
Description
Paper Size
Fits the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution
Prints at resolution of the actual image.
Print Resolution
Fits the image size to the print resolution.
XPS Fit to Page
USB
Memory
Functions
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
6-78
7
Status/Job Cancel
This chapter explains the following topics:
Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 7-3
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-8
Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ...................................................................................... 7-10
Sending the Log History ........................................................................................................................ 7-10
Job Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................................................. 7-11
Canceling of Jobs ................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................................................... 7-11
Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 7-12
Device/Communication .................................................................................................................................... 7-13
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-14
7-1
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing
Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.
The following job statuses are available.
Status Display
Print Job Status
Send Job Status
Store Job Status
Scheduled Job
Job status to be displayed
•
Copy
•
Printer
•
FAX reception
•
E-mail reception
•
Printing from Document Box
•
Printing data from removable memory
•
Application
•
Job Report/List
•
FAX transmission
•
i-FAX transmission
•
E-mail
•
Folder transmission
•
Application
•
Multiple destination
•
Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
•
Scan
•
FAX
•
i-FAX
•
Printer
•
Join Box Document
•
Copy Box Document
•
Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Displaying Status Screens
1
Display the screen.
2
Select the job you want to check.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
Select either of [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status], [Store Job Status] or [Scheduled
Job] to check the status.
Print Job Status Screen (page 7-3)
Send Job Status screen (page 7-5)
Store Job Status screen (page 7-6)
Scheduled Job Status Screen (page 7-7)
7-2
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Details of the Status Screens
NOTE
• You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.
Display Status/Log (page 8-28)
• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Print Job Status Screen
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Log
7
All
Accept Time
Type
Job Name
User Name
Status
000001 10/10 09:10
doc20151010091015
AAAAA
InProcess
000002 10/10 09:15
doc20151010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
000003 10/10 09:20
doc20151010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
1 2 3
8
9
Pause All
Print Jobs
Printing Jobs
Cancel
4
10
5
11
Priority
Override
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
1/1
6
12
Move Up
Detail
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Close
t0101
Status
No.
Item
Description
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job
Printer job
Job from Document Box
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Data from removable memory
Application
Report/List
4
Job Name
Job Name or file name
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Status
Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting to print.
Printing:
Printing
Waiting:
Print Waiting
Pause:
Pausing print job or error
Canceling: Canceling the job
7
[
] of "Job Type"
Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
7-3
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
No.
Item
Description
8
[Pause All Print
Jobs]
Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the
printing jobs will be resumed.
9
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this
key.
10
[Priority
Override]
Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.
[Move Up]
In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job
queue and press this key.
11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs (page 7-11)
Reordering Print Jobs (page 7-12)
12
[Detail]
Select the job whose detailed information you want to
display from the list, and press this key.
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)
You can select [Change] in “Copies” in the detailed
information screen to change the number of copies that are
printed.
NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.
Customize Status Display (page 8-29)
7-4
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Send Job Status screen
Status
Scheduled Job
Status
Job Type
Job No.
438
7
All
Accept Time
Type
14:47
1
Job Name
Log
User Name
Status
abc@def.com
2 3
InProcess
4
5
6
1/1
Cancel
8
Printing Jobs
Priority
Override
Sending Jobs
10
9
Detail
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Close
t0201
Status
No.
Item
Description
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Sending Job FAX
Sending Job i-FAX
Sending Job E-mail
Sending Job Folder
Sending Job Application
Multi Sending
4
Destination
Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail
address, or server name)
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Status
Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting sending such as
during scanning originals
Sending:
Sending
Waiting:
Waiting Sending
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause:
Pausing the job
7
[
Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this
key.
9
[Priority
Override]
Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.
Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
10
[Detail]
Select the job whose detailed information you want to
display from the list, and press this key.
] of "Job Type"
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)
NOTE
The address and user name can be changed to other information if needed.
Customize Status Display (page 8-29)
7-5
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Store Job Status screen
Status
Status
Job No.
Accept Time
438
1
Log
7
All
Job Type
Type
14:47
Job Name
User Name
Status
doc20150225144758
2 3
InProcess
4
5
6
1/1
Cancel
8
Printing Jobs
Detail
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communicate
9
Paper/
Supplies
Close
t0301
Status
No.
Item
Description
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Printer
Storing Job FAX
Storing Job i-FAX
Join Box Document
Copy Box Document
4
Job Name
Job name or file name is displayed.
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Status
Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting to save such as
during scanning originals
Storing:
Storing Data
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause:
] of "Job Type"
Pausing the job
7
[
Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this
key.
9
[Detail]
Select the job whose detailed information you want to
display from the list, and press this key.
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)
NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.
Customize Status Display (page 8-29)
7-6
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Scheduled Job Status Screen
Status
Status
Scheduled Job
Job No. Accept Time Type
0007
User Name
A OFFICE
9:30
1
Destination
Log
2 3
Start Time
12:00
4
5
6
1/1
Cancel
Printing Jobs
7
Start Now
Sending Jobs
8
Detail
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Close
02/02/2013 t0202
10:10
Status
No.
9
Item
Description
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Scheduling Job FAX
4
Destination
Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, or No. of
broadcast items)
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Start Time
Time to start the scheduled job
7
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this
key.
8
[Start Now]
Select the job you want to send immediately from the list,
and press this key.
9
[Detail]
Select the job whose detailed information you want to
display from the list, and press this key.
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)
7-7
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs
1
Display the screen.
2
Check the information.
Details of the Status Screens (page 7-3)
1 Select [Detail] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.
Status
Scheduled Job
Status
Job Type
Job No.
438
Log
All
Type
Accept Time
14:47
Job Name
User Name
abc@def.com
Status
InProcess
1/1
Cancel
Printing Jobs
Priority
Override
Sending Jobs
Detail
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Close
t0201
Status
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
Use [
] or [
] to see the next or previous page of information.
In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by selecting [Detail] in "Destination" or
"Status/Destination".
"Status/Destination" is displayed when address is selected. Select [Detail] to display the
list. Select [ ] or [ ], select a destination and select [Detail]. Information on the selected
job is displayed for checking.
2 To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].
7-8
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking Job History
NOTE
• Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer.
Command Center RX User Guide
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.
Display Status/Log (page 8-28)
• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in four screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and FAX Jobs.
The following job histories are available.
Screen
Print Job Log
Send Job Log
Store Job Log
FAX Job Log
Job histories to be displayed
•
Copy
•
Printer
•
FAX reception
•
i-FAX reception
•
E-mail reception
•
Printing from Document Box
•
Job Report/List
•
Printing data from removable memory
•
Application
•
FAX
•
i-FAX
•
E-mail
•
Folder
•
Application
•
Multiple destination
•
Scan
•
FAX
•
i-FAX
•
Printer
•
Join Box Document
•
Copy Box Document
FAX Operation Guide
7-9
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Displaying Job History Screen
1
Display the screen.
2
Select the job to check details.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
Select the [Log] tab, and select the job to check details from the list.
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories
1
Display the screen.
2
Check the information.
Displaying Job History Screen (page 7-10)
1 Select the job to check details from the list, and select [Detail].
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Log
All
End Date
000080 01/25 14:14
Type
Job Name
User Name
doc20150125141427
Result
Completed
000081 01/25 14:22
doc20150125142253
Completed
000082 01/25 14:23
doc20150125142310
Completed
000083 01/25 14:24
doc20150125142458
Error
000084 01/25 14:30
doc20150125143034
Completed
2
1
Printing Jobs
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communicate
1/1
Detail
Paper/
Supplies
Close
t0102
Status
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
NOTE
To check the information of the next/previous page, select [
] or [
].
2 To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].
Sending the Log History
You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Send Log History (page 8-44)
7-10
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Job Operation
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
1
Display the screen.
2
Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
Printing is paused.
When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume All Print Jobs].
Canceling of Jobs
A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.
1
Display the screen.
2
Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel].
3
Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs
Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.
1
Display the screen.
2
Select [Printing Jobs].
3
Select the job to be given priority, and select
[Priority Override].
4
Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
The current job in printing is suspended, and the job for override.
7-11
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Reordering Print Jobs
This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.
1
Display the screen.
2
Select [Printing Jobs].
3
Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and select
[Move Up].
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
The priority of the selected job is increased by 1.
To further raise the job's priority, select [Move Up] again. Each time you select [Move Up], the
priority increases by 1.
7-12
Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select [Device/Communicate].
The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.
2
Check the status.
The items you can check are described below.
"Scanner"
The status of an original scanning or the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is
displayed.
"Printer"
Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or
printing are displayed.
"FAX Port 1", "FAX Port 2", "i-FAX"
•
The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
FAX Operation Guide
"Removable Memory (USB Memory)"
•
The usage, capacity and free space of the external media connected to this machine are
displayed.
•
Select [Format] to format external media.
IMPORTANT
When [Format] is selected, all data in the external media is erased.
•
Select [Remove] to safely remove the external media.
"Hard Disk"
The status of the hard disk is displayed.
"Connectivity"
The network connection status and the status of the optional keyboard are displayed.
7-13
Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner
and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the touch panel.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select [Paper/Supplies].
2
Check the status.
The items you can check are described below.
"Toner Information"
The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels. And you can check the status of waste
toner box.
"Paper Status"
You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper
source. The amount of paper remaining is shown in levels.
"Others"
You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.
7-14
8
Setup and Registration
(System Menu)
This chapter explains the following topics:
System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-4
Counter .................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
Cassette/MP Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................... 8-7
Common Settings .................................................................................................................................. 8-10
Home ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-31
Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-32
Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-33
Document Box/Removable Memory ...................................................................................................... 8-38
FAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-39
Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-39
Report .................................................................................................................................................... 8-42
System/Network ..................................................................................................................................... 8-47
Edit Destination ...................................................................................................................................... 8-65
User Login/Job Accounting .................................................................................................................... 8-66
User Property ......................................................................................................................................... 8-66
Date/Timer/Energy Saver ...................................................................................................................... 8-66
Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8-70
Internet ................................................................................................................................................... 8-72
Application ............................................................................................................................................. 8-73
8-1
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System Menu
Configure settings related to overall machine operation.
Operation Method
1
Display the screen.
2
Select a function.
Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.
1 Displays the System Menu items.
System Menu
1
Quick Setup Wizard
Counter
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Common Settings
Home
Copy
Send
Document Box/Removable Memory
FAX
Printer
2 Scrolls up and down when the list of
values cannot be displayed in its entirety
on a single screen.
2
Report
1/2
Close
3 Displays setting items
Select the key of a function to display the
setting screen.
m01010101
Status
4 Returns to the previous screen.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
3
Date/Time:
Change
Date Format:
Change
Time Zone:
Change
Auto Panel Reset:
Change
Auto Error Clear:
Change
Low Power Timer:
Change
Panel Reset Timer:
Change
Sleep Timer:
Change
1/2
4
Close
m02015701
Status
3
Configure the function.
1 Enter a setting by selecting it.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Time Zone
Set time zone.
Select the location nearest you.
2 Accepts the settings and exits.
Time Zone
3 Returns to the previous screen without
making any changes.
-12:00 International Date Line West
+13:00 Samoa
1
-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11
1/16
-10:00 Hawaii
-09:00 Alaska
-08:00 Baja California
3
Cancel
OK
m031701
Status
8-2
2
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
NOTE
• In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to
immediately change the settings.
Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.
8-3
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System Menu Settings
This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in
System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.
Item
Description
Reference
Page
Quick Setup Wizard
The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax, Network and Energy
Saver settings.
page 2-42
Counter
Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
page 2-58
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multi purpose
tray.
page 8-7
Cassette 1 (to 5)
Select type of paper in Cassette 1 (to 5).
page 8-7
MP Tray Setting
Select type of paper in multi purpose tray.
page 8-8
Configure overall machine operation.
page 8-10
Language
Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
page 8-10
Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
page 8-10
Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
page 8-10
Keyboard Layout
Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter
characters.
page 8-11
Original/Paper Settings
Configure settings for originals and paper.
page 8-11
Measurement
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
page 8-15
Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has
occurred.
page 8-16
Paper Output
Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from
Document Box, computers, and FAX RX data.
page 8-17
Orientation Confirmation
Check the orientation of original.
page 8-18
Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is
completed or the [Reset] key is selected.
page 8-18
Common Settings
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending.
Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent
jobs easier.
Optional Keyboard Type
Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use.
page 8-21
System Stamp
Configure settings for header, footer, and stamp.
page 8-21
Manual Staple
Select whether to use Manual Staple.
page 8-27
Offset Documents by Job
Select whether to offset documents by Job.
page 8-27
Low Toner Alert Level
Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when
to order a toner when the toner is running low.
page 8-28
Toner Waste Full Alert
Set the capacity of the waste toner box for which you require
notification to be sent that the waste toner box is going to be full.
page 8-28
Offset One Page
Documents
Set whether one-page documents are sorted.
page 8-28
8-4
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Reference
Page
Display Status/Log
Set the display method of the Status/Log.
page 8-28
Message Banner Print
Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is
printed when printing multiple banner sheets.
page 8-29
Customize Status Display
Select the item that appears for the printing jobs status.
page 8-29
Message Board Settings
Configure settings for message board.
page 8-30
Remote Printing
Configure settings for remote printing.
page 8-30
Numeric Keypad Settings
Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad.
page 8-31
Prevent Light Reflection
Prevent light reflection when using the Erase Shadowed Areas
feature.
page 8-31
Function Key Assignment
Assign a function to each function key.
page 8-31
Show Power Off Message
Select whether the confirmation message is displayed, when
Power Switch is pressed.
page 8-31
Home
Configure settings for Home screen.
page 8-31
Copy
Configures settings for copying functions.
page 8-32
Send
Configures settings for sending functions.
page 8-33
Document Box/Removable
Memory
Configures settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, Sub
Address Box and Polling Box. For details on FAX Box and Polling
Box, refer to the following:
page 8-38
FAX Operation Guide
FAX
Configures settings for fax functions.
—
FAX Operation Guide
Printer
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the
application software screen. However, the following settings are
available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
page 8-39
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history.
Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
page 8-42
Configure settings for printing reports and histories.
page 8-42
Print Report
Admin Report Settings
Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
Result Report Setting
page 8-43
Sending Log History
page 8-44
Login History Settings
page 8-44
Device Log History
Settings
page 8-45
Secure Comm. Error Log
page 8-46
8-5
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
System/Network
Description
Reference
Page
Configure machine system settings.
page 8-47
Network
Configures network settings.
page 8-47
Optional Network
Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit.
page 8-58
Primary Network (Client)
Select the network interface to be used for the send function that
this machine functions as a client, the network authentication and
connecting to external address book.
page 8-60
Security Level
The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by
service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for
customers to use this menu.
—
Interface Block Setting
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface
with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.
page 8-61
Data Security
Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and
machine's memory.
page 8-62
Optional Function
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
page 8-64
Bluetooth Settings
Set the Bluetooth keyboard.
page 8-64
Restart Entire Device
Restart the CPU without turning the power switch off. Use this to
deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the
computer restart.)
page 8-64
NFC
Set NFC (Near Field Communication).
page 8-64
Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings.
page 8-65
Edit Destination
Address Book:
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-30)
One Touch Key:
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key)
(page 3-37)
User Login/Job Accounting
Configures settings related to machine management.
—
User Login:
Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)
Job Accounting:
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)
User Property
Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit
some of that information.
page 8-66
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Configures settings related to the date and time.
page 8-66
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
page 8-70
Internet
Configure settings related to the internet.
page 8-72
Application
Configure settings for Application.
page 8-73
8-6
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Counter
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Counter]
Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multi purpose tray.
Cassette 1 (to 5)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Cassette 1 (to 5)]
Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 to 5.
Selection Item
Paper Size*1
Auto
Selectable Size/Type
Paper size is automatically detected and selected.
Values: Metric, Inch
Standard Sizes 1
Available options are as follows:
Values
Metric models:
A3*2*3, A4-R*3, A4*3, A5-R*3, A5*3, A6-R*3, B4*2*3, B5-R*3, B5*3, B6-R*3,
Folio*3, 216×340 mm*4
Inch models:
Ledger*2*3, Letter-R*3, Letter*3, Legal*3, Statement-R*3, Executive,
12×18"*2*3, Oficio II
Standard Sizes 2
Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1.
Values
Metric models:
Ledger*2*3, Letter-R*3, Letter*3, Legal*3, Statement-R*3, Executive,
12×18"*2*3, Oficio II, 8K*2, 16K-R, 16K
Inch models:
A3*2*3, A4-R*3, A4*3, A5-R*3, A5*3, A6-R*3, B4*2*3, B5-R*3, B5*3, B6-R*3,
Folio*3, 8K*2, 16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm*4
Others
Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.
Values: ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4*2, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2
8-7
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Selection Item
Paper Size
Size Entry
Selectable Size/Type
Enter the size not included in the standard size.
Values
Cassette 1
Metric
X: 148 to 356 mm (in 1mm increments)
Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Cassette 2 to 4
Metric
X: 148 to 452 mm (in 1mm increments)
Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)
Media Type*5
Select the media type.
Values: Plain (60 - 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (60 - 105 g/m2), Recycled,
Preprinted*6, Bond, Cardstock*7, Color, Prepunched*6, Letterhead*6,
Envelope*7, Thick (106 - 163 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 - 8
*1 When the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) is used, paper size does
not appear.
*2 Not displayed in Cassette 1.
*3 Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette.
*4 This paper cannot be used in Cassette 1.
*5 To change to a media type other than "Plain".
Media Type Setting (page 8-15)
When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.
*6 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.
Special Paper Action (page 8-14)
*7 Not displayed in the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet).
MP Tray Setting
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [MP Tray Setting]
Select paper size and media type for the multi purpose tray.
Item
Paper Size
Auto
Description
Paper size is automatically detected and selected.
Values: Metric, Inch
Standard Sizes 1
Available options are as follows:
Values
Metric models:
A3*1, A4-R*1, A4*1, A5-R*1, A5, A6-R*1, B4*1, B5-R*1, B5*1, B6-R*1, Folio,
216×340 mm, SRA3*1
Inch models:
Ledger*1, Letter-R*1, Letter*1, Legal*1, Statement-R*1, Executive,
12×18"*1, Oficio II
8-8
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Paper Size
Standard Sizes 2
Description
Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1.
Values
Metric models:
Ledger*1, Letter-R*1, Letter*1, Legal*1, Statement-R*1, Executive,
12×18"*1, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Inch models:
A3*1, A4-R*1, A4*1, A5-R*1, A5, A6-R*1, B4*1, B5-R*1, B5*1, B6-R*1,
Folio*1, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm, SRA3*1
Others
Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.
Values: ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki
(Cardstock)*1, Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Size Entry
Enter the size not included in the standard size.
Values
Metric
X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1mm increments)
Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical
Horizontal
X
X
Y
Media Type*2
Y
Select the media type.
Values: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (52 to
105 g/m2), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope, Thick (106 to 300 g/m2),
Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8
*1 Paper size is automatically detected in the Multi Purpose Tray.
*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".
Media Type Setting (page 8-15)
*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.
Special Paper Action (page 8-14)
NOTE
If the optional FAX Kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Envelope, Thick, Coated, High Quality and
Custom1-8
8-9
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Common Settings
Configures overall machine operation.
Language
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Language]
Item
Language
Description
Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
Default Screen
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Default Screen]
Item
Default Screen
Description
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
Value: Home, Copy, Send, FAX*1, Status, Custom Box, Job Box,
Removable Memory, FAX Box*1, Program, Home (Accessibility), Accessibility
Copy, Accessibility Send, Accessibility FAX*1, Internet Browser*2, Application
Name*3
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
*2 Configure necessary settings for Internet Browser.
Internet (page 8-72)
*3 The running application will be displayed.
Application (page 5-13)
Sound
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Sound]
Item
Buzzer
Volume
Description
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
Set the buzzer volume level.
Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum), 2, 3 (Medium), 4, 5 (Maximum)
Key Confirmation
Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected.
Value: Off, On
Job Finish
Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.
Value: Off, On, FAX Reception Only*1
Ready
Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.
Value: Off, On
Warning
Emit a sound when errors occur.
Value: Off, On
Optional Keyboard
Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.
Value: Off, On
FAX Speaker Volume*1
FAX Operation Guide
FAX Monitor Volume*1
FAX Operation Guide
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
8-10
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Keyboard Layout
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Keyboard Layout]
Item
Keyboard Layout
Description
Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.
Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY
Original / Paper Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Original / Paper Settings]
Configure settings for originals and paper.
Item
Custom Original Size
Description
Set up frequently-used custom original size.
The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.
To register a custom original size, select [On] and enter the desired size. Up to four
custom original sizes can be added.
Value
Metric
X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical
8-11
Horizontal
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Custom Paper Size
Description
Set up frequently-used custom paper size.
The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select paper size in the multi
purpose tray.
To register a custom paper size, press [On] and enter the desired size. Up to four
custom paper sizes can be added.
Value
Metric
X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical
Horizontal
X
X
Y
Y
Media Type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated,
High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8
Media Type Setting
Select weight for each media type.
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Media Type Setting (page 8-15)
Default Paper Source
Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-5 and multi purpose tray.
Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), Multi Purpose Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder
is installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.
Auto Switch
When the optional large capacity feeder is selected, the cassette can be switched to
another large capacity feeder depending on your usage.
Value: Off, On
8-12
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Auto Detect Original Size
Description
Select whether to automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.
Select [Metric] when automatically detecting the originals in centimeter sizes. Select
[Inch] when detecting the originals in inch sizes.
Metric
A6/Hagaki
As A6 and Hagaki (Cardstock) are similar in size, select either one of them for
automatic detection.
Value: A6, Hagaki
NOTE
If [Hagaki] is set, only the originals placed on the platen are detected.
Folio
Select whether to enable automatic detection of Folio.
Value: Off, On
11×15"
Select whether to enable automatic detection of 11×15" size.
Value: Off, On
Inch
Legal/
Oficio II/
216×340 mm
Media for Auto (B&W)
Set the original sizes for the device to detect automatically.
Value: Legal, Oficio II, 216×340 mm
Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper
Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the
specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind
of paper loaded in the specific size.
Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Source for Cover
Select the paper source in which the cover paper used for the Cover function is
placed.
Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), Multi Purpose Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder
is installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.
8-13
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Special Paper Action
Description
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be
aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are
set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print
Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select
[Speed Priority].
If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority
Separator Paper Source
Select the default paper source for separator sheets.
Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), Multi Purpose Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder
is installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.
Show Paper Setup
Message
Cassette 1 to 5
Multi Purpose Tray
Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new
paper is set for each cassette.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder
is installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.
8-14
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Media Type Setting
The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.
Paper Weight
Weight (g/m2)
Paper Weight
Weight (g/m2)
Light
52 g/m² to 59 g/m²
Heavy 2*1
136 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Normal 1
60 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Heavy 3*1
164 g/m² to 220 g/m²
Normal 2
75 g/m² to 90 g/m²
Heavy 4*1
221 g/m² to 256 g/m²
Normal 3
91 g/m² to 105 g/m²
Heavy 5*1
257 g/m² to 300 g/m²
Heavy 1*1
106 g/m² to 135 g/m²
Extra Heavy*1
Transparencies
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.
Each media type's default weight is indicated.
Media Type
Default
Media Type
Default
Plain
Normal 2
Prepunched
Normal 2
Rough
Normal 3
Letterhead
Normal 2
Vellum
Heavy 1
Envelope
Heavy 3
Labels
Heavy 2
Thick
Heavy 3
Recycled
Normal 2
High Quality
Normal 2
Preprinted
Normal 2
Coated
Heavy 1
Bond
Normal 3
Index Tab Dividers
Heavy 4
Cardstock
Heavy 4
Custom 1 - 8
Normal 2
Color
Normal 3
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Item
Duplex Print
Description
Prohibit
Duplex printing allowed.
Permit
Duplex printing not allowed.
Name
Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters.
Selecting media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
Measurement
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Measurement]
Item
Measurement
Description
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Value: mm, inch
8-15
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Error Handling
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Error Handling]
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.
Item
Duplexing Error
Description
Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and
media types.
Value
1-sided: Printed in 1-sided
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Finishing Error
Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Punch/Offset) is not available for the
selected paper size or media type.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
No Staple Error
Set what to do when staples run out during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher.
Finished Pages Exceeded
Set what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during
printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without finishing.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher.
Punch Waste Full Error
Set what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without punching.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.
Paper Mismatch Error
Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or
type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by
specifying the cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
8-16
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Inserted Paper Mismatch
Description
Set what to do when it is detected that the cassette paper size setting does not match
the actual paper size that is fed.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Paper Jam before Staple
The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with
stapling can be selected.
Value
Resume at Top of Page: Resume printing from the first page of the document.
Resume at Jammed Page: Resume printing from the page where the jam occurred.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher.
Paper Output
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Output]
Item
Paper Output
Description
Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Document Box,
computers, and FAX RX data.
Value:
with optional job separator
•
Inner Tray:
Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine
•
Job Separator Tray:
Delivery to the Job Separator.
with optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher
•
Job Separator Tray*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.
•
Finisher Tray:
Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document
Finisher.
with optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher
•
Job Separator Tray*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.
•
Tray A:
Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document
Finisher
•
Tray B:
Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document
Finisher
with optional Mailbox
•
Job Separator Tray*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.
•
Tray A:
Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document
Finisher
•
Tray B:
Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document
Finisher
•
Tray 1 to 7:
Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of
the optional Mailbox
NOTE
•
FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
•
Requires the optional Job Separator or Document Finisher (1,000-Sheet Finisher
or 4,000-Sheet Finisher). This function will not be displayed when the optional
Inner Finisher is installed.
*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.
8-17
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Orientation Confirmation
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Orientation Confirmation]
Item
Orientation Confirmation
Description
Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be
placed on the platen when using the following functions.
Original Orientation (page 6-23)
•
Zoom (XY Zoom)
•
Page #
•
Duplex
•
Booklet
•
Margin/Centering
•
Staple/Punch (optional feature)
•
Border Erase
•
2-sided/Book Original
•
Combine
•
Text Stamp
•
Memo Page
•
Bates Stamp
Value: Off, On
Function Defaults
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults]
Item
Orig. Orientation (Copy)
Orig. Orient.(Send/Store)
Original Image (Copy)
Description
Set the original orientation defaults.
Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Auto*1
Set the default original document type for copying.
Value: Text+Photo (Printer), Text+Photo (Magazine), Photo (Printer), Photo
(Magazine), Photo (Photo Paper), Text, Text (Fine Line), Graphic/Map (Printer),
Graphic/Map (Magazine)
Org. Image (Send/Store)
Set the default original document type for sending/storing.
Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Text(Fine Line), Text (for OCR)
FAX TX Resolution*2
Scan Resolution
FAX Operation Guide
Select the default scanning resolution.
Value: 600×600dpi, 400×400dpi Ultra Fine, 300×300dpi, 200×400dpi Super Fine,
200×200dpi Fine, 200×100dpi Normal
Color Selection
Select the default color mode for scanning documents.
Value: Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale,
Black & White
File Format
Set the default type of the files.
Value: PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, High Comp. PDF
Backgrnd Density (Copy)
Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).
Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)
BackgrndDens. (Send/
Store)
Set the default Backgrnd Density (Send/Store).
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy)
Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy).
Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)
Value: Off, On
Prevent Bleed (Send/Store)
Set the default Prevent Bleed (Send/Store).
Value: Off, On
8-18
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Zoom
Description
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the
originals set.
Value: 100%, Auto
Border Erase Default
Set the default width to be erased as a border.
Value
Metric: 0 to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch: 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
NOTE
To specify border erase widths around original, set the value in "Border". To specify
border erase widths in the middle of original, set the value in "Gutter".
Border Erase to Back Page
Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet.
Value: Same as Front Page, Do Not Erase
Margin Default
Set the default margin.
Value
Metric
Left/Right:
-18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Top/Bottom: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
Left/Right:
-0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Top/Bottom: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Auto Image Rotation (Copy)
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.
Value: Off, On
EcoPrint
Select the EcoPrint default.
Value: Off, On
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint)
Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)
NOTE
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
High Comp. PDF Image
Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Standard, Quality Priority
Color TIFF Compression
Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format.
Value: TIFF V6, TTN2
Image Quality (File Format)
Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS/OpenXPS file quality.
Value: 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Collate/Offset
Set the defaults for Collate/Offset.
Value
Collate: Off, On
Offset: Off, Each Set (If [Off] is selected of Collate, it is set to [Each Page].)
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.
Value: Fit to Paper Size, Image Resolution, Fit to Print Resolution
XPS Fit to Page
Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.
Value: Off, On
8-19
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
PDF/A
Description
Select the default PDF/A setting.
Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2a, PDF/A-2b, PDF/A-2u
File Name Entry
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as
Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.
Value
File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time,
Date and Time & Job No.
E-mail Subject/Body
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when
sending the scanned originals by E-mail. Three body messages can be registered,
and the initial template can be used to choose which body message is used.
Value
Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.
Body 1 to 3: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
i-FAX Subject/Body
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when
sending the scanned originals by i-FAX.
Value
Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.
Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit" (page 11-6)
DP Read Action
Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor.
Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional document processor is installed.
OCR Text Recognition
Set the default OCR Text Recognition.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)
Primary OCR Language
Set the default language of the text to be extracted. ([English] is selected as a
default.)
Select the language to extract from the options displayed on the touch panel.
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)
Repeat Copy
Select the Repeat Copy default.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
•
This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.
•
This function will not be displayed when Repeat Copy Job Retention is set to 0.
8-20
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Skip Blank Page (Copy)
Skip Blank Page (Send/
Store)
File Separation
Description
Select the default Skip Blank Page settings.
Value: Off, On
Select the default file separation setting.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you select [On], set the number of pages to be divided. The setting range is 1 to 500
pages.
Cont. Scan (Copy)
Select the default Continuous Scan(Copy) setting.
Value: Off, On
Continuous Scan (FAX)*2
Cont. Scan (Send/Store)
FAX Operation Guide
Select the default Continuous Scan(Send/Store) setting.
Value: Off, On
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
Optional Keyboard Type
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Optional Keyboard Type]
Item
Optional Keyboard Type
Description
Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use.
Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German, UK-English
System Stamp
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [System Stamp]
Item
Basic
Description
Configure settings for stamps.
Text (Text Stamp)
Select [Add/Edit] to edit the test string for a template. Up to 8 templates can be
registered. Select [Delete] to delete a template.
Font (Page #)
Set the font size for page numbers when printing them.
Value
Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
Font (Bates Stamp)
When a bates stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Value
Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
Font (Text Stamp)
Set the font size for stamps when printing them.
Value
Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
8-21
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Printing Jobs
Description
Configure settings for stamps when a document is printed.
After configuring the setting, return to the Copying Functions or Custom Box (Printing
a Document) screen from System Menu, and select the [Reset] key.
Text Stamp
Select whether to print a text stamp on all printing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
Edit Text Stamp
Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a
maximum of 32 characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer
to the following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-21)
Stamp Method
Select the stamp method for the text stamp.
Value: Each Print Page, Each Original Page
Position
Set the text stamp position.
Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail
NOTE
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set
the stamp position and angle when a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in
duplex printing.
Font
Set the font of the text stamp.
Value
Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.
Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-21)
Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline
Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Font: Courier, Letter Gothic
Color: Black, White
Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)
Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
8-22
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Printing Jobs
Bates Stamp
Select whether to print a bates stamp on all printing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,
Numbering Default, Position, Font
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.
To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence
number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the
number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).
Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric
values, and to set the stamp position to be placed on the back side of the paper in
duplex printing.
8-23
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Sending Jobs
Description
Configure stamp settings for sending documents.
After configuring the setting, return to the Sending Functions or Custom Box (Sending
Documents) screen from System Menu, and select the [Reset] key.
Text Stamp
Select whether to print a text stamp on all sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
Edit Text Stamp
Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a
maximum of 32 characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer to the
following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-21)
Position
Set the text stamp position.
Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail
NOTE
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set
the stamp angle.
Font
Set the font of the text stamp.
Value
Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.
Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-21)
Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline
Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Font: Courier, Letter Gothic
Color: Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White
Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)
Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
8-24
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Sending Jobs
Bates Stamp
Select whether to print a bates stamp on all sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,
Numbering Default, Position, Font
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.
To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence
number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the
number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).
Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric
values.
8-25
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Storing Jobs
Description
Configure stamp settings for storing documents in removable memory.
After configuring the setting, return to the Custom Box (Storing Documents) screen
from System Menu, and select the [Reset] key.
Text Stamp
Select whether to print a text stamp on all storing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
Edit Text Stamp
Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a
maximum of 32 characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer to the
following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-21)
Position
Set the text stamp position.
Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail
NOTE
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set
the stamp angle.
Font
Set the font of the text stamp.
Value
Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.
Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-21)
Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline
Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Font: Courier, Letter Gothic
Color: Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White
Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)
Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
8-26
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Storing Jobs
Bates Stamp
Select whether to print a bates stamp on all storing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,
Numbering Default, Position, Font
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.
To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence
number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the
number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).
Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric
values.
Manual Staple
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Manual Staple]
NOTE
Only displayed when the optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher is installed.
Item
Manual Staple
Description
Select whether to use Manual Staple.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you selected [On], set the time until manual stapling mode is automatically
cancelled. The setting range is 5 to 60 seconds (in 5-second increments).
Staple Position
Set the default Staple Position.
Value: A4, Letter
Offset Documents by Job
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset Documents by Job]
Item
Offset Documents by Job
Description
Select whether to offset documents by Job.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is installed.
8-27
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Low Toner Alert Level
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Low Toner Alert Level]
Item
Low Toner Alert
Description
Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner
when the toner is running low.
This notification is used for event report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to
100% (in 1% increments).
Toner Waste Full Alert
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Toner Waste Full Alert]
Item
Toner Waste Full Alert
Description
Notify the administrator when the waste toner box is almost full. Set the notification
timer based on the amount of toner in the waste toner box.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the timing when the waster toner box becomes full by
specifying the capacity of the waster toner box. The setting range is 10 to 90% (in
10% increments).
Offset One Page Documents
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset One Page Documents]
Item
Offset One Page
Documents
Description
Set whether one-page documents are sorted.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional Sheet Finisher is installed.
Display Status/Log
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Display Status/Log]
Set the display method of the Status/Log.
Item
Description
Display Jobs Detail Status
Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Display Jobs Log
Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Display FAX Log*1
Value: Show All, Hide All
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
8-28
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Message Banner Print
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Message Banner Print]
Item
Message Banner Print
Description
Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when
printing multiple banner sheets.
Value: Off, On
Customize Status Display
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Customize Status Display]
Set the items that appear in the status screens for printing jobs, sending jobs, and storing jobs.
Item
Description
Printing Jobs Column 1
Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages
Printing Jobs Column 2
Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages
Sending Jobs Column 1
Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Sending Jobs Column 2
Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Storing Jobs Column 1
Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Storing Jobs Column 2
Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
8-29
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Message Board Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Message Board Settings]
Item
Message Board
Description
Select whether to use the Message Board.
Value: Off, On
Message List
Add
Configure settings for the registered message board.
Add a new message board.
Device to Show
Select where to show the message.
Value
Hide: Displays no message.
Operation Panel: Displays a message on the operation panel.
Embedded Web Server: Displays a message in Command Center RX.
Panel + Web Server: Displays a message in the operation panel and the
Command Center RX.
Message Type
Select the message type.
Value: Normal, Alert, Prohibition
Place to Show
Select where to show the message in the touch panel.
Value:
Login Screen: Login screen of user login administration
Home Screen: Home Screen
Login Screen+Home Screen: Login screen and Home screen of user login
administration
Priority Show
Displays the message on the message board.
Value: Off, On
Title
Enter a maximum of 30 characters for the title to display on the message board.
Body
Enter a maximum of 300 characters for the body to display on the message board.
Delete
Deletes the message board selected on the list.
Raise Priority
Raise the priority of the message board selected on the list.
Lower Priority
Lower the priority of the message board selected on the list.
Detail/Edit
Display information on the selected message board.
Remote Printing
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Remote Printing]
Item
Remote Printing
Description
Select whether to prohibit printing that is performed without operating the machine.
When [Prohibit] is selected, a document that has been stored in the document box
from the printer driver can be printed from the machine. This prevents another person
from seeing that document.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is selected, printing and storing using Quick Copy and Proof and Hold
functions are disabled. Printing a received FAX (optional) is not prohibited.
8-30
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Numeric Keypad Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Numeric Keypad Settings]
Item
Default
Display
Copy/Print
from Box
Description
Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad.
Value: Off, On
HyPAS
Application
Layout (HyPAS Application)
Select the HyPAS numeric keypad layout to display upon startup.
Value: Floating, Horizontal, On the Right
Prevent Light Reflection
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Prevent Light Reflection]
Item
Prevent Light Reflection
Description
Prevent light reflection when using the Erase Shadowed Areas feature.
Value: Off, On
Function Key Assignment
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]
Assign a function to each function key.
Item
Function Key 1
Function Key 2
Description
Value: Copy, Send, FAX*1, Custom Box, Job Box, Removable Memory, FAX Box,
Send to Me (E-mail), Send to Me from Box (E-mail), Internet Browser, None,
Program*2, Application*3
Function Key 3
NOTE
You can select the functions to be displayed for [All], [Application], [Program] and
[Others].
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
*2 The registered program will be displayed.
*3 The running application will be displayed.
Show Power Off Message
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Show Power Off Message]
Item
Show Power Off Message
Description
Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.
Value: Off, On
Home
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]
Configure settings for Home screen.
Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)
8-31
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Copy
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Copy]
Configures settings for copying functions.
Item
Paper Selection
Description
Set the default paper selection.
Value: Auto, Default Paper Source
Auto Image Rotation Action
Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the document to be printed is
different from the orientation of the paper.
Value
Unrotated Manual Copy: If a paper source or zoom ratio is specified, the image
is not rotated.
Apply All: Rotates all images.
Follow Image Size: The image is rotated if the rotated image fits on the paper.
Auto Paper Selection
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when
the zoom changes.
Value
Most Suitable Size: Selects paper size based on the current zoom and the size
of the original.
Same as Original Size: Selects paper that matches the size of the original,
regardless the zoom.
Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether
automatic zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.
Value: Off, On
Paper Size for Small
Original
Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the original is too small to be
detected in the Auto Paper Selection mode.
Value: Default Paper Source, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Letter-R,
Letter, Statement-R
Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.
Value: 1 to 999 copies
Reserve Next Priority
Specify whether the default screen appears when a subsequent copy job is reserved
while printing is in progress. To have the default screen appear, select [On].
Value: Off, On
Quick Setup Registration
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup.
Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be
changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch*1, Density, Duplex, Combine,
Collate/Offset, Original Image, Original Size, Original Orientation,
Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.
*1 This setting is displayed when the optional Document Finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this
item name is "Staple".
8-32
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Send
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send]
Configures settings for sending functions.
Item
Quick Setup Registration
Description
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup
screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original*1, Sending Size, Original
Orientation, File Format, Density, Original Image, Scan Resolution, FAX TX
Resolution*2, Color Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan, Background Density
Adj.
Dest. Check before Send
Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the
[Start] key when performing sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
Color Type
Set the color type when you send color documents.
Value: RGB, sRGB
Entry Check for New Dest.
When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to
check the entered destination.
Value: Off, On
Default Screen
Set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.
Value: Destination, Address Book
8-33
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Send and Forward
Forward
Description
Select whether to forward the original to another destination when sending images.
Select whether to forward the original.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [E-mail], [Folder(SMB)],
[Folder(FTP)], [FAX]*2, [i-FAX(Via server-On)]*3, and [i-FAX(Via server-Off)]*3.
Destination
Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set.
Follow the steps below to register the destination.
•
Address Book
•
E-mail Addr Entry
•
Folder Path Entry
Specifying Destination (page 5-41)
Color Setting
Configure the color settings for forwarded original.
Value: Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale,
Black & White
Scan Resolution
Select resolution for stored original.
Value: 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi, 200x400dpi Super Fine,
200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal
File Format
Select the file format of forwarded original.
File format for Send and Forward (page 8-35)
File Separation
Set whether originals are divided into multiple files before being forwarded.
Value: Off, Each Page
E-mail Subject
Enter a maximum of 60 characters for the subject of forwarded E-mail.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
FTP Encrypted TX
Set whether originals are encrypted before being forwarded.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when SSL is set to [On] in Security Settings.
Security Settings (page 8-57)
New Destination Entry
Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
Recall Destination
Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
Broadcast
Set whether to enable broadcast.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
8-34
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
HighCompressionPDF
Mode
Select the compression method for sending High-Compression PDF.
OCR Text Recognition Act.
Configure settings for OCR Text Recognition Action.
Value: Text Priority, File Size Priority
Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)
*1 When the optional document processor is not installed, this is set to "Book Original".
*2 Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
*3 This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
File format for Send and Forward
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send] > [Send and Forward] > [File Format]
Select the file format for forwarded original.
The table below lists the file formats and their details.
File format
Adjustable range of image quality
Color setting
PDF*
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
TIFF
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
JPEG
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale
XPS
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
OpenXPS
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
High Comp. PDF *1
Compression Ratio Priority,
Standard, Quality Priority
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale
*1 File format can be selected. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u])
8-35
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and
editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in "Compatibility".
When [Acrobat 3.0 or later] is selected
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send] > [Send and Forward] > [File Format] > [PDF/High Comp. PDF] >
[Encryption]
Item
Value
Description
Password to Open
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then select [OK].
Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and select [OK].
Password to Edit/Print
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then select [OK].
Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and select [OK].
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Detail
Printing
Allowed
Not Allowed, Allowed
Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Changes
Allowed
Not Allowed
Disables the change to the PDF file.
Commenting
Can only add commenting.
Page Layout except
extracting Pages
Can change the page layout except extracting the pages
of the PDF file.
Any except extracting
Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
the PDF file.
Disable, Enable
Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Copying of
Text/Images/
Others
8-36
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
When [Acrobat 5.0 or later] is selected
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send] > [Send and Forward] > [File Format] > [PDF/High Comp. PDF] >
[Encryption]
Item
Value
Description
Password to Open
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then select [OK].
Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and select [OK].
Password to Edit/Print
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then select [OK].
Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and select [OK].
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Detail
Printing
Allowed
Changes
Allowed
Copying of
Text/Images/
Others
Not Allowed
Disables the printing of PDF file.
Allowed
(Low Resolution only)
Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
Allowed
Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Not Allowed
Disables the change to the PDF file.
Inserting/Deleting/
Rotating Pages
Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF
file.
Commenting
Can only add commenting.
Any except extracting
Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
the PDF file.
Disable, Enable
Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
8-37
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Document Box/Removable Memory
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Document Box/Removable Memory]
Configures settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling Box.
Item
Custom Box
Add/Edit Box
Default Setting
FAX Box*1
Job Box
Quick Copy Job
Retention
Description
Configure settings for Custom Box.
Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-53)
Auto File Deletion Time
Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.
FAX Operation Guide
Configure settings for Job Box.
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored
jobs.
Value: number between 0 and 300
NOTE
When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
Repeat Copy Job
Retention
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored
jobs.
Value: number between 0 and 50
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.
When 0 is set, Repeat Copy cannot be used.
Deletion of Job
Retention
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or
Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted
after they have been saved for a set time.
Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this
function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned
off.
Polling Box*1
FAX Operation Guide
8-38
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Quick Setup Registration
Store File
Description
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup
screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Select the functions to be registered for Store File Quick Setup.
Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original*2, Scan
Resolution, Zoom, Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image,
Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.
Value: Off, Key 1 to 6
Print
Select the functions to be registered for Print Quick Setup.
Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch, Duplex*3, Combine, Delete after
Printed
Value: Off, Key 1 to 6
Send
Select the functions to be registered for Send Quick Setup.
Sending Size, FAX TX Resolution*1, File Format, Delete after Transmitted, Color
Selection
Value: Off, Key 1 to 6
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
*2 When the optional document processor is not installed, this is set to "Book Original".
*3 Display only when an optional Sheet Finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this item name is
"Staple".
FAX
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FAX]
Configure settings for FAX.
FAX Operation Guide
Printer
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Printer]
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Item
Emulation
Description
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types
of printers.
Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)
NOTE
When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too.
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.
Alt Emulation
When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between
KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to
the data to print.
Value: PCL6
KPDL Error Report
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or
not the error report is output.
Value: Off, On
8-39
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
EcoPrint
Description
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where
faded printing is not a problem.
Value: Off, On
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint)
Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)
NOTE
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Override A4/Letter
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size
when printing.
Value
Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use
whichever size is in the paper source.
Duplex
Select binding orientation for duplex mode.
Value: 1-sided, 2-sided Bind LongEdge, 2-sided Bind ShortEdge
Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Value: 1 to 999 copies
Orientation
Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].
Value: Portrait, Landscape
Form Feed TimeOut
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is
no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed.
When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options
are between 5 and 495 seconds.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character
code 0AH).
Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF
CR Action
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code
(character code 0DH).
Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR
Job Name
Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No.
& Job Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].
User Name
Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
Paper Feed Mode
While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source
and type are specified.
Value
Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
8-40
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
MP Tray Priority
Description
If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray
in the paper feed.
Value
Off: The printer driver settings are followed.
Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP
tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray.
Always: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP
tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.
Auto Cassette Change
Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while
printing.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Wide A4
•
When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette
#." (# is a cassette number) or "Add the following paper in the multi purpose tray.",
and stops printing.
•
Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.
•
To print from the other paper cassette, select [Paper Selection]. Select the
desired paper source.
•
When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other
cassette contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.
Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a
line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at
10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.
Value: Off, On
Resolution
Set the resolution used for printing.
Value: 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
NOTE
Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation
panel settings.
KIR
Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting.
Value: Off, On
8-41
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
Print Report
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Print Report]
Item
Status Page
Description
Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current
settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page
Font List
Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.
Network Status
Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network
interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
Network Status Page
8-42
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Service Status
Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status
Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance
purpose.
Optional Network Status
Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including
optional network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless
Network Interface Kit is installed.
Admin Report Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Admin Report Settings]
Configure settings for Outgoing FAX report and Incoming FAX report.
FAX Operation Guide
Result Report Setting
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Result Report Setting]
Item
Send Result Report
E-mail/Folder
Description
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP
transmission is complete.
Value: Off, On, Error Only
FAX*1
FAX Operation Guide
Canceled before
Sending*2
Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.
Recipient Format*2
Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.
Value: Off, On
Value: Name or Destination, Name and Destination
FAX RX Result Report*1
FAX Operation Guide
Job Finish Notice Setting*1
FAX Operation Guide
RX Result Report Type*1*3
FAX Operation Guide
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
*2 When "E-mail/Folder" and "FAX" are set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.
*3 This is not displayed if you selected [Off] for FAX RX Result Report.
8-43
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Sending Log History
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Sending Log History]
Item
Auto Sending
Description
This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations
whenever a set number of jobs has been logged.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 1,500.
Send Log History
You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
Destination
Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.
Job Log Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
SSFC Log Subject
Enter the subject of the printed job history with IC card authentication.
Value: Up to 60 characters
Personal Information
Select whether to include personal information in the job log.
Value: Include, Exclude
Login History Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Login History Settings]
Item
Login History
Description
Select whether to record the Login History.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be recorded. The setting range is 1
to 1,000.
Auto Sending
Select whether the login history is automatically sent to the set address when the
number of entries reaches the number set in "Login History".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
Destination
Set the destination to which login histories are sent. E-mail address only can be set as
destination.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending login histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
Log Reset
Resets the recorded login histories.
8-44
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
Device Log History Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Device Log History Settings]
Item
Description
Device Log History
Select whether to record the device log history.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to
1,000.
Auto Sending
Select whether the device log history is automatically sent to the set address when
the number of entries reaches the number set in "Device Log History".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].
Destination
Set the destination to which device log histories are sent. E-mail address only can be
set as destination.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].
Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending device log histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
8-45
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Secure Comm. Error Log
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Secure Comm. Error Log]
Item
Description
Secure Comm. Error Log
Select whether to record the secure communication error log history.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to
1,000.
Auto Sending
Select whether the secure communication error log history is automatically sent to the
set address when the number of entries reaches the number set in "Secure Comm.
Error Log".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to
[On].
Destination
Set the destination to which secure communication error log histories are sent. E-mail
address only can be set as destination.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to
[On].
Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending secure communication error log
histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to
[On].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
8-46
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System/Network
Configures machine system settings.
Network
Configures network settings.
Host Name
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Host Name]
Item
Host Name
Description
Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command
Center RX.
Changing Device Information (page 2-64)
Wired Network Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wired Network Settings]
Configure wired network settings.
TCP/IP Setting
Item
TCP/IP
Description
Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.
Value: Off, On
IPv4
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/
IP] is set to [On].
IP Address
Set the IP address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
Subnet Mask
Set the IP subnet mask.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
Default Gateway
Set the IP gateway address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
DHCP
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.
Value: Off, On
Auto-IP
Select whether to use Auto-IP.
Value: Off, On
8-47
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Item
IPv6
Description
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/
IP] is [On].
IPv6
Select whether to use IPv6.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the
network.
RA (Stateless)
Select whether to use RA (Stateless).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the
network.
Manual Setting
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP
(IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting
of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated
by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of
four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by
colon (:).
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
DHCP
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the
network.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-48
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
LAN Interface
Item
LAN Interface
Description
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
Value: Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, 100BASE-TX Full,
1000BASE-T
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]
Set Wi-Fi Direct.
Item
Wi-Fi Direct
Description
Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.
Value: Off, On
Device Name
Specify the device name.
NOTE
IP Address
•
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
•
This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Check the IP address of the machine.
TCP/IP Setting (page 8-47)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Auto Disconnect
Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
•
If you select [ON], set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.
•
This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Settings]
Set Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi
Item
Wi-Fi
Description
Select whether to use Wi-Fi.
Value: Off, On
8-49
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Setup
Item
Description
Connection Status
Check the wireless LAN status.
Quick Setup
If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless
network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.
Available Network
WEP Key Index
Displays access points to which the machine can connect.
Select the key index of the access point.
Value: 0 to 3
Push Button Method
If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be
configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the
connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN Code Method
(Device)
Custom Setup
Network Name (SSID)
Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access
point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine
connects.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Network
Authentication
Select network authentication type.
Encryption
Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network
Authentication setting.
Value: Open, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP
Network
Authentication
Open
Encryption
Disable
―
WEP
WEP Key: Up to 26 characters
WEP Key Index: 0 to 3
WPA2/WPA-PSK
Data Encryption: AES, Auto
Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters
WPA2-PSK
Data Encryption: AES
Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters
WPA2/WPA-EAP
Data Encryption: AES, Auto
WPA2-EAP
Data Encryption: AES
8-50
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
TCP/IP Setting
Item
TCP/IP
Description
Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.
Value: Off, On
IPv4
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/
IP] is set to [On].
IP Address
Set the IP address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
Subnet Mask
Set the IP subnet mask.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
Default Gateway
Set the IP gateway address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
DHCP
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.
Value: Off, On
Auto-IP
Select whether to use Auto-IP.
Value: Off, On
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-51
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
IPv6
Description
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/
IP] is [On].
IPv6
Select whether to use IPv6.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the
network.
RA (Stateless)
Select whether to use RA (Stateless).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the
network.
Manual Setting
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP
(IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting
of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated
by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of
four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by
colon (:).
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
DHCP
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the
network.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Restart Network
Item
Restart Network
Description
Restarts the network.
8-52
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Bonjour
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Bonjour]
Item
Bonjour
Description
Select whether to use Bonjour.
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
IPSec
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [IPSec]
Item
IPSec
Description
Select whether to use IPSec.
Value: Off, On
Protocol Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Protocol Settings]
Configure protocol settings.
Item
Description
SMTP (E-mail TX)
Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.
Value: Off, On
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.
Value: Off, On
FTP Client (Transmission)
Select whether to send documents using FTP. To use the FTP Client, set the protocol
to [On]. The default port number is 21.
Value: Off, On
FTP Server (Reception)
Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
SMB Client (Transmission):
Select whether to send documents using SMB. To use the SMB Client, set the
protocol to [On]. The default port number is 445.
Value: Off, On
NetBEUI
Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
8-53
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
WSD Scan
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Description
Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1
Value: Off, On
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
WSD Print
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and
Network FAX driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1
Value: Off, On
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
i-FAX
Select whether to use i-FAX.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
DSM Scan
Select whether to use DSM scan.*1
Value: Off, On
ThinPrint
Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol to
[On]. The default port number is 4000.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
Thin Print over SSL
To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] and [SSL] to [On].
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the
self-certificate of the machine.
Command Center RX User Guide
Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1
Value: Off, On
LPD
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
8-54
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1
Value: Off, On
Raw
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
IPP
Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] to
[On], and set [SSL] to [Off]. In addition, select [Not Secure (IPP&IPPS)] on IPP
Security under Security Settings from the Command Center RX. The default port
number is 631.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
IPP over SSL
To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] and [SSL] to [On]. The default port number is
443.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the
self-certificate of the machine.
Command Center RX User Guide
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1
HTTP
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
HTTPS
Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
LDAP
Select whether to use LDAP.
Value: Off, On
8-55
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
SNMPv1/v2c
Description
Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
SNMPv3
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1
Value: Off, On
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
Enhanced WSD
Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX driver.
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
Enhanced WSD over SSL
Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX drivers.
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1
eSCL
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
eSCL over SSL
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi
Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.*1, *2
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wired Network
*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
*2 Set "SSL" to [On] in Security Settings.
Security Settings (page 8-57)
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-56
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Security Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Security Settings]
Item
SSL
Description
Select whether to use SSL for communication.
Value: Off, On
Proxy
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Proxy]
Item
Proxy
Description
Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.
Value: Off, On
Use the Same Proxy
Server for All
Protocols
Set whether the same proxy server is used for all protocols. To use the same proxy
server, select the [Use the Same Proxy Server for All Protocols] checkbox.
Proxy Server (HTTP)
Set a proxy server (HTTP).
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
Proxy Server (HTTPS)
Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Use the Same Proxy
Server for All Protocols" is [Off].
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
Do Not Use Proxy for
Following Domains
Set domains for which no proxy is used.
Value: (Enter the domain name.)
Ping
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Ping]
Item
Ping
Description
Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP
address of the destination is possible.
NOTE
If [Primary Network (Client)] is set to [Others], this item is not displayed.
Restart Network
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network]
Item
Restart Network
Description
Restarts the network.
8-57
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Optional Network
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Network]
Basic
Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit.
NOTE
This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
Item
Host Name
Description
Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command
Center RX.
Changing Device Information (page 2-64)
TCP/IP Setting
For details on setting value.
TCP/IP Setting (page 8-47)
Bonjour (page 8-53)
IPSec (page 8-53)
NetWare
Use NetWare to receive documents.
See the Operation Guide for the optional network interface card for details.
Value: Off, On
AppleTalk
Selects whether to receive documents using AppleTalk.*1
Value: Off, On
LAN Interface
Select the LAN Interface type.*1
Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full,
1000BASE-T
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
MAC Address Filter
Select whether to use MAC Address Filter.
Operation Guide for the optional Network Interface Kit
Value: Off, On
Restart Network
Restarts the network card of the device.
*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
8-58
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Wireless Network
Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
Item
Description
Connection Status
You can check the wireless LAN status.
Quick Setup
If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless
network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.
Available Network
Select access points to which the machine can be connected, enter the Preshared
Key and start a connection.
Push Button Method
If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be
configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the
connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN Code Method
(Device)
Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access
point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
PIN Code Method
(Terminal)
Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN code of the
access point.
8-59
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Custom Setup
Network Name (SSID)
Description
The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine
connects.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Connection Mode
Set the connection mode.
Value: Ad Hoc, Infrastructure
NOTE
Ad Hoc: Directly communicates with the device without going through an access
point. This method cannot be used to connect to two or more devices.
Infrastructure: Performs communication through an access point.
Channel
Set channel. Use [-] / [+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
Value: 1 to 11
Network
Authentication
Select network authentication type. To select other options, open the device home
page from a computer.
Value: Open, Shared, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1
Encryption
Select encryption method. If the option other than [Disable] is selected, enter the
WEP key or the Preshared key. The setting values vary depending on the Network
Authentication setting. Select [Data Encryption].
When Network Authentication is set to [Open] or [Shared]:
Value: Disable, WEP
When Network Authentication is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK]:
Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2, Preshared Key
NOTE
•
If [WEP] is selected, enter the WEP key. Up to 26 characters can be entered.
•
If [TKIP], [AES] or [Auto] is selected, enter the Preshared key. Enter the value in 8
to 64 characters.
*1 Not displayed if you selected [Ad Hoc] for "Connection Mode".
*2 Not displayed if you selected [WPA2-PSK] for "Network Authentication".
Primary Network (Client)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Primary Network (Client)]
Item
Primary Network (Client)
Description
Select the network interface to be used for the send function that this machine
functions as a client, the network authentication and connecting to external address
book.
Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network, Optional Network
NOTE
•
[Optional Network] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50)
or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
•
When you select [Optional Network], you can send an E-mail using both optional
network interface (IB-50 or IB-51) and wired network interface.
8-60
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Security Level
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Security Level]
Item
Security Level
Description
Specify the security level.
Value
Low:
This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.
High:
This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting
normally.
Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine
settings to be changed from external command.
NOTE
This function is available when you have logged in as machine administrator.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
Interface Block Setting
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Interface Block Setting]
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional
interfaces.
Item
USB Host
Description
This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Device
This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Storage
This locks and protects the USB memory slot.
Value: Unblock, Block
NOTE
This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].
Optional Interface 1
Optional Interface 2
This locks and protects the optional interface slots.
Value: Unblock, Block
NOTE
You can set this feature for each slot.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-61
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Data Security
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Data Security]
Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and machine's memory.
Item
Hard Disk/SSD Initialization
Description
Change security functions.
NOTE
Data Overwrite
Method
•
This function is displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.
•
Enter the security password to change security functions.
The method used to overwrite data can be changed.
Refer to the following for details.
Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
Value
Once Overwrite: This function overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of
overwriting) or all areas (in the case of system initialization) with zeroes to
prevent data restoration.
3-time Overwrite (DoD): This overwrite method complies with U.S. Department
of Defense (DoD) standards, and overwrites unneeded data areas of the hard
disk (in the case of overwriting) or all areas (in the case of system initialization)
with specific characters, their complements, and random characters to prevent
data restoration. Data restoration is not possible even when sophisticated
restoration techniques are used, and a higher level of security than Once
Overwrite is obtained.
NOTE
This method may take more time than Once Overwrite method to process a larger
amount of data.
Security Password
Customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the security
kit.
Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter the password again for confirmation.
IMPORTANT
Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password (e.g. 11111111 or
12345678).
System Initialization
Overwrite all the data stored in the hard disk/SSD when disposing of the machine.
IMPORTANT
If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, the hard disk/
SSD might possibly crash or initialization might fail.
NOTE
If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, turn the power switch
on again. Initialization automatically restarts.
8-62
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Data Sanitization
Description
Return the following information registered in the machine to the factory defaults.
•
Address Book
•
Favorites
•
System settings
•
Fax transmission and reception / forwarding data
•
Transmission histories
•
Data saved in Custom Box
•
Optional applications
NOTE
•
Print the status page and then confirm that security data is deleted.
Status Page (page 8-42)
Software Verification
•
Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.
•
Before executing this function, disconnect modular, network, and other cables.
•
Do not turn off the main power switch while sanitizing the data. If the main power is
turned off during data erasing, erasing will be executed automatically when the
power is restored, however, complete erasure cannot be guaranteed.
Verify the installed software.
Select [Start] to start verification.
If an error occurs during software verification, contact your dealer or service
representative.
Information erased
Category
Devices/jobs
FAX*1
Application/program
Data erased
•
Job settings configured by users
•
Network settings
•
Image data saved in Document Box, etc.
•
Data registered in One Touch keys
•
Job histories
•
User information (user list, address book, Document Box registered by the user,
etc.)
•
Account information of job accounting
•
Network certificates
•
Initial screen on machine changed by service representative
•
Fax settings configured by users
•
Communication restriction settings
•
Encryption key settings
•
Transmission histories
•
Scheduled jobs
•
Conditional reception/forwarding settings
•
Application/program added by a user or service representative
•
Trial functions
*1 Only when the optional fax kit is installed.
8-63
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Optional Function
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function]
Item
Optional Function
Description
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Optional Applications (page 11-8)
Bluetooth Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Bluetooth Settings]
Item
Bluetooth Keyboard
Description
Use Bluetooth keyboard.
Value: Off, On
Search Device
Select a keyboard.
Restart Entire Device
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Restart Entire Device]
Item
Restart Entire Device
Description
Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any
unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
NFC
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [NFC]
Item
NFC
Description
Use NFC (Near Field Communication).
Value: Off, On
8-64
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Edit Destination
Address Book
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Address Book]
Configure settings for address book.
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-30)
One Touch Key
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [One Touch Key]
Configure settings for One Touch Key.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-37)
Print list
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Print list]
FAX Operation Guide
Address Book Defaults
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Address Book Defaults]
Item
Sort
Description
Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
Value: No., Name
Narrow Down
This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed
when the address book is displayed.
Value: Off, E-mail, Folder, FAX*1, i-FAX*2, Group
Address Book Type*3
Select whether the machine's address book or the External Address Book appears
when the address book is displayed.
Value: Machine Address Book, Ext Address Book
*1 Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
*2 This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
*3 This display appears only if the external address book is available.
Edit Restriction
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Edit Restriction]
Item
Address Book
Description
Restrict editing of the address book. If you selected [Administrator Only], you can
only edit the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.
Value: Off, Administrator Only
One-Touch Key
Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. If you selected [Administrator Only], you can
only edit the One Touch Key by logging in with administrator privileges.
Value: Off, Administrator Only
8-65
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
User Login/Job Accounting
[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
Configure settings related to machine management.
Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)
Unknown ID Job (page 9-53)
User Property
[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]
Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
Configures settings related to the date and time.
Item
Date/Time
Description
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform
Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute
(00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
NOTE
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no
longer be able to use the application.
Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western
notation.
Value: MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD
Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If
you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.
Setting Date and Time (page 2-29)
Auto Panel Reset
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to
the default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset, refer to the following:
Panel Reset Timer (page 8-67)
Auto Error Clear
If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be
taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a
set amount of time elapses.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
For setting the automatic error recovery time, refer to the following:
Error Clear Timer (page 8-67)
8-66
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Low Power Timer
Description
Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.
Value
For Europe: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)
Except for Europe: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
Low Power Mode (page 2-39)
Panel Reset Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel
Reset.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].
Sleep Timer
Set amount of time before entering Sleep.
Value
For Europe
1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)
Except for Europe
1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
Interrupt Clear Timer
Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set
to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
Error Job Skip
Set whether a job for which a "Add paper in cassette #" or "Add paper in Multi Purpose
tray" error occurred when the job was started is automatically skipped after a set period
of time elapses.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Error Clear Timer
•
When a job is skipped, it is moved to the end of the job queue.
•
If [On] is selected, set the time until the job is skipped. The setting range is 5 to 90
(5 second increments).
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before
automatically clearing errors.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Error Clear] is set to [On].
Unusable Time*2
Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes.
FAX Operation Guide.
8-67
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Sleep Rules (models for
Europe)
Description
Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:
•
Network
•
USB Cable
•
ID Card Reader*1
•
FAX*2
•
Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Sleep Level (models except
for Europe)
•
If the sleep condition is not turned off, the machine will not wake from sleep mode
even if it receives a print job from a computer connected by USB cable. Also, the
ID card cannot be recognized.
•
This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery
controller is installed.
Select the sleep level.
Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal
Sleep mode.
Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery
controller is installed.
Sleep Rules
Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:
•
Network
•
USB Cable
•
ID Card Reader*1
•
FAX*2
•
Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, it does not
wake from sleep mode when it receives print data from a PC connected by USB
cable. Also, the ID card cannot be recognized.
EnergySaver
RecoveryLevel
Select the method of recovery from energy saver.
Value:
Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.
However, this mode saves less energy.
Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:
enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling
the use of desired functions only.
If you want to use all functions immediately, select the
[Energy Saver] key to execute recovery.
Power Saving Recovery: This mode enables the use of desired functions only.
This mode saves energy most effectively.
8-68
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Weekly Timer Settings
Weekly Timer
Description
Configure settings for switching the machine to OFF and waking it automatically at a
specified time for each day of the week.
Select whether to use Weekly Timer.
Value: Off, On
Schedule
Specify the time for each day of the week at which the machine turns OFF.
Retry Times
Set the number of retries for turning OFF this machine.
Value: Limited Retries, Unlimited Retries
NOTE
If [Limited Retries] is selected, set the number of retry. The setting range is 0 to 10.
Retry is not performed when "0" is set.
If [Unlimited Retries] is selected, retry is performed until the machine turns OFF.
Retry Interval
Set the retry interval.
Use [-] / [+] to enter a number.
Value: 10 to 60 seconds (increments of 10 seconds)
Power Off Rule (models for
Europe)
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function.
Select [On] to set the Power Off mode.
•
Network
•
FAX*2
•
USB Cable
•
USB Host
•
NIC*3
•
Remote Diagnostics
•
Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if either [FAX] or [NIC] is set to [Off],
the machine does not enter Power Off Mode.
Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not
communicate with the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.
Power Off Timer (models
for Europe)
Ping Timeout
Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.
Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours,
1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week
Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".
Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)
*1 Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.
*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
*3 Displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
8-69
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Adjustment/Maintenance
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance]
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
Item
Description
Density Adjustment
Copy
Adjust density.
Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Send/Box
Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment
can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
FAX*1
FAX Operation Guide
Background Density Adj.
Copy (Auto)
Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.
Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying.
Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Send/Box (Auto)
Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them
in the Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Sharpness Adjustment
Copy
All
Adjust the sharpness of the image outline.
Sharpen or blur overall image outlines during copying. Adjustment can be made in 7
levels.
Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
Text/Fine
Line
Send/Box
All
Sharpen text/fine line during copying. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.
Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)
Sharpen or blur overall image outlines when sending or storing them in the Document
Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
Text/Fine
Line
Adjust sharpness of the text/fine line when during sending or storing them in the
Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.
Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)
Drum Heater
Set the drum heater.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This setting does not appear in some regions.
Correcting Black Lines
Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the
image, when the document processor is used.
Value
Off: No correction performed.
On (Low): Correction performed. The reproduction of fine lines on the original
may become lighter than when using [Off].
On (High): Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The
reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using
[On (Low)].
8-70
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
System Initialization
Description
Initialize the hard disk installed on the machine to return it to the factory defaults.
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.
Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch panel.
Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4, 5 (Lighter)
Silent Mode
Set the Silent Mode. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, it may take time for the next print job to start.
Auto Color Correction
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine
whether the original is color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting
a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value
will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white.
Value: 1 (Color), 2, 3, 4, 5 (B & W)
Tone Curve Adjustment
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the
printed output tone may differ from the original. Perform this function to ensure
consistency with the original tone.
Tone Curve Adjustment (page 10-46)
Drum Refresh
Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. It takes about 1 minute. The
time required may vary depending on the operating environment.
Drum Refresh (page 10-48)
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the
printing is done.
Developer Refresh
Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough
toner.
Developer Refresh (page 10-49)
NOTE
Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
Calibration Cycle
Set the calibration cycle.
Value:
Short:
Priority is given to image quality.
Standard: Balances image quality and print speed.
Long:
Priority is given to print speed.
NOTE
When [Custom] is displayed as setting item, the setting cannot be changed.
Calibration
Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original tone.
Calibration (page 10-48)
NOTE
Perform Tone Curve Adjustment when consistency with the original tone is not
ensured.
Memory Diagnostics
Perform this function to check the machine memory.
8-71
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Laser Scanner Cleaning
Description
Remove vertical white lines from the printout.
Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 10-48)
Contrast
You can increase or decrease the overall contrast.
Copy
Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.
Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Send/Box
Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a
document box.
Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Auto Drum Refresh
Select the time length of the drum refresh.
Value
Off: The Auto Drum Refresh will not be performed.
Short: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Short.
Standard: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Standard.
Long: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Long.
Open toner cover
Open the toner cover.
NOTE
This function is displayed when using a genuine toner container.
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
Internet
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Internet]
Configure settings related to the internet.
Item
Internet Browser
Description
Select whether to use the Internet browser.
Value: Off, On
Browser Environment
This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how
pages are displayed.
Value:
Home page: (Enter the address for Home page.)
Text Size: Large, Medium, Small
Display Mode: Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering
Cookie: Accept All, Reject All, Prompt before Accepting
Internet Browser (page 8-72)
NOTE
To use proxy from Internet Browser, refer to the following:
Proxy (page 8-57)
8-72
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Application
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]
Configure settings for Application.
Application (page 5-13)
8-73
9
User Authentication
and Accounting
(User Login,
Job Accounting)
This chapter explains the following topics:
Overview of User Login Administration ......... 9-2
Managing the Job Account from PC ... 9-2
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN
for Scanning ........................................ 9-2
Managing the Users to Use WIA for
Scanning ............................................. 9-2
Managing the Users to Send Faxes
from a PC ............................................ 9-2
Enabling User Login Administration .............. 9-3
Setting User Login Administration ................. 9-5
Authentication Security ....................... 9-5
Adding a User (Local User List) .......... 9-8
Changing User Properties ................. 9-11
User Login Administration for Printing ... 9-14
Managing the Users to Scan Using
TWAIN .............................................. 9-15
Managing the Users to Scan Using
WIA ................................................... 9-16
Managing the Users that Send Faxes
from a PC .......................................... 9-17
Local Authorization ........................... 9-18
Group Authorization Settings ............ 9-19
Guest Authorization Set. ................... 9-22
Obtain NW User Property ................. 9-25
Simple Login Settings ....................... 9-27
ID Card Settings ............................... 9-30
PIN Code Authorization .................... 9-31
Using User Login Administration ................. 9-32
Login/Logout ..................................... 9-32
Overview of Job Accounting ....................... 9-33
To Manage the Number of Sheets
Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ...... 9-33
Managing the Scan Job Account by
Using TWAIN .................................... 9-33
Managing the Scan Job Account by
Using WIA ......................................... 9-33
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted
from a PC .......................................... 9-33
Enabling Job Accounting ............................ 9-34
Job Accounting Access ..................... 9-35
Job Accounting (Local) ............................... 9-36
Adding an Account ............................ 9-36
Restricting the Use of the Machine ... 9-38
Editing an Account ............................ 9-39
Deleting an Account .......................... 9-40
Job Accounting for Printing ............... 9-41
Job Accounting for Scan Using
TWAIN .............................................. 9-42
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA .... 9-43
Job Accounting for the FAX
Transmitted from a Computer ........... 9-44
Configuring Job Accounting ........................ 9-45
Default Setting .................................. 9-45
Counting the Number of Pages
Printed .............................................. 9-47
Print Accounting Report .................... 9-49
Using Job Accounting ................................. 9-50
Login/Logout ..................................... 9-50
Apply Limit .................................................. 9-51
Copy/Printer Count ..................................... 9-52
Unknown ID Job .......................................... 9-53
Unknown ID Job ............................... 9-53
Registering Information for a User whose ID
is Unknown ....................................... 9-54
9-1
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
Overview of User Login Administration
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user
name and password for user authentication to login.
1
Enable User Login
Administration (page 9-3)
2
Set the user
(page 9-8)
3
Enter the login user name and password
and execute the job (page 9-32)
UserA
Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified
only by the "Machine Administrator".
Managing the Job Account from PC
In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.
To Manage the Users to Print from PCs
Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.
1
Set the User Login
Administration on the printer
driver (page 9-14)
2
Print
User A
User B
User C
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning
TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-15)
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning
WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 9-16)
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC
FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 9-17)
The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
9-2
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration
Enabling User Login Administration
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Item
Descriptions
Local Authentication
User authentication based on user properties on the local user list
stored in the machine.
Network
Authentication
User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property
stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login
page.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "User Login" [Change]
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication].
Select [Off] to disable user login administration.
If you select [Network Authentication], enter the host name (64 characters or less) and
domain name (256 characters or less) for the Authentication Server. Select [NTLM],
[Kerberos] or [Ext.] as the server type.
When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.
NOTE
Selecting "Domain" [Add/Edit] displays the domain registration list. In the domain
registration list screen, select [Add/Edit], and enter the domain name. Up to 10 domain
names can be registered.
2 Select [OK].
"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" appears when [OK] is selected.
To add a new function, select [Yes]. The selection screen for functions displayed in the
home screen will appear.
Available Functions to Display on Desktop (page 2-16)
9-3
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration
NOTE
If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator
registered in the local user list and correct the settings.
9-4
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Setting User Login Administration
This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.
Authentication Security
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
User Account Lockout Setting
You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Authentication Security" [Next] > "User Account Lockout
Set" [Next]
9-5
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
2
Configure the settings.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
Lockout
Descriptions
Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.
Value: Off, On
Lockout Policy
Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout
is applied.
Value
Number of Retries until Locked:
Specify how many login retries are
allowed until the account is locked out.
(1 to 10 times)
Lockout Duration: Specify how long the account is to be
locked out until it is unlocked.
(1 to 60 minutes)
Lockout Target:
Locked out Users
List
Specify the extent to which the account
lockout is applied. You can select from
[All] or [Remote Login Only]. Remote
Login Only locks out all operations from
outside the operation panel.
Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by
selecting the user in the list, and selecting [Unlock].
NOTE
This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.
9-6
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Password Policy Settings
You can prohibit the setting and use of passwords that do not comply with the password policy.
Setting the Password Policy makes it more difficult to break the password.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Authentication Security" [Next] > "Password Policy Settings"
[Next]
2
Configure the settings.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
Password Policy
Descriptions
Select whether or not password policy is enabled.
Value: Off, On
Minimum password
length
Set the minimum password length of characters for password.
Password complexity
Set the password complexity.
Value: Off, On (1 to 64 characters)
Value
No more than two consecutive identical char: Off, On
At least one uppercase letter (A-Z): Off, On
At least one lowercase letter (a-z): Off, On
At least one number (0-9): Off, On
At least one symbol: Off, On
Maximum password
age
Set the maximum password age.
Policy Violated User
List
List of users do not meet password policy requirements.
Value: Off, On (1 to 180 days)
9-7
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Adding a User (Local User List)
You can add up to 1,000 users (including the default login user name).
NOTE
By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.
Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
User Name:
DeviceAdmin
Login User Name:
4002i: 4000, 5002i: 5000, 6002i: 6000
Login Password:
4002i: 4000, 5002i: 5000, 6002i: 6000
Access Level:
Machine Administrator
Administrator
User Name:
Admin
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password:
Admin
Access Level:
Administrator
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Local User List" [Add/Edit]
2
Enter the user information.
[Add] > Enter the user information > [OK]
Item
Descriptions
User Name
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User
Name
Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same
login user name cannot be registered.
Login Password
Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters). Reenter the same
password for confirmation and select the [OK] key.
9-8
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item
Descriptions
Access Level
Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.
Account Name
Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/
her account name, can login without entering the account ID.
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)
NOTE
•
Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
•
Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name
or account ID.
E-mail Address
The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address
will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any
E-mail function.
ID Card
Information
Register ID card information.
Place the ID card on the ID card reader, and select [Read].
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit
is activated.
Optional Applications (page 11-8)
Local
Authorization*1
Set usage authority for each user. Local Authorization must be enabled.
Local Authorization (page 9-18)
The following restriction items are available:
Print Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is
prohibited.
Copy Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Duplex Restriction:
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restriction:
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction:
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.
FAX TX Restriction*2:
Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Box:
Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Memory:
Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is
prohibited.
My Panel
You can register the language selection, initial screen, and shortcut
settings for each user. Settings registered here can be applied simply
by logging in.
*1 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled.
Local Authorization (page 9-18)
9-9
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
If you selected [Send] in the Default Screen for "My Panel", select the screen to display from
[Destination], [Machine Address Book], or a registered external address book.
3
Select [Save].
A new user is added on the local user list.
NOTE
If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished
asking if you will configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, select
[Yes]. If you select [No], you will return to the user list screen.
For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to the following:
Simple Login Settings (page 9-27)
9-10
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Changing User Properties
Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.
NOTE
To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.
You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
For a user with administrator rights who logs in
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Local User List" [Add/Edit]
2
Change the user properties.
Changing user properties
1 Select the user whose properties you wish to change > [Detail]
NOTE
Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the user list.
Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by name or login user name.
2 Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
9-11
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3 [Save] > [Yes]
The user information is changed.
Deleting a user
1 Select the user to delete.
2 [Delete] > [Yes]
The selected user will be deleted.
NOTE
The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.
Changing the user information of logged in user (User Property)
These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, E-mail address,
Simple Login, and My Panel.
Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present
status.
1
Display the screen.
2
Change the user properties.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]
1 Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
Item
Description
User Name
Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters
can be entered.
Login User Name
Displays the login user name that is entered at login.
Login Password
Changes the password that is entered at login. Up to 64
characters can be entered.
Access Level
Displays the user's access level.
Maximum Password
Age
Displays the term of validity of the login password.
NOTE
This function does not appear when Password Policy is set to
[Off] or the term of validity of the password is set to [Off].
E-mail Address
Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 128 characters can
be entered.
NOTE
This function appears when Local Authorization is set to [On],
Group Authorization is set to [On], and Guest Authorization
Setting is set to [On].
9-12
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item
Authorization Rules
Description
Displays the usage restriction that is set for the logged in user.
NOTE
This function appears when Local Authorization is set to [On],
Group Authorization is set to [On], or Guest Authorization
Setting is set to [On].
[Job Accounting Rules] shows the account name set for the
logged in user and the usage restrictions that are set for that
account.
This function appears when job accounting is set to [On]. For
information on job accounting, refer to the following:
Job Accounting Access (page 9-35)
Simple Login
When simple login is enabled, changes associated settings.
NOTE
This function does not appear when Simple Login is set to [Off]
or the user is not registered in Simple Login.
ID Card Information
Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card
Authentication Kit is activated.
Optional Applications (page 11-8)
This function does not appear when the server type is set to
[Ext.] in Network Authentication, and logged in with the user
account certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server
type.
My Panel
Register the language and default screen for each user. Once
registered, the setting will be applied simply by login. Network
users are not displayed.
2 Select [Save].
The user information is changed.
9-13
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
User Login Administration for Printing
It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.
Setting Printer Driver
To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.
Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.
1
2
2 Set the User Login Administration.
[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use
the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to
type the name and password for each print job.
[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed
when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a
printing is attempted.
[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will
be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login
user name list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each
time a printing is attempted.
[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the
Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the
name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with
only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user
name and password will appear.
9-14
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3 Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN
It is possible to manage the users that scan using TWAIN.
Setting TWAIN Driver
To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then
[TWAIN Driver Setting].
2 Select the machine, and click [Edit].
2
Configure the settings.
1 Click [User Authentication Settings].
2 Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.
3 Click [OK].
9-15
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA
It is possible to manage the users that scan using WIA.
Setting WIA Driver
To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver. Instructions are based
on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners
and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
1
2
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User
Name and Password.
2
1
2 Click [OK].
9-16
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC
It is possible to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.
Setting FAX Driver
To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3 Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] window.
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.
1
2
2 Set the User Login Administration.
[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and
password to use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user
does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be
displayed when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered
each time a transmission is attempted.
3 Click [OK].
9-17
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Local Authorization
Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.
NOTE
When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentication].
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Local Authorization" [Change]
2
[Off] or [On] > [OK]
9-18
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Group Authorization Settings
Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
NOTE
To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method in
"Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
Protocol Settings (page 8-53)
Group Authorization
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Group Authorization Set." [Next] >
"Group Authorization" [Change]
2
[On] > [OK]
9-19
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Group List (Up to 20)
Register the groups that are restricted the machine usage. Other users and groups belong to "Others".
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Group Authorization Set." [Next] > "Group List" [Change]
2
Configure the settings.
[Add] > Add information on each item > [OK]
Item
Descriptions
Group ID*1
Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and
4294967295).
Group Name
Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level
Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges.
Print Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the
printer.
Copy Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Duplex Restriction
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restrict.
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX Transmission*2
Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing Restr. in Box
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document
boxes.
Storing Restr. in
Memory
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable
memory.
*1 For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows. If you
are using Windows Server 2008, check Attribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are
using Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool included on
the installation DVD for Windows Server OS (under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).
*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
9-20
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
3
Register the group.
Select [Save].
A new group is added on the group list.
9-21
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Guest Authorization Set.
When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are
allowed to use.
NOTE
• To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login
Administration".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
• Cannot be used when the Key Counter option is used.
Enabling Guest Authorization
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Guest Authorization Set." [Next] >
"Guest Authorization" [Change]
2
[On] > [OK]
NOTE
If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be
selected when logging in.
In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use
a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the
guest properties.
9-22
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Configuring Guest Property
Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Guest Authorization Set." [Next] > "Guest Property" [Next]
2
Configure the settings.
Check the settings and change or add information as needed.
Item
User Name
Descriptions
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
The default setting is "Guest User".
Access Level
The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.
Account Name
Add an account where the user belongs.
If the user does not belong to any account, select [Others].
9-23
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item
Authorization
Rules
Descriptions
Set usage authority for each user.
The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Print Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is
prohibited.
Copy Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Duplex Restriction:
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restrict.:
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction:
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.
FAX TX Restriction*1:
Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Box:
Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Memory:
Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function
is prohibited.
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
3
Register the group.
Select [Save].
9-24
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Obtain NW User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail
address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of
E-mail.
NOTE
To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
Protocol Settings (page 8-53)
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 [User Login Setting] > [Obtain NW User Property] > [On]
2
Configure the settings.
[On] > Add information on each item > [OK]
Item
Descriptions
Server Name*1
Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64
characters). If a server name is not entered, user information will
be acquired from the server set for Network Authentication.
Port
Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is 389.
Name 1*2
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed
from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Name 2*3
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed
from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
E-mail Address*4
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from the
LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Authentic at Type*5
Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After
changing the setting, restart the system or turn the power off and
then on.
9-25
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item
Descriptions
Search Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5
to 255 seconds).
LDAP Security
Select the type of encryption according to the type of security
employed by the LDAP server. The value is [Off], [SSL/TLS] or
[STARTTLS].
*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server
name entered in the network authentication.
*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".
*3 "Name 2" can be left out. When you assign displayName in "Name 1" and department in
"Name 2", and if the value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is
"Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as "Mike Smith Sales".
*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.
*5 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".
9-26
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Simple Login Settings
The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to
use this functionality.
NOTE
• For user registration, refer to the following:
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
• To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
• When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.
Enabling Simple Login
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Simple Login Settings" [Next] > "Simple Login" [Change]
2
[On] or [Off] > [OK]
9-27
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Simple Login Key
Register users to use simple login. You can add up to 20 users.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Simple Login Settings" [Next] > "Simple Login Key" [Next]
2
Enter the user information.
1 Select the key to which you want to register a user.
2 Select [Add/Edit].
3 "Display Name" [Change] > Enter the user name to be displayed > [OK]
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
4 Select "User" [Change].
5 To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users,
select [Network User].
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
Specifying the user from local users
Select the user to be set for simple login.
NOTE
• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
• Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
9-28
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Specifying the user from network users
Simple Login Key:
- User
Enter login user name and password.
Domain:
User
Name
Login
User Name
domain 1
0099
# Keys
Login
Password
**********
# Keys
Cancel
Back
OK
m0310502
Status
Select [Login User Name] and [Login Password], enter the information of the user to be
registered, and select [OK].
If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the
"Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
6 "Password" [Change] > [On] or [Off] > [OK] > "Icon" [Change]
7 Select the user icon to be displayed and select [OK].
3
Register the user.
Select [Save].
9-29
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
ID Card Settings
If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.
NOTE
This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated.
Optional Applications (page 11-8)
This function does not appear when the user logs in as a network authentication user.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "ID Card Settings" [Next]
2
Configure the settings.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
Keyboard Login
Descriptions
When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not
login by keyboard is allowed.
Value: Permit, Prohibit
Additional
Authentication*1
Select whether or not to require password entry after
authenticating by ID card.
Value: Off, Use Password, Use PIN
*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in
"Network Authentication".
9-30
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
PIN Code Authorization
NOTE
When using PIN Code Authorization, the network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for
server type.
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "PIN Code Authorization" [Change]
2
[Off] or [On] > [OK]
9-31
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration
Using User Login Administration
This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use
this machine.
Login
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:
Login (page 2-27)
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user name and login
password entry screen.
9-32
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting
Overview of Job Accounting
Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each
account.
1
Enable job
accounting.
(page 9-34)
2
Setting an account.
(page 9-36)
3
Enter the assigned account
ID when performing the job.
(page 9-32)
4
Count the number of pages
copied, printed, scanned and
faxed.
A: 00000001
100
400
200
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs
Printed from a PC
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the
printer driver on the PC.
1
Set Job Accounting for the
PC on the network by
using the printer driver.
(page 9-41)
2
Execute printing.
A: 00000001
100
B: 00000002
3
400
200
Count the number of
pages printed.
C: 00000003
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN
To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-42)
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA
To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 9-43)
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver
on the PC.
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 9-44)
The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
9-33
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
Enabling Job Accounting
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting" [Change]
2
Configure the settings.
[On] > [OK]
NOTE
• To disable job accounting, select [Off].
• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed
and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the
Account ID.
9-34
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
Job Accounting Access
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 [Job Accounting Settings] > [Job Accounting Access]
2
Configure the settings.
[Local] or [Network] > [OK]
NOTE
To select [Network], network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected
for server type.
9-35
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting (Local)
You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.
Adding an Account
Up to 1000 individual accounts can be added. The following entries are required.
Item
Descriptions
Account Name
Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID
Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
Restriction
This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load.
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-38)
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Accounting List"
[Add/Edit] > [Add]
2
Enter the account information.
1 "Account Name" [Change] > Enter the account name > [OK]
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
2 "Account ID" [Change] > Enter the account ID > [OK]
NOTE
Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
3 Activate or deactivate restriction.
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-38)
9-36
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
4 Select [Save].
A new account is added on the Account List.
9-37
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Print Count".
Copy/Printer Count (page 9-52)
Restriction Items
"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count "Split" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Descriptions
Copy Restriction (Total)
Limits the number of sheets used for copying.
Print Restriction (Total)
Limits the number of sheets used for printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed when the
optional FAX Kit is installed.
FAX Port Restriction
Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX
Kits are installed.
"Total" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Descriptions
Print Restriction (Total)
Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed only on products
with the fax function installed.
FAX Port Restriction
Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX
Kits are installed.
IMPORTANT
Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the "FAX Port Restriction" setting.
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in the following modes:
Item
Descriptions
Off
No restriction is applied.
Counter Limit
Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage
Restriction is applied.
9-38
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Editing an Account
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Accounting List"
[Add/Edit]
2
Edit an account.
1 Select [Detail] for the account name you wish to edit.
NOTE
• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
• Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
2 Select the account information to be changed and change the account information.
3 [Save] > [Yes]
The account information is changed.
9-39
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Deleting an Account
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] >
"Accounting List" [Add/Edit]
2
Delete an account.
1 Select the account name you wish to delete.
2 [Delete] > [Yes]
The account is deleted.
9-40
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting for Printing
The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting Printer Driver
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by
using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.
1
2
2 Set the Account ID.
[Use specific account ID]: Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the
entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID
for each print job.
[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when
attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be
displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to
be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID
to be used needs to be selected from the list.
[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID]: When printing, the Windows
user name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is
registered. If the Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will
appear.
9-41
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
3 Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN
The number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting TWAIN Driver
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the
TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then
[TWAIN Driver Setting].
2 Select the machine, click [Edit].
2
Configure the settings.
1 Click [User Authentication Settings].
2 Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.
3 Click [OK].
9-42
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA
The number of jobs scanned by using WIA can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting WIA Driver
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA
Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners
and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
1
2
2
Configure WIA Driver.
1 Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.
1
2
2 Click [OK].
9-43
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a
Computer
The number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.
NOTE
FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.
Setting FAX Driver
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using
the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select
[Printing preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.
3 Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.
1
2
2 Set the Job Accounting.
[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the
same Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to
enter the Account ID for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when
attempting a transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is
attempted.
3 Click [OK].
9-44
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Configuring Job Accounting
Default Setting
Select the default value for usage limit, and whether or not to enable counting by paper size.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Default Setting"
[Next] > "Default Counter Limit" [Next]
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select [Change] for the item you want to modify and then select [+], [-] or use the numeric
keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets.
2 Select [OK].
Item
Counter Limit
Description
When you add a new account, you can change the default
restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any
number from 1 to 9,999,999.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether
[Individual] or [Total] is selected for [Copy/Printer Count].
Copy/Printer Count (page 9-52)
[Individual] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Copy Restriction
(Total)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
copying.
Print Restriction
(Total)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
printing.
Scan Restriction
(Others)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction*1
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
sending faxes.
9-45
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Item
Description
[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Print Restriction
(Total)
Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets
used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction
(Others)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction*1
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
sending faxes.
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
Count by Paper Size
This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).
NOTE
Paper size is available in five types, 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports.
Print Accounting Report (page 9-49)
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If you do not
specify the media type, the number of used sheets will be counted for the specified sheet size, regardless of the media
type.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting
Settings" [Next]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Default Setting" [Next] > "Count by Paper Size" [Next] >
"Paper Size 1 (to 5)" [Change]
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select [On].
2 Select the paper size.
3 Select [Media Type] to specify media type.
4 Select the media type and select [OK].
9-46
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
5 Select [OK].
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A
new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting
Settings" [Next]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Total Job Accounting" [Next] or "Each Job Accounting"
[Check]
2
Configure the settings.
The table below lists the item you can view.
Item
Printed Pages
Descriptions
Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total
number of pages used. You can also use [FAX]*1, [Count by
Paper Size], [by Duplex] and [by Combine] to check the
number of pages used.
Copy (B & W)
Displays the number of pages used for black and white
copying.
Printer (B & W)
Displays the number of pages used for black and white
printing.
Copy/Printer (B/W)
Displays the total number of pages used for black-and-white
copying and printing.
FAX*1
Displays the number of pages received.
Total
Displays the total number of pages used.
Count by Paper Size
Displays the number of pages used in the selected paper size
as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes.
Count by Duplex/
Combine
Displays the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode,
Duplex (2-sided) mode and the total for both, as well as the
pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2in1) mode,
Combine (4in1) mode and the total for all three.
9-47
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Item
Descriptions
Scanned Pages
Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing and
other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.
FAX TX Pages*1
Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX TX Time*1
Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions.
Counter Reset
Resets the counter.
Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
Total Accounting
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.
1
Check the number of pages.
1
Select [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
2
Confirm the count and select [Close].
Each Job Account
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job
Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.
1
Check the number of pages.
1
Select the account to check the count.
2
Select [Detail].
NOTE
• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account names.
• Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID. To
display an account other than your own account, select [Other Account].
3 Select [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
4 Confirm the count and select [Close].
9-48
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Print Accounting Report
The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count.
ACCOUNT. REPORT
Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.
1
Prepare paper.
2
Display the screen.
Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
3
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
Print the report.
[Print Accounting Report] > [Yes]
Accounting report is printed.
9-49
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting
Using Job Accounting
This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Login
1 In the account ID entry screen, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and select
[Login].
NOTE
• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID
again.
• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound
and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.
• By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the
number of pages scanned.
When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password
appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the
account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.
9-50
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Apply Limit
Apply Limit
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below
describes the action taken.
Item
Descriptions
Immediately*1
Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently
Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will
be rejected.
Alert Only
Job continues while displaying an alert message.
*1 The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting
Settings" [Next]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 Select "Apply Limit" [Change].
2
Login Password
Configure the settings.
Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only] > [OK]
9-51
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Copy/Printer Count
Copy/Printer Count
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and
printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. For details, refer to the
following:
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-38)
Counting the Number of Pages Printed (page 9-47)
Print Accounting Report (page 9-49)
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting
Settings" [Next]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 Select "Copy/Printer Count" [Change].
2
Login Password
Configure the settings.
Select [Total] or [Individual] > [OK]
9-52
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings
Unknown User Settings
Unknown ID Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User
Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
The setting items are as follows.
Item
Descriptions
Permit
The job is permitted to be printed.
Reject
The job is rejected (not printed).
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "Unknown User Setting" [Next] > [Unknown ID Job].
2
Login Password
Configure the settings.
Select [Permit] or [Reject].
9-53
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings
Registering Information for a User whose ID is
Unknown
If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job
History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].
1
Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 "Unknown User Setting" [Next] > [User Property].
2
Enter the user information.
Enter the user information > [OK]
Item
Descriptions
User Name
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Account Name
Register an account for a user whose ID is unknown.
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)
NOTE
Authorization Rules
•
Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
•
Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account
name or account ID.
Set usage authority.
The following restriction items are available:
Print Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is
prohibited.
9-54
10
Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the following topics:
Remove any jammed paper in Right
Cover 1 ........................................... 10-67
Remove any jammed paper in Right
Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) .................... 10-71
Remove any jammed paper in Right
Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ................. 10-72
Remove any jammed paper in the
Bridge Unit ...................................... 10-74
Remove any jammed paper in the
Mailbox ........................................... 10-75
Remove any jammed paper in the
Inner Finisher .................................. 10-76
Remove any jammed paper in the
Document Processor (Reverse
Automatic) ....................................... 10-77
Remove any jammed paper in the
Document Processor (Dual Scan) .. 10-79
Remove any jammed paper in the
1,000-Sheet Finisher ...................... 10-80
Remove any jammed paper in the
4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) ........... 10-83
Remove any jammed paper in the
4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) ......... 10-84
Remove any jammed paper in the
4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) ......... 10-88
Remove any jammed paper in the
Folding Unit ..................................... 10-91
Remove any jammed paper in the
Folding Tray .................................... 10-96
Clearing a Staple Jam ............................. 10-101
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Inner
Finisher ......................................... 10-101
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000Sheet Finisher ............................... 10-103
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 4,000Sheet Finisher ............................... 10-106
Clearing a Staple Jam of the
Folding Unit ................................... 10-108
Regular Maintenance .................................. 10-2
Cleaning ............................................ 10-2
Cleaning Glass Platen ...................... 10-2
Cleaning inside of the Document
Processor .......................................... 10-2
Cleaning Slit Grass ........................... 10-3
Toner Container Replacement .......... 10-4
Replace the Waste Toner Box .......... 10-7
Loading Paper .................................. 10-9
Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher) .. 10-10
Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet
Finisher) .......................................... 10-12
Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet
Finisher) .......................................... 10-13
Replacing Staples (Folding Unit) ..... 10-15
Disposing of the Punch Waste ........ 10-17
Troubleshooting ........................................ 10-23
Solving Malfunctions ....................... 10-23
Machine Operation Trouble ............ 10-23
Printed Image Trouble .................... 10-28
Responding to Messages ............... 10-30
Adjustment/Maintenance .......................... 10-46
Overview of Adjustment/
Maintenance ................................... 10-46
Tone Curve Adjustment .................. 10-46
Drum Refresh ................................. 10-48
Calibration ....................................... 10-48
Laser Scanner Cleaning ................. 10-48
Developer Refresh .......................... 10-49
Clearing Paper Jams ................................ 10-50
Jam Location Indicators .................. 10-50
Remove any jammed paper in
Cassette 1 ....................................... 10-51
Remove any jammed paper in
Cassette 2 ....................................... 10-54
Remove any jammed paper in
Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) ..... 10-57
Remove any jammed paper in
Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-59
Remove any jammed paper in
Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-61
Remove any jammed paper in
Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) ................ 10-64
Remove any jammed paper in the
Multi Purpose Tray .......................... 10-66
10-1
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.
CAUTION
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Cleaning Glass Platen
Wipe the backside of the original cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth
dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
Cleaning inside of the Document Processor
When using the document processor that features dual scanning, clean the dual scanning unit with the supplied
cleaning cloth.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
1
Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment.
10-2
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
2
Clean inside of the document processor.
Cleaning Slit Grass
When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the supplied cleaning cloth.
IMPORTANT
Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
NOTE
Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
1
Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment.
2
Clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide.
10-3
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Toner Container Replacement
When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed.
"Toner is empty."
When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for
replacement.
"Toner is low. (Replace when empty.)"
NOTE
• For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine may
cause image defects and product failure.
• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer
convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new
products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is
only used anonymously for the above purposes.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
1
Open the front cover.
NOTE
If you close the toner container cover before replacing the container, select [Open Toner
Container Cover].
2
Remove the toner container.
10-4
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
3
Put used toner container into the plastic waste bag.
4
Remove the new toner container from the box.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the points shown below.
5
Tap the toner container.
5~6
6
5~6
Shake the toner container.
5~6
5~6
5~6
10-5
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
7
Install the toner container.
IMPORTANT
Insert the toner container all the way.
CLICK!
8
Close the toner container cover.
9
Close the front cover.
NOTE
• If the toner container cover or front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.
• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
10-6
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Replace the Waste Toner Box
When the waste toner box is full, the following message will be displayed. Immediately replace the waste toner box.
"Waste toner box is full."
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
1
Open the waste toner box cover.
2
Remove the Waste Toner Box.
3
Put used Waste Toner Box into the plastic waste bag.
4
Remove the new Waste Toner Box.
10-7
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
5
Install the Waste Toner Box.
CLICK!
6
Close the waste toner box cover.
NOTE
Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected waste toner box will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
10-8
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Loading Paper
When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.
"Add paper in cassette #."
"Add paper in Multi Purpose tray."
Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)
Loading in Cassette 2 (page 3-7)
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray (page 5-6)
NOTE
If [Show Paper Setup Message] is set to [On], the confirmation screen for the paper setting will be displayed when a
new paper is set. If a paper is changed, select [Change] and then change the settings of the paper.
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
10-9
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher)
When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to
be replenished with staples.
"Staple is empty."
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
1
Open the inner finisher unit.
2
Open the staple cover.
3
Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.
10-10
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
4
Replace the staples.
1
2
1
5
Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.
6
Return the staple cover to the original position.
7
Return the unit to the original position.
10-11
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher)
When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to
be replenished with staples.
"Staple is empty."
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
1
Open the finisher front cover.
2
Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.
3
Replace the staples.
1
2
1
10-12
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
4
Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.
5
Close the cover.
Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher)
When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to
be replenished with staples.
"Staple is empty."
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
1
Open the finisher front cover 1.
10-13
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
2
Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).
3
Replace the staples.
1
2
1
4
Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).
5
Close the cover.
10-14
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Replacing Staples (Folding Unit)
When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to
be replenished with staples.
"Staple is empty."
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
1
Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.
2
Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).
C
B
3
Replace the staples.
2
1
2
1
1
1
10-15
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
4
Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).
5
Close the covers.
10-16
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Disposing of the Punch Waste
When the waste punch box is full, the following messages will be displayed. Empty the punch waste box.
"Empty the punch waste box."
Leave the power switch on the machine switched ON while performing this procedure.
Inner Finisher
1
Open the inner finisher unit.
2
Remove the Punch Waste Box.
NOTE
Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.
10-17
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
3
Empty the Punch Waste Box.
4
Install the Punch Waste Box.
5
Return the unit to the original position.
10-18
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
1,000-Sheet Finisher
1
Open the finisher front cover.
2
Remove the Punch Waste Box.
NOTE
Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.
3
Empty the Punch Waste Box.
10-19
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
4
Install the Punch Waste Box.
5
Close the cover.
4,000-Sheet Finisher
1
Open the finisher front cover 1.
10-20
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
2
Remove the Punch Waste Box.
NOTE
Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.
3
Empty the Punch Waste Box.
4
Install the Punch Waste Box.
10-21
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
5
Close the cover.
10-22
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following
pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.
To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Display for Device Information (page 2-18)
Machine Operation Trouble
When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.
Symptom
Reference
Page
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
An application does not
start.
Is the Auto Panel Reset time short?
Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30
seconds or more.
page 8-67
The screen does not
respond when the power
switch is turned on.
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC
outlet.
―
Is the machine powered on?
Turn on the main power switch.
page 2-2
Is there a message on the screen?
Determine the appropriate response
to the message and respond
accordingly.
page 10-30
Is the machine in Sleep mode?
Select any key on the operation
panel to recover the machine from
Sleep mode.
page 2-39
Are the originals loaded correctly?
When placing originals on the
platen, place them face-down and
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
page 5-2
When placing originals in the
document processor, place them
face-up.
page 5-3
Check that the settings of the
application software.
―
Pressing the [Start] key
does not produce copies.
Blank sheets are ejected.
―
10-23
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Symptom
Paper often jams.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Is the paper loaded correctly?
Load the paper correctly.
page 3-4
―
Turn the orientation 180 degrees
around in which the paper is
positioned.
page 3-4
Is the paper of the supported type?
Is it in good condition?
Remove the paper, turn it over, and
reload it.
page 3-4
Is the paper curled, folded or
wrinkled?
Replace the paper with new paper.
page 3-4
Are there any loose scraps or
jammed paper in the machine?
Remove any jammed paper.
page 10-50
2 or more sheets are
overlaps when ejected.
(multi feed)
―
Load the paper correctly.
page 3-2
Printouts are wrinkled.
Is the paper loaded correctly?
Load the paper correctly.
page 3-4
―
Turn the orientation 180 degrees
around in which the paper is
positioned.
page 3-4
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
page 3-4
Printouts are curled.
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
page 3-4
Printer driver cannot be
installed.
Is the driver installed with the host
name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct
function is available?
Specify the IP address instead of
the host name.
page 2-47
10-24
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Symptom
Cannot print.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC
outlet.
―
Is the machine powered on?
Turn on the main power switch.
page 2-2
Are the USB cable and network
cable connected?
Connect the correct USB cable and
network cable securely.
page 2-7
Is the print job paused?
Resume printing.
page 7-11
When the wired or Wi-Fi network is
configured using the name
resolution, does the IP address
(private address) of the other
network which can not access
coexists?
The number of host name and
domain name which can be used
with the machine is one
respectively. Configure the network
under this restriction.
―
Change the settings of name
resolution such as NetBEUI and
DNS, or network environment
settings.
Command
Center RX
User
Guide
Select Wi-Fi, Wired Network or
Optional Network as an unlimiteduse network on Primary Network
(Client).
page 8-60
Set to [Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi]
either one of [On], and set the other
setting to [Off].
page 8-53
Cannot print with USB
memory.
Is the USB host blocked?
Select [Unblock] in the USB host
settings.
page 8-61
USB memory not
recognized.
―
Check that the USB memory is
securely plugged into the machine.
―
While "Auto-IP" is already
set to [On], the IP
address is not assigned
automatically.
Is a value other than "0.0.0.0"
entered for the link local address of
TCP/IP(v4)?
Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of
TCP/IP(v4).
page 2-30
10-25
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Symptom
Cannot send via SMB.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Is the network cable connected?
Connect the correct network cable
securely.
page 2-7
Have the network settings for the
equipment been configured
properly?
Configure the TCP/IP settings
properly.
page 8-47
Have the folder sharing settings
been configured properly?
Check sharing settings and access
privileges under the folder
properties.
page 3-22
Is the selected interface selected as
the Primary Network?
Specify the host name or IP address
of the interface selected as the
Primary Network, or set the
interface to be used again.
page 8-60
Has the SMB protocol been set to
[On]?
Set the SMB protocol setting to
[On].
page 8-53
Has [Host Name] been entered
properly? *1
Check the name of the computer to
which data is being sent.
page 5-24
Has [Path] been entered properly?
Check the share name for the
shared folder.
page 5-24
Has [Login User Name] been
entered properly? *1 *2
Check the domain name and login
user name.
page 5-24
Has the same domain name been
used for [Host Name] and [Login
User Name]?
Delete the domain name and
backslash
("/") from [Login User Name].
page 5-24
Has [Login Password] been
entered properly?
Check the login password.
page 5-24
Have exceptions for Windows
Firewall been configured properly?
Configure exceptions for Windows
Firewall properly.
page 3-25
Do the time settings for the
equipment, domain server, and data
destination computer differ?
Set the equipment, domain server,
and data destination computer to
the same time.
―
Is the screen displaying Send error?
Refer to Responding to Send Error.
page 10-42
Cannot connect to this
machine by using Wi-Fi
Direct.
Are three handheld devices
connected simultaneously?
Release the connection of handheld
devices being connected manually
or set a connection after setting the
connection time and releasing the
connection by automatic
disconnection.
page 8-49
Cannot send via the email.
Is the E-mail send size limit set in
the SMTP server registered on the
machine?
Check the limit value is entered to
"E-mail Size Limit" of [E-mail]
setting in Command Center RX and
change the value as necessary.
page 2-65
10-26
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
The machine is emitting
steam in the area around
the paper ejection slot.
Check the room temperature to see
if it is low, or if damp paper was
used.
Depending on the printing
environment and the paper's
condition, the heat generated during
printing will cause the moisture in
the paper to evaporate, and the
steam emitted may look like smoke.
This is not a problem, and you can
continue printing. If the steam
concerns you, raise the room
temperature, or replace the paper
with a newer, dryer paper.
*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
10-27
Reference
Page
―
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed Image Trouble
When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.
Symptom
Printouts are totally too
light.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
page 3-2
Have you changed the density?
Select appropriate density level.
page 6-31
page 8-70
Is EcoPrint mode enabled?
Disable [EcoPrint] mode.
page 8-19
―
Run [Developer Refresh].
page 10-49
―
Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning].
page 10-48
―
Make sure the paper type setting is
correct for the paper being used.
page 8-15
Copies have a moire
pattern (dots grouped
together in patterns and
not aligned uniformly).
Is the original a printed photograph?
Set the original image to
[Printer Output] or [Book/
Magazine] in [Photo].
page 6-31
Texts are not clearly
printed.
Did you choose appropriate image
quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality.
page 6-31
Black dots appear on the
white background when
white original is scanned.
Is the original holder or the glass
platen dirty?
Clean the original holder or the
glass platen.
page 10-2
―
Run [Developer Refresh].
page 10-49
Printouts are fuzzy.
Is the device used in an
environment with high humidity or
where the temperature or humidity
changes suddenly?
Use in an environment that has
suitable humidity.
―
Set [Drum Heater] to [On].
page 8-70
―
Run [Drum Refresh].
page 10-48
Printouts are cut off.
10-28
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Symptom
Images are skewed.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
When placing originals on the platen,
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
page 5-2
When placing originals in the
document processor, align the
original width guides securely before
placing the originals.
page 5-3
Is the paper loaded correctly?
Check the position of the paper
width guides.
page 3-4
Printouts have vertical
lines.
Is the slit glass dirty?
Clean the slit glass.
page 10-3
―
Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning].
page 10-48
Dirt on the top edge or
back of the paper.
Is the interior of the machine dirty?
Open the right cover. If the machine
interior is dirty with toner, clean it
using soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
page 10-2
Part of the image is
periodically faint or shows
white lines.
―
Open and then close the right cover.
―
―
Run [Drum Refresh].
page 10-48
―
Run [Developer Refresh].
page 10-49
―
Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to
[On].
page 6-34
Print on the back of the
sheet is visible on the
front.
Are the originals placed correctly?
Reference
Page
10-29
page 8-18
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Responding to Messages
If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Display for Device Information (page 2-18)
A
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Acceptable fold count
exceeded.
Is the acceptable number of
sheets exceeded?
Select [Continue] to print using
Fold per acceptable number of
sheets. Select [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
—
Acceptable staple
count exceeded.*1
Is the acceptable number of
sheets exceeded?
Select [Continue] to print
without using Staple. Select
[Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Access point was not
detected.
―
Check if the access point has
been set correctly.
―
Activation error.
―
Failed to activate the
application. Contact
administrator.
―
―
Expansion Authentication is
disabled. Turn the power switch
off and on. If the error exists,
contact administrator.
―
Is the indicated cassette out of
paper?
Load paper.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
page 3-2
Are five or less envelopes
loaded in the cassette?
Pull the cassette and loosen the
paper length and width guides
slightly.
―
Add paper in Multi
Purpose tray.
Is the paper of the selected size
loaded in the multi purpose
tray?
Load paper.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
page 5-6
Adjusting Scanner.
—
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its
quality. Please wait.
—
Add paper in cassette
#.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
10-30
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
B
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Box is not found.
—
The specified box cannot be
found. Job is canceled. Select
[End].
—
Box limit exceeded.*1
Is [End] displayed on the
screen?
The specified box is full, and no
further storage is available. Job
is canceled. Select [End]. Try to
perform the job again after
printing or deleting data from the
box.
—
—
Repeat Copy box is full, and no
further repeat copy is available.
Select [Continue] to print
scanned pages. Select [Cancel]
to cancel the job.
—
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
C
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Calibrating...
―
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its
quality. Please wait.
―
Cannot Banner Print.
―
System stamp is set up.
―
Banner print cannot be carried
out.
Job is canceled. Select [End].
Cannot connect.
Cannot connect to
Authentication
Server.*1
―
This appears when the Wi-Fi or
Wi-Fi Direct connection did not
complete. Check the settings,
and check the signal conditions.
page 8-49
page 8-49
—
Set machine time to match the
server’s time.
page 2-29
—
Check the domain name.
page 9-2
—
Check the host name.
page 9-2
—
Check the connection status
with the server.
—
Cannot connect to
Server.
—
Check the connection status
with the server.
—
Cannot duplex print
on this paper.*1
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be duplex printed?
If the selected paper is not
changed and [Continue] is
selected, duplex is released.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
page 6-46
10-31
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Cannot find the
destination computer.
Check the computer.
Checkpoints
Is the machine and the PC to
which the scanned image is to
be sent connected to the
network?
Is the account information (user
ID, password) used to access
the shared folder to which the
scanned image is to be sent
incorrect?
Corrective Actions
Check the network and SMB
settings.
•
The network cable is
connected.
•
The hub is not operating
properly.
•
The server is not operating
properly.
•
Host name and IP address
•
Port number
Check the following settings of
the PC to which the scanned
image is to be sent.
•
Host name
•
Path
•
Login user name
Reference
Page
page 2-6
—
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user,
specify the domain name.
[Login User ID]@[Domain
Name]
Example: sa720XXXX@km
Cannot fold this
paper.
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be folded?
•
Login password
•
Folder share permissions of
the recipient
If the selected paper is not
changed and [Continue] is
selected, fold is released.
page 6-24
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot offset this
paper.*1
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be offset?
If the selected paper is not
changed and [Continue] is
selected, offset is released.
page 6-25
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot perform
remote printing.
—
Remote printing is prohibited.
The job is canceled. Select
[End].
page 8-30
Cannot print the
specified number of
copies.*1
—
Only one copy is available.
Select [Continue] to continue
printing. Select [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
—
Cannot process this
job.*1
―
Restricted by Authorization
settings. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
―
―
Restricted by Job Accounting.
The job is canceled. Select
[End].
page 9-34
10-32
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Cannot punch at the
specified position.
Checkpoints
Have you selected a position
that cannot be punched?
Corrective Actions
If the selected paper is not
changed and [Continue] is
selected, punch is released.
Reference
Page
page 6-28
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot punch this
paper.
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be punched?
If the selected paper is not
changed and [Continue] is
selected, punch is released.
page 6-28
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot staple at the
specified position.
Have you selected a position
that cannot be stapled?
If the selected paper is not
changed and [Continue] is
selected, staple is released.
page 6-26
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot staple this
paper.*1
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be stapled?
If the selected paper is not
changed and [Continue] is
selected, staple is released.
page 6-26
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot use ##### due
to a failure.
―
Call service.
―
Checking the waste
toner box.
Is the waste toner box full?
Replace the toner container.
Reuse the black (K) toner
container as a waste toner box.
Handle the color toner
containers according to the
instructions supplied with them.
―
####
Select [Next]. The instructions
will be displayed.
NOTE
If you select [Open Toner
Container Cover], you can
open the Toner Container Cover
that you closed accidentally.
Check the document
processor.
Is the top cover of the document
processor open?
Close the document processor
cover.
―
Is the document processor
open?
Close the document processor.
―
Check the paper in the
multi purpose tray.
—
The paper size is different. Set
selected size paper and select
[Continue].
page 5-6
Check the side feeder.
—
The side feeder is not installed
correctly. Attach the side feeder.
―
10-33
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Check the toner
container.
Checkpoints
—
Corrective Actions
Open the main unit front cover
and remove the toner container.
Shake carefully and replace.
Reference
Page
―
NOTE
If you select [Open Toner
Container Cover], you can
open the Toner Container Cover
that you closed accidentally.
Confidential
document was
detected.
—
The machine detects the
document guard pattern. Job is
canceled. Select [End].
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
E
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Empty the punch
waste box.
Is the punch waste box full?
Follow the instructions on the
screen. and empty the punch
waste box.
page 10-17
Error occurred at
cassette #.
―
Open the cassette. Check inside
the machine and remove the
paper.
―
F
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Failed to specify Job
Accounting.*1
—
Failed to specify Job Accounting
when processing the job
externally. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
—
Failed to store job
retention data.
—
The job is canceled. Select
[End].
—
FAX box limit
exceeded.
—
Follow the instructions on the
screen and delete documents
from the FAX box to make room
for FAX reception.
FAX
Operation
Guide
To check the canceled job,
select the [Status/Job Cancel]
key and then [Printing Jobs] to
check receipt result.
Finisher tray is full of
paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
10-34
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Folding tray is full of
paper.
Checkpoints
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Corrective Actions
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
Reference
Page
—
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
H
Message
Hard Disk error.
Checkpoints
—
Corrective Actions
An error has occurred on the
hard disk. Job is canceled.
Select [End].
Reference
Page
—
The possible error codes and
their descriptions are as follows.
01: The amount of data that can
be saved at once has been
exceeded. Restart the system or
turn the power OFF/ON. If the
error still occurs, divide the file
into smaller files.
If the error occurs after the file is
divided, the hard disk is
damaged. Execute [System
Initialization].
04: Insufficient space on the
hard disk to complete this
operation. Move data or delete
unneeded data.
Hard disk failure. Call
service.
—
Call service.
—
I
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Incorrect account
ID.*1
—
The account ID was incorrect
when processing the job
externally. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
—
Incorrect box
password.
—
The box password was incorrect
when processing the job
externally. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
—
Incorrect Login User
Name or Password.*1
—
The login user name or
password was incorrect when
processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Select
[End].
—
10-35
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Install the punch
waste box.
—
Follow the instructions on the
screen. and install the punch
waste box.
page 10-17
Install the waste toner
box.
—
The waste toner box is not
installed correctly. Set it
correctly.
page 10-7
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
J
Message
Reference
Page
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Job Accounting
restriction
exceeded.*1
Is the acceptable printing count
restricted by Job Accounting
exceeded?
The printing count exceeded the
acceptable count restricted by
Job Accounting. Cannot print
any more. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
—
Job separator tray is
full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper and select
[Continue]. Printing then
resumes.
—
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
K
Message
KPDL error. *1
Checkpoints
―
Corrective Actions
PostScript error has occurred.
The job is canceled. Select
[End].
Reference
Page
―
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
M
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Machine failure.
—
Internal error has occurred.
Make a note of the error code
displayed on the screen. Call
service.
—
Mailbox tray is full of
paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
10-36
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Maximum number of
scanned pages.
Is the acceptable scanning
count exceeded?
Cannot scan pages any more.
Follow the instructions on the
screen.
—
Memory is full.*1
—
The memory is full and the job
cannot be continued. Select
[Continue] to print the scanned
pages. The print job cannot be
processed completely. Select
[Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
When insufficient memory
occurred frequently, contact
your dealer or service
representative.
—
The process cannot be
performed due to insufficient
memory. If only [End] is
available, select [End]. The job
will be canceled.
—
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
N
Message
Non-genuine toner
installed.
Checkpoints
Is the installed toner container
our own brand?
Corrective Actions
We will not be liable for any
damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this
machine.
Reference
Page
—
P
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Paper jam.
―
If a paper jam occurs, the
machine will stop and the
location of the jam will be
indicated on the screen. Leave
the machine on and follow the
instructions to remove the
jammed paper.
page 10-50
Paper left.
—
Remove paper from the
document finisher.
—
—
Remove paper from the finisher
process tray.
—
—
Remove paper from the finisher
tray.
—
10-37
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Performing Drum
Refresh...
—
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its
quality. Please wait.
—
Perform Tone Curve
Adjustment in the
System Menu.
Over long periods of use, the
effects of the ambient
temperature and humidity can
cause output hues to vary
slightly.
Run [Tone Curve Adjustment].
page 10-46
Preparing to print.
—
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its
quality. Please wait.
—
R
Message
Removable memory
error.*1
Checkpoints
Is writing to a removable
memory prohibited?
Corrective Actions
An error occurred in the
removable memory. The job
stopped. Select [End].
Reference
Page
―
The possible error codes and
their descriptions are as follows.
01: Connect a removable
memory that can be written to.
―
An error occurred in the
removable memory. The job
stopped. Select [End].
page 5-65
The possible error codes and
their descriptions are as follows.
01: The amount of data that can
be saved at once has been
exceeded. Restart the system or
turn the power OFF/ON. If the
error still occurs, the removable
memory is not compatible with
the machine. Use the removable
memory formatted by this
machine. If the removable
memory cannot be formatted, it
is damaged. Connect a
compatible removable memory.
Removable Memory is
full.*1
―
The job is canceled. Select
[End].
―
Insufficient free space in the
removable memory. Delete
unneeded files.
Remove originals in
the document
processor.
Are there any originals left in the
document processor?
10-38
Remove originals from the
document processor.
―
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Replace all originals
and press [Continue].
—
Remove originals from the
document processor, put them
back in their original order, and
place them again. Select
[Continue] to resume printing.
Select [Cancel] to cancel the
job.
—
Replace the waste
toner box.
Is the waste toner box full?
Replace the waste toner box.
page 10-7
Running security
function...
—
Running security function.
Please wait.
—
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
S
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Scanner memory is
full.*1
—
Scanning cannot be performed
due to insufficient memory of the
scanner. Follow the instructions
on the screen.
—
Scheduled sending
jobs exceeded.
—
The number of jobs has
exceeded the limit set for
delayed transmission. Select
[End]. The job is canceled.
—
Wait until the delayed
transmission is executed, or
cancel the delayed transmission
and then perform the job again.
Send Error.*1
—
An error has occurred during
transmission. The job is
canceled. Select [End]. Refer to
Responding to Send Error for
the error code and corrective
actions.
page 10-42
Staple is empty. *1
Has the staple cartridge holder
run out of staples?
If the staples are depleted, the
machine will stop and the
location of staple depletion will
be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and
follow the instructions to replace
the staple case. Select
[Continue] to print without
stapling. Select [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
page 10-10
Staple is empty.
(Manual Staple)
Has staple cartridge holder A
run out of staples?
10-39
Add staples to staple cartridge
holder A.
page 10-12
page 10-13
page 10-15
page 10-13
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Staple jam.
—
If a staple jam occurs, the
machine will stop and the
location of the jam will be
indicated on the screen. Leave
the machine on and follow the
instructions to remove the
jammed staple.
page 10101
System error.
—
System error has occurred.
Follow the instructions on the
screen.
—
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-66)
T
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Regulating the
temperature…
―
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its
quality. Please wait.
―
The cover is open.
Is there any cover which is
open?
Close the cover indicated on the
screen.
―
The device cannot be
connected because
allowed connections
would be exceeded.
―
Cancel a connection to a
portable device that is not being
used, or set the machine's auto
disconnect time to break
portable device connections.
page 8-49
The folding unit is
open.
―
Close the folding unit.
―
The password does
not meet password
policy.
Is the password expired?
Change the login password.
page 9-7
The job is canceled. Select
[End].
page 9-8
Is the password policy
requirement (such as password
length or required characters)
changed?
Confirm the password policy
requirements and change the
login password.
page 9-7
The phone receiver is
off the hook.
―
Put down the receiver.
―
The removable
memory is not
formatted.
Is the removable memory
formatted by this machine?
Perform [Format] on this
machine.
―
The slit glass requires
cleaning.
—
Clean the slit glass using the
cleaning cloth supplied with the
document processor.
page 10-3
10-40
page 9-8
The job is canceled. Select
[End].
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
The toner container is
improperly installed.
Checkpoints
—
Corrective Actions
The toner container is
improperly installed or not
installed.
Reference
Page
—
Open the front cover and set the
toner container correctly.
This user account is
locked out.
—
Contact administrator.
―
Time for maintenance
soon. #####
—
Call service.
—
Toner is empty.
—
Replace the toner container to
our specified toner container.
page 10-4
Toner is low. (Replace
when empty.)
—
It is almost time to replace the
toner container. Obtain a new
toner container.
—
Tray # is full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
The job is canceled. Select
[End].
U
Message
Unknown Toner
Installed. PC
Checkpoints
Does the installed toner
container's regional
specification match the
machine's?
Corrective Actions
Install the specified container.
Reference
Page
—
W
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Warning for high
temperature. Adjust
the room temperature.
―
Print quality may be
deteriorated. Adjust the
temperature and the humidity of
your room.
―
Warning for low
temperature. Adjust
the room temperature.
—
Print quality may be
deteriorated. Adjust the
temperature and the humidity of
your room.
—
Warning low memory.
—
Cannot start the job. Try again
later.
—
Waste toner box
almost full.
—
It is almost time to replace the
waste toner box. Obtain a new
waste toner box.
—
10-41
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Y
Message
Checkpoints
You cannot use this
box.
Corrective Actions
—
You cannot use the specified
box. Job is canceled. Select
[End].
Reference
Page
—
Responding to Send Error
Error
Code
1101
1102
Message
Failed to send the e-mail.
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Check the host name of the SMTP server on the
Command Center RX.
page 2-65
Failed to send i-FAX.
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the host name of FTP.
page 5-27
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the host name of SMB.
page 5-24
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the SMB settings.
page 5-24
•
Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the
domain name.
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Failed to send via FTP.
•
Host name
•
Path
Check the following on the Command Center
RX.
•
SMTP login user name and login password
•
POP3 login user name and login password
•
E-mail size limit
Check the following on the Command Center
RX.
•
SMTP login user name and login password
•
POP3 login user name and login password
Check the FTP settings.
•
Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the
domain name.
•
Path
•
Folder share permissions of the recipient
10-42
page 2-65
Refer to
FAX
Operation
Guide
page 5-27
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Error
Code
1103
Message
Failed to send via SMB.
Corrective Actions
Check the SMB settings.
•
Reference
Page
page 5-24
Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the
domain name.
Failed to send via FTP.
1104
Failed to send the e-mail.
•
Path
•
Folder share permissions of the recipient
Check the FTP settings.
•
Path
•
Folder share permissions of the recipient
Check the e-mail address.
page 5-27
page 5-23
NOTE
If the address is rejected by the domain, you
cannot send the email.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the i-FAX address.
NOTE
If the address is rejected by the domain, you
cannot send the email.
1105
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the following settings.
Refer to
FAX
Operation
Guide
page 8-47
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/
Network] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[Protocol Detail] > [SMB Client
(Transmission)]
Failed to send the e-mail.
Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the
Command Center RX.
page 2-65
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the following settings.
page 8-47
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/
Network] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[Protocol Detail] > [FTP Client
(Transmission)]
1106
Failed to send i-FAX.
Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on the
Command Center RX.
page 2-65
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the sender address of SMTP on the
Command Center RX.
page 2-65
Enable the SSL.
page 8-57
Failed to send i-FAX.
1131
Failed to send via FTP.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/
Network] > [Network] > [Secure Protocol] >
[SSL]
10-43
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Error
Code
1132
Message
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send via FTP.
2101
Failed to send via SMB.
Failed to send via FTP.
2102
Corrective Actions
Check the following of the SMTP server.
•
Is SMTP over SSL available?
•
Is the encryption available?
Check the following of the FTP server.
•
Is FTPS available?
•
Is the encryption available?
Check the network and SMB settings.
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
•
Host name and IP address
•
Port number
Check the network and FTP settings.
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
•
Host name and IP address
•
Port number
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the network and Command Center RX.
Failed to send i-FAX.
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
•
POP3 server name of the POP3 user
•
SMTP server name
Failed to send via FTP.
2103
Check the network.
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
Check the following of the FTP server.
•
Is FTP available?
•
The server is not operating properly.
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the network.
Failed to send i-FAX.
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
2201
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the network.
2202
Failed to send via FTP.
•
The network cable is connected.
2203
Failed to send via SMB.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
2231
Failed to send i-FAX.
•
The server is not operating properly.
2204
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings
on the Command Center RX.
Failed to send i-FAX.
10-44
Reference
Page
Refer to the
Command
Center RX
User
Guide.
—
—
—
page 2-65
—
—
—
—
page 2-65
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Error
Code
3101
3201
Message
Reference
Page
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the authentication methods of both the
sender and the recipient.
—
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the network.
—
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
0007
Corrective Actions
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
Check the SMTP user authentication method of
the recipient.
—
Turn the power switch off and back on. If this
error occurs several times, make a note of the
displayed error code and contact your service
representative.
—
The scanned original exceeds the acceptable
number of pages of 999. Send the excess pages
separately.
4201
4701
5101
—
page 2-9
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
9181
10-45
—
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance
If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/
Maintenance in the system menu.
The table below lists the item you can carry out.
Item
Description
Reference Page
Tone Curve Adjustment
When the printed output tone may differ from the original, perform
this function to ensure consistency with the original tone.
page 10-46
Drum Refresh
Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.
page 10-48
Calibration
Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original tone.
page 10-48
Laser Scanner Cleaning
Remove vertical white lines from the printout.
page 10-48
Developer Refresh
Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though
there is enough toner.
page 10-49
Tone Curve Adjustment
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the printed output tone may differ from
the original. Perform this function to ensure consistency with the original tone. Before executing Tone Curve Adjustment,
execute calibration. If calibration does not improve the tones, perform Tone Curve Adjustment.
Calibration (page 10-48)
A total of 2 pattern pages (No. 1 and 2) are printed during adjustment. The printed patterns are read sequentially during
the adjustment.
1
Load paper.
10-46
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
2
Display the screen.
3
Adjust the tone curve.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Tone Curve Adjustment"
[Next]
1 Select [Start]. A pattern is printed.
Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the pattern.
2 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with
the arrows toward the back.
3 Select [Start]. The pattern is read and adjustment begins.
The second pattern is output.
4 Check that the number "2" is printed at the bottom of the pattern and repeat steps 2 to 3 to
read pattern 2.
5 Select [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.
10-47
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Drum Refresh
Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.
1
Display the screen.
2
Perform the drum refresh.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Drum Refresh" [Next]
Select [Start]. "Drum Refresh" begins.
Calibration
Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original tone.
1
Display the screen.
2
Perform the calibration.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Calibration" [Next]
Select [Start]. "Calibration" begins.
NOTE
When consistency with the original tone is not ensured even after performing calibration,
refer to the following:
Tone Curve Adjustment (page 10-46)
Laser Scanner Cleaning
Remove vertical white lines from the printout.
1
Display the screen.
2
Perform the laser scanner cleaning.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Laser Scanner Cleaning"
[Next]
Select [Start]. "Laser Scanner Cleaning" begins.
10-48
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Developer Refresh
Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner.
1
Display the screen.
2
Perform the Developer Refresh.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Developer Refresh" [Next]
Select [Start]. "Developer Refresh" begins.
NOTE
Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
10-49
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, printing stops and the location at which the paper jam has occurred and the following message
appear on the touch panel.
"Paper Jam."
Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.
Jam Location Indicators
1 Shows the location of a paper jam.
2 Shows the previous step.
Paper jam.
1. Open cassette 1.
2. Remove the paper.
To remove paper which is difficult
to get access to, the cassette
can be removed.
3. Close the cassette.
JAM
3 Shows the next step.
4
1
2
4 Shows the removal procedure.
3
1/5
e011001
≧ἣ
If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.
Paper jam.
1. Open cassette 1.
2. Remove the paper.
To remove paper which is difficult
to get access to, the cassette
can be removed.
3. Close the cassette.
JAM
1/5
e011001
≧ἣ
K
M
Q
P
P
R
S
P
P
O
L
J
H
E
N
H
H
H
H G
A
H
F
B
N
N
N
C
I
D
Paper Jam Location Indicator
Paper Jam Location
Reference Page
A
Cassette 1
page 10-51
B
Cassette 2
page 10-54
C
Cassette 3 (500-sheet×2)
page 10-57
Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×1)
page 10-59
10-50
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Paper Jam Location Indicator
Paper Jam Location
Reference Page
D
Cassette 4 (500-sheet×2)
page 10-57
E
Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2)
page 10-61
F
Cassette 5 (Side Feeder)
page 10-64
G
Multi Purpose Tray
page 10-66
H
Right Cover 1
page 10-67
I
Right Cover 2
page 10-71
J
Bridge Unit
page 10-74
K
Mailbox
page 10-75
L
Inner Finisher
page 10-76
M
Document Processor
page 10-77
page 10-79
N
1,000-Sheet Finisher
page 10-80
O
4,000-Sheet Finisher (Inner)
page 10-83
P
4,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray A)
page 10-84
Q
4,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray B)
page 10-88
R
Folding Unit
page 10-91
S
Folding Tray
page 10-96
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes
with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.
10-51
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
2
Open Right Cover 1.
3
Open the cover (A3).
A3
4
Remove any jammed paper.
5
Return the cover to the original position.
10-52
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
6
Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.
7
Remove any jammed paper.
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.
8
Push Cassette 1 back in.
10-53
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
9
If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
the original position.
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.
2
Open Right Cover 1.
10-54
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Close the duplex unit (A5).
A5
4
Remove any jammed paper.
5
Return the cover to the original position.
6
Pull Cassette 2 out toward you until it stops.
10-55
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
7
Remove any jammed paper.
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.
8
Push Cassette 2 back in.
9
If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
the original position.
10-56
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 and 4
(500-sheet×2)
See the explanation for Cassette 3 below.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.
2
Open Right Cover 2.
3
Remove any jammed paper.
10-57
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4
Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.
5
Remove any jammed paper.
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.
6
Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.
10-58
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
7
If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
the original position.
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3
(1,500-sheet×2)
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.
2
Open Right Cover 2.
10-59
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Remove any jammed paper.
4
Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.
5
Remove any jammed paper.
6
Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.
10-60
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
7
If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
the original position.
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4
(1,500-sheet×2)
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.
2
Open Right Cover 2.
10-61
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Remove any jammed paper.
4
Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.
5
Pull Cassette 4 out toward you until it stops.
6
Pull out paper feed unit (B1).
B1
10-62
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
7
Open cover (B2).
B2
8
Remove any jammed paper.
9
Push paper feed unit, Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 back in.
10 Return the cover to the original position.
10-63
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
11 Ifthetheoriginal
position.
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 (Side
Feeder)
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Detach the side feeder.
2
Remove any jammed paper.
10-64
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Pull Cassette 5 out toward you until it stops.
4
Remove any jammed paper.
5
Return the Cassette 5 and side feeder to the original position.
10-65
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Remove any jammed paper.
2
Remove all the paper.
3
Reload the paper.
10-66
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1
CAUTION
The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting
burned.
1
If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.
2
Open Right Cover 1.
3
Close the duplex unit (A5).
A5
4
Remove any jammed paper.
10-67
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
5
Open the paper feed unit cover (A1).
A1
6
Remove any jammed paper.
7
Open the fuser cover (A2).
A2
8
Remove any jammed paper.
10-68
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
9
Open the cover (A3).
A3
10 Remove any jammed paper.
11 Lift the cover (A4).
A4
12 Remove any jammed paper.
10-69
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
13 Lift the duplex unit (A5).
A5
14 Remove any jammed paper.
15 Remove the paper from the paper ejector.
16 Return the cover to the original position.
10-70
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
17 Ifthetheoriginal
position.
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2
(500-sheet×2)
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.
2
Open Right Cover 2.
10-71
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Remove any jammed paper.
4
Return the cover to the original position.
5
If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
the original position.
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2
(1,500-sheet×2)
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.
10-72
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
2
Open Right Cover 2.
3
Remove any jammed paper.
4
Return the cover to the original position.
5
If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
the original position.
10-73
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Open the bridge unit cover.
2
Remove any jammed paper.
3
Close the cover.
10-74
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Open the mailbox cover.
2
Remove any jammed paper.
3
Close the cover.
10-75
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Remove any jammed paper.
2
Open the inner finisher unit.
3
Remove any jammed paper.
10-76
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4
Return the unit to the original position.
Remove any jammed paper in the Document
Processor (Reverse Automatic)
CAUTION
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2
Open the document processor cover.
10-77
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.
C1
4
Open reverse unit (C2) and remove any jammed paper.
C2
5
Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.
C1
6
Return the cover to the original position.
10-78
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Document
Processor (Dual Scan)
CAUTION
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2
Open the document processor cover.
3
Turn dial (C) to remove any jammed paper.
C
4
Turn dial (C) to remove any jammed paper.
C
10-79
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
5
Return the cover to the original position.
Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet
Finisher
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Remove any jammed paper.
2
Open the finisher top cover.
10-80
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Open the conveyor guide (D2).
D2
4
Remove any jammed paper.
5
Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.
6
Open the finisher front cover.
10-81
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
7
Open the conveyor guide (D1).
D1
8
Remove any jammed paper.
9
Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.
10 Return the covers to the original position.
10-82
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet
Finisher (Inner)
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Open the finisher front cover 1.
2
Open the conveyor guide (D1).
D1
3
Remove any jammed paper.
10-83
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4
Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.
5
Return the cover to the original position.
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet
Finisher (Tray A)
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Remove any jammed paper.
10-84
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
2
Open the finisher front cover 1.
3
Open the conveyor guide (D6).
D6
4
Remove any jammed paper.
5
Return the conveyor guide (D6) to the original position.
10-85
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
6
Open the conveyor guide (D4).
D4
7
Turn knob (D5).
D5
8
Remove any jammed paper.
9
Return the conveyor guide (D4) to the original position.
10-86
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10 Open the conveyor guide (D1).
D1
11 Remove any jammed paper.
12 Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.
13 Return the cover to the original position.
10-87
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet
Finisher (Tray B)
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Remove any jammed paper.
2
Open the finisher front cover 1.
3
Open the conveyor guide (D2).
D2
10-88
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4
Turn knob (D3).
D3
5
Remove any jammed paper.
6
Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.
7
Open the conveyor guide (D1).
D1
10-89
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
8
Remove any jammed paper.
9
Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.
10 Return the cover to the original position.
10-90
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.
2
Open the conveyor guide (D7).
D7
3
Remove any jammed paper.
10-91
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4
Return the conveyor guide (D7) to the original position.
5
Open the conveyor guide (D8).
D8
6
Remove any jammed paper.
7
Return the conveyor guide (D8) to the original position.
10-92
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
8
Remove paper from inside the finisher.
9
Return the covers to the original position.
10 Lift the folding tray.
11 Remove any jammed paper.
10-93
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
12 Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.
13 Open the folding unit left cover.
14 Turn dial (D9).
D9
15 Remove any jammed paper.
10-94
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
16 Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.
17 Open the folding unit top cover.
18 Turn dial (D9).
D9
19 Remove any jammed paper.
10-95
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
20 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.
21 Return the folding unit to the original position.
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1
Lift the folding tray.
2
Remove any jammed paper.
10-96
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.
4
Open the folding unit left cover.
5
Turn dial (D9).
D9
6
Remove any jammed paper.
10-97
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
7
Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.
8
Open the folding unit top cover.
9
Turn dial (D9).
D9
10 Remove any jammed paper.
10-98
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
11 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.
12 Return the folding unit to the original position.
13 Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.
14 Remove paper from inside the finisher.
10-99
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
15 Return the covers to the original position.
10-100
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
Clearing a Staple Jam
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Inner Finisher
1
Open the inner finisher unit.
2
Remove any jammed paper.
3
Open the staple cover.
10-101
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
4
Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.
5
Remove the jammed staple.
6
Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.
7
Return the staple cover to the original position.
10-102
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
8
Return the unit to the original position.
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher
1
Open the finisher top cover.
2
Open the conveyor guide (D2).
D2
3
Remove any jammed paper.
10-103
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
4
Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.
5
Open the finisher front cover.
6
Open the conveyor guide (D1).
D1
7
Remove any jammed paper.
10-104
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
8
Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.
9
Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.
10 Remove the jammed staple.
11 Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.
10-105
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
12 Return the covers to the original position.
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 4,000-Sheet Finisher
1
Open the finisher front cover 1.
2
Open the conveyor guide (D4).
D4
3
Turn knob (D5).
D5
10-106
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
4
Remove any jammed paper.
5
Return the conveyor guide (D4) to the original position.
6
Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).
7
Remove the jammed staple.
10-107
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
8
Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).
9
Return the cover to the original position.
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit
1
Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.
10-108
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
2
Remove paper from inside the finisher.
3
Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).
C
B
4
Remove the jammed staple.
5
Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).
10-109
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
6
Return the covers to the original position.
7
Lift the folding tray.
8
Remove any jammed paper.
9
Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.
10-110
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10 Open the folding unit left cover.
11 Turn dial (D9).
D9
12 Remove any jammed paper.
13 Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.
10-111
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
14 Open the folding unit top cover.
15 Turn dial (D9).
D9
16 Remove any jammed paper.
17 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.
10-112
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
18 Return the folding unit to the original position.
10-113
11
Appendix
This chapter explains the following topics:
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2
Optional Applications .............................................................................................................................. 11-8
Starting Application Use .......................................................................................................................... 11-8
Checking Details of Application .............................................................................................................. 11-9
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................. 11-10
Entry Screens ....................................................................................................................................... 11-10
Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-12
Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-13
Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-13
Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-14
Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-16
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-20
Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-20
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-22
Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-22
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-23
Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-23
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................................................ 11-24
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................................................... 11-24
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) .................................................................................................................... 11-24
Inner Finisher ........................................................................................................................................ 11-25
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) ............................................................................................................ 11-25
1,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................ 11-25
4,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................ 11-26
Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................................ 11-27
Mailbox ................................................................................................................................................. 11-27
Folding Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 11-27
Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................................................... 11-28
Banner Tray .......................................................................................................................................... 11-28
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-30
11-1
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
(1) DP-7110
(1) DP-7100
(1) PLATEN COVER
TYPE E
(2) MT-730(B)
(12) PH-7A, PH-7C,
PH-7D
(11) PH-7100, PH-7120,
PH-7130
(10) DF-7100
(3) DF-7110
(9) Banner Guide 10
(13) JS-7100
(8) PF-7120*
(4) DF-7120
(5) BF-730
*
(6) PF-7100*
(7) PF-7110*
If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110, PF-7120
11-2
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(17) Keyboard Holder 10
(14) NK-7100, NK-7110
(15) Key Counter
(18) FAX System 12
(16) DT-730(B)
(19) IB-50
(20) IB-51
Software option
(22) Internet FAX Kit(A)
(23) Data Security Kit(E)
(24) UG-33
(25) UG-34
(26) Scan Extension Kit(A)
(27) USB Keyboard
11-3
(21) Card
Authentication Kit(B)
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)"
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
For document processor operation, refer to the following:
Loading Originals in the Document Processor (page 5-3)
When the document processor is not used, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.
(2) MT-730 (B) "Mailbox"
Makes it easy to sort output into separate trays. Installing this option adds 7 output trays. When multiple computer users
share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the 4,000-Sheet Finisher.
NOTE
To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the printer driver, or
change in the default settings.
Paper Output (page 6-30)
(3) DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher"
This is a large-capacity 4,000-Sheet Finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple
copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
(4) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher"
This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a
printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
(5) BF-730 "Folding Unit"
Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4,000-Sheet
Finisher.
(6) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)"
Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the standard cassettes.
Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)
(7) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)"
In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet×2) capable of
holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-14)
(8) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)"
In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3,000-sheet) capable of holding up to
3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
Loading in the Side Feeder (page 3-16)
11-4
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(9) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"
This tray enables continuous feeding of banner paper. Up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be loaded. To attach the tray
and load paper, refer to the following:
Using the Banner Tray (Option) (page 4-12)
(10) DF-7100 "Inner Finisher"
This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a
printout into individual copies. It can also staple the offset printouts.
(11) PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit"
Attaches to the Inner Finisher and is used to punch holes.
(12) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit"
Attaches to the Document Finisher and is used to punch holes.
(13) JS-7100 "Job Separator"
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as
the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the
received fax data.
NOTE
To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator, select the output destination or change the default setting.
Paper Output (page 6-30)
(14) NK-7100, NK-7110 "Optional Numeric Keypad"
The numeric keypad is added to the operation panel. If the optional numeric keypad is installed, numeric keys do not
appear on the touch panel.
(15) Key Counter "Key Counter"
Use the key counter to monitor machine usage. The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized
management of copy volume for different departments in a large company.
Inserting the Key Counter
(16) DT-730 (B) "Document Table"
Place original or other documents when using the machine.
(17) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder"
A USB keyboard connected to the machine can be placed here.
11-5
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(18) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"
By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a
computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable
quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time
can be reduced.
FAX Operation Guide
(19) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"
The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. This kit supports
traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.
It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.
IB-50 User's Manual
(20) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"
This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and
11 g/b. This supports traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.
It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.
The IB-51 Steup utility supports Windows OS and Mac OS X.
IB-51 User's Manual
(21) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"
User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the
following:
Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide
(22) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit"
Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can only be added
when the FAX Kit is installed.
(23) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"
The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved.
The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no data
cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
(24) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(25) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"
Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM
Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.
(26) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit"
This option enables the use of the OCR Text Recognition function in the applications of the machine.
11-6
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(27) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"
A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also
available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on
keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.
11-7
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Applications
Overview of the Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
Application
Data Security Kit
Internet FAX Kit
Card Authentication Kit
ThinPrint Option*1
Emulation Upgrade Kit
OCR Scan Activation Kit*1
*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
NOTE
• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Application Use
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Optional Function" [Next]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login
password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 Select the desired application > [Activate]
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].
3 Select [Official] in the license key entry screen.
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen
does not appear, go to Step 5.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
11-8
Appendix > Optional Equipment
4 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
NOTE
Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
Checking Details of Application
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/NetWork] > "Optional Function" [Next]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login
password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
4002i
4000
4000
5002i
5000
5000
6002i
6000
6000
2 Select the desired application and select [Detail].
You can view detailed information on the selected application.
The table below lists the item you can view.
Item
Function Name
License
Remaining Counts
Expiration Date
Status
Extend the trial period.
[Extend] > [Yes]
The trial period is extended.
11-9
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method
To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.
NOTE
Keyboard Layout
"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select the
[System Menu/Counter] key, [Common Settings] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired layout.
"QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
11
Use the keyboard to enter.
1
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
!
@
Q
W
A
Upper-case
$
E
S
Z
2
#
R
D
X
%
T
F
C
Lower-case
Lower-case
^
Y
G
V
&
U
H
B
No./Symbol
*
I
J
N
(
O
K
M
)
P
L
<
_
+
{
:
>
˜
}
|
8
"
?
Space
Cancel
OK
k0101_01_al
Status
3
No.
10
9
4
5
6
Display/Key
7
Description
1
Display
Displays entered characters.
2
[Upper-case]
Select to use upper-case letters.
3
[Lower-case]
Select to use lower-case letters.
4
[No./Symbol]
Select to enter numbers and symbols.
5
[Space]
Select to insert a space.
6
[Cancel]
Select to cancel entered characters and return to the screen
before the entry.
7
[OK]
Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the
entry.
8
Keyboard
Select a character to enter.
9
[Backspace]
Select to delete a character to the left of the cursor.
10
Limit Display
Displays maximum number of characters.
11
Cursor Key
Select to move the cursor on the display.
11-10
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
!
@
Q
#
W
A
$
E
S
Z
Upper-case
R
D
X
%
T
F
C
&
Y
G
V
Lower-case
Lower-case
^
U
H
B
*
(
I
J
N
O
K
M
No./Symbol
)
_
P
L
<
+
{
:
>
˜
}
|
"
?
Space
Cancel
OK
k0101_01_al
Status
Number/Symbol Entry Screen
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 32 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
"
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
[
\
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
Upper-case
˜
Lower-case
Lower-case
No./Symbol
Space
Cancel
12
OK
k0101_02_al
Status
No.
12
Display/Key
[ ]/[ ]
Description
To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard,
select the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other
numbers or symbols to enter.
11-11
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below to enter 'List A-1' for an example.
1 Select [Upper-case].
2 Select [L]. The letter "L" is shown on the display.
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 32 characters
Input: 1 characters
L
Backspace
!
@
Q
#
W
A
$
E
S
D
Z
X
Upper-case
%
R
^
T
F
C
G
V
Lower-case
Lower-case
&
Y
*
U
H
B
(
I
J
N
)
O
K
M
_
P
L
<
+
{
:
>
˜
}
|
"
?
Space
No./Symbol
Cancel
OK
k0101_03_al
Status
3 Select [Lower-case].
4 Select [i], [s], [t] and [Space].
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 32 characters
Input: 4 characters
List
Backspace
1
2
q
3
w
a
4
e
s
z
Upper-case
r
d
x
5
6
t
f
c
Lower-case
y
g
v
7
8
u
h
b
i
j
n
0
o
k
m
No./Symbol
9
!
p
l
,
[
;
.
=
`
]
\
’
/
@
_
Space
Cancel
OK
k0101_04_al
Status
5 Select [Upper-case].
6 Select [A].
7 Select [No./Symbol].
8 Select [ ] or [ ] repeatedly to view the keyboard containing [-] and [1].
9 Select [-] and [1].
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 32 characters
Input: 8 characters
List_A-1
Backspace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
"
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
[
\
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
˜
Upper-case
Lower-case
Lower-case
No./Symbol
Space
Cancel
OK
k0101_05_al
Status
10Check that the entry is correct. Press [OK].
11-12
Appendix > Paper
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the
following:
Specifications (page 11-20)
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as
laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.
Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections
for further details.
Criteria
Weight
Specifications
Cassettes: 52 to 300 g/m2
Multi purpose tray: 52 to 300 g/m2
Dimensional accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners
90° ±0.2°
Moisture content
4 to 6%
Pulp content
80% or more
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications
shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of
recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and
contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
11-13
Appendix > Paper
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper
fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may
also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,
avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those
types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content
consists of cotton or other fibers.
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several
sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in
area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard
size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause
paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several
sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to
adhere correctly.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is
supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to
become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,
making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
•
Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
•
Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for
a while.
•
Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.
Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.
•
Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
•
Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
11-14
Appendix > Paper
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls
upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be
discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,
sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you
cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have
been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the
basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
•
Glossy paper
•
Watermarked paper
•
Paper with an uneven surface
•
Perforated paper
Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must
be 90° ± 0.2°.
•
A3 (297 × 420 mm) *1
•
ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)
•
A4 (297 × 210 mm)
•
Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")
•
A5 (210 × 148 mm)
•
Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8")
•
A6 (148 × 105 mm)
•
Envelope #6 3/4 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2")
•
Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")
*1
•
B4 (257 × 364 mm)
•
B5 (257 × 182 mm)
•
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)
•
B6 (182 × 128 mm)
•
Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)
•
216×340 mm*1
•
Envelope C4 (229 × 324 mm) *1
•
SRA3 (320 × 450 mm) *1
•
Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm)
•
Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm)
*1
•
Ledger
•
Letter
•
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)
•
Legal
•
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
•
Statement
•
•
Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2")
•
12×18" (304.8 × 457 mm) *1
•
Oficio II
Custom
Cassette 1: 98 × 148 to 297 × 356 mm
Cassette 2 to 4: 98 × 148 to 320 × 457 mm*2
Multi Purpose Tray: 98 × 148 to 320 × 457 mm
•
Folio (210 × 330 mm)
•
8K (273 × 394 mm) *1
•
16K (273 × 197 mm)
*1 This paper cannot be used in cassette 1.
*2 The Paper Feeder (500-sheets×2) can only be used for cassettes 3 and 4.
11-15
Appendix > Paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
Special Paper that can be Used with This Machine
•
Transparencies
•
Preprinted paper
•
Bond paper
•
Recycled paper
•
Thin paper
•
Letterhead
•
Colored paper
•
Prepunched paper
•
Envelopes
•
Hagaki (Cardstock)
•
Thick paper
•
Labels
•
Coated
•
High-quality paper
•
Index tab dividers (136 to 256 g/m2)
When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as
laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, label paper, coated paper and index tab dividers.
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary
considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than
regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the
print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not
responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
Heat resistance
Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness
0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material
Polyester
Dimensional
accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of
corners
90° ±0.2°
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the
machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
11-16
Appendix > Paper
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine
and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled
labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Top sheet
Adhesive
Carrier sheet
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected
by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of
labels may cause more problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,
resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the
carrier sheet before completing output.
Allowed
Not allowed
Top sheet
Carrier
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Top sheet weight
44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight
(overall paper weight)
104 to 151 g/m²
Top sheet thickness
0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness
0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content
4 to 6 % (composite)
11-17
Appendix > Paper
Hagaki (Cardstock)
Burrs
Burrs
Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock), fan them and align the edges. Hagaki (Cardstock) should be fed from the MP tray
with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the print-side up. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)
paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough
edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)
on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the
print-side up.
NOTE
Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the cassette and the optional paper
feeder.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin
envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing
envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are
ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
•
Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is
exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes
off in the machine.
•
Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a
string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
•
If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a
paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a
flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE
If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few
millimeters.
11-18
Appendix > Paper
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use
paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
NOTE
Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than
plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.
The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making
the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated
side appears slightly glossy.
IMPORTANT
When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture
may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid
environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.
11-19
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
IMPORTANT
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE
For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
Machine
Item
Description
Type
Desktop
Printing Method
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight
Paper Type
Paper Size
Cassette
52 to 300 g/m2
Multi Purpose
Tray
52 to 300 g/m2
Cassette
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom
(Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose
Tray
Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High
Quality, Coated, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Cassette 1
A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K,
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return
postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to 297 × 356 mm)
Cassette 2
A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Multi Purpose
Tray
A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm/8.26" × 18.5" to 12" × 48")
Printable Area
Warm-up Time
(22°C/71.6°F,
60%)
Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm
Power on
17 seconds or less
Low Power
15 seconds or less
Sleep
17 seconds or less
11-20
Appendix > Specifications
Item
Paper Capacity
Description
Cassette
500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
Multi Purpose
Tray
150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2),
50 sheets (larger than A4/Letter) (80 g/m2)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm/8.26" × 18.5" to
12" × 48")) (136 to 163 g/m2)
Output Tray
Capacity
Inner tray
500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Image Write System
Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Memory
4.0 GB
Large Capacity Storage
SSD 8 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB
Interface
Standard
USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,
IPSec), 802.3a supported)
USB Port: 4 (Hi-Speed USB)
Wireless LAN: 1
Option
eKUIO: 2*2
Fax: 2*3
Operating
Environment
Temperature
10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity
10 to 80 %
Altitude
3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness
1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H)
(without Document Processor)
23.71 " × 26.19" × 31.11"
602 × 665 × 790 mm
Weight
Approx. 180.8 lb/Approx. 82 kg (without toner container)
Space Required (W × D)
36.23" × 26.19"
(Using multi purpose tray)
920 × 665 mm
Power Source
120 V Specification Model: 120 V
60 Hz 12 A
230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V
Options
Optional Equipment (page 11-2)
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.
*2 When two optional interface are installed, a fax line can not be installed.
*3 When IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
11-21
50/60 Hz 7.2 A
Appendix > Specifications
Copy Functions
Item
First Copy
Time (A4,
place on the
platen, feed
from
Cassette)
Description
Black and White
4002i 4.5 seconds or less
5002i 3.7 seconds or less
6002i 3.4 seconds or less
Zoom Level
Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Continuous Copying
1 to 999 sheets
Resolution
1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)
Supported Original Types
Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Original Feed System
Fixed
Printer Functions
Item
First Print
Time (A4,
feed from
Cassette)
Description
Black and White
4002i 5.1 seconds or less
5002i 4.3 seconds or less
6002i 3.8 seconds or less
Resolution
4800 dpi equivalent × 1200 dpi
Operating System
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2,
Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS 10.5 or later
Interface
USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,
IPSec), 802.3a supported)
Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Wireless LAN: 1
Page Description Language
PRESCRIBE
Emulations
PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL-5e), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS,
OpenXPS
11-22
Appendix > Specifications
Scanner Functions
Item
Description
Resolution
600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200×400 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi
File Format
TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression/High
compressive PDF/OCR Text Recognition PDF (Option))
Scanning Speed*1
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Interface
Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Transmission System
SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*3, WSD
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Available Operating System: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2012 R2
*3 Available Operating System: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/
Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2
Document Processor
Description
Item
Document Processor
(Automatic 2-Sided)
Type
DP-7100
Original Feed Method
Automatic feed
Supported Original Types
Sheet originals
Paper Size
Maximum: A3/Ledger
Document Processor
(Dual scan DP)
DP-7110
11.69" × 17"/297 × 432 mm (Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/297 × 1,900 mm)
Minimum: A6-R/Statement-R
4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm
Paper Weight
1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m2
1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m2
2
2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m
Loading Capacity
140 sheets
(50 to 80 g/m2)*1 maximum
270 sheets
(50 to 80 g/m2)*1 maximum
Dimensions (W × D × H)
23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46"
23.63" × 20.20" × 6.70"
593 × 531 × 138.5 mm
600 × 513 × 170 mm
Approx. 19.9 lbs./Approx. 9 kg
Approx. 32.0 lbs./Approx. 14.5 kg
Weight
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.
11-23
Appendix > Specifications
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)
Item
Paper Supply Method
Description
Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 2 cassettes/
No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes)
Paper Size
A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper
Dimensions (W × D × H)
23.63" × 26.19" × 12.73"
600 × 665 × 323.2 mm
Weight
Approx. 50.8 lbs. / Approx. 23 kg
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)
Item
Paper Supply Method
Description
Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 1,750, 64 g/m2, 2 cassettes/
No. Sheets: 1,500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes)
Paper Size
A4,B5, Letter
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper
Dimensions (W × D × H)
23.63" × 26.19" × 12.73"
600 × 665 × 323.2 mm
Weight
Approx. 66.2 lbs. / Approx. 30 kg
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)
Item
Paper Supply Method
Description
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 3,500, 64 g/m2/ No. Sheets: 3,750, 80 g/m2)
Paper Size
A4,B5, Letter
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper
Dimensions (W × D × H)
13.82" × 23.04" × 18.47"
351 × 585 × 469 mm
Weight
Approx. 58.5 lbs. / Approx. 26.5 kg
11-24
Appendix > Specifications
Inner Finisher
Item
Description
Number of Trays
1 tray
Paper Size (80 g/m2)
A3, B4, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
Envelope C4: 250 sheets
Finisher tray (no stapling)
A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5-R, B5, B6, Letter-R, Letter, Statement, Executive,
16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 500 sheets
Stapling
Number of
Sheets
A3, B4, 216×340 mm,
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
8K
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R,
Letter, 16K
30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Media types
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom
Dimensions (W × D × H)
27.36" × 20.99" × 8.69"
(When pulling the tray)
694.8 × 533.1 × 220.5 mm
Weight
25.4 lbs. or less / 11.5 kg or less
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher)
Item
Paper
Size
Inch
cm
Description
2 Hole
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
3 Hole
A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K
2 Hole
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
4 Hole
A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K
Paper Weight
52 - 300 g/m2
Media types
Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High
Quality, Custom 1 to 8
1,000-Sheet Finisher
Item
Number of Trays
Paper Size
(80 g/m2)
Description
1 tray
Finisher tray
(Non-stapling)
A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,
Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500 sheets
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Supported Paper Weight
Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
11-25
Appendix > Specifications
Item
Stapling
Number of
Sheets
Media types
Dimensions (W × D × H)
Description
A3, B4, B5-R,
216×340 mm, Ledger,
Legal, 12×18", Oficio II,
16K-R, 8K
30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R,
Letter, 16K
50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"
548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm
Weight
Approx. 66.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 30 kg or less
Space Required (W × D)
26.23" × 24.36"
(When pulling the tray)
666 × 618.5 mm
4,000-Sheet Finisher
Item
Description
Number of Trays
2 trays
Paper
Size
(80 g/m2)
A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12×18",
Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 1,500 sheets
Tray A (Non-Stapling)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 4,000 sheets
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II,
Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki (Return
postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 200 sheets
Supported Paper Weight
Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
Stapling
A3, B4, B5-R,
216×340 mm, Ledger,
Legal, 12×18", Oficio II,
8K, 16K-R
30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R,
Letter, 16K
65 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Maximum Number
Media types
Dimensions (W × D × H)
Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
23.91" × 26.32" × 41.79"
607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm
Weight
Approx. 88.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 40 kg or less
Space Required (W × D)
28.55" × 26.32"
(When pulling the tray)
725 × 668.5 mm
11-26
Appendix > Specifications
Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher)
Item
Paper
Size
Inch
cm
Description
2 Hole
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
3 Hole
A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K
2 Hole
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
4 Hole
A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K
Paper Weight
45 - 300 g/m2
Media types
Plain, Rough, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Mailbox
Item
Description
Number of Trays
7 trays
Paper Size
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 50 sheets
(80 g/m2)
A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R,
Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets
Dimensions (W × D × H)
20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"
510 × 400 × 470 mm
Weight
Approx. 22.1 lbs. / Approx. 10 kg
Folding Unit
Item
Sizes
Number of Sheets
Description
Bi-Fold
A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Saddle Stitch
A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-Fold
A4-R, Letter-R
Bi-Fold
5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
1 sheet (121 to 256 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch
16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)
Tri-Fold
5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
11-27
Appendix > Specifications
Item
Maximum Number for Storage
Description
Bi-Fold
5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
Saddle Stitch
5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
Tri-Fold
1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more
2 to 5 sheets per set: 5 sets or more
Bi-Fold
Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Saddle Stitch
Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Tri-Fold
Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
(80 g/m2)
Media types
Job Separator Tray
Item
Description
Number of Trays
1 tray
Maximum Sheets
100 Sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio,
8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to
304.8 × 1,220 mm)
Paper Type
Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper
Dimensions (W × D × H)
18.90" × 16.93" × 3.94"
480 × 430 × 100 mm
Weight
Approx. 1.4 lbs. / Approx. 0.6 kg
Banner Tray
Item
Description
Max. number of sheets
10 sheets (Multi Purpose tray)
Paper length
210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper width
Max. 1220.0 mm (48")
Paper Type
Paper weight: 136 to 163 g/m2
Paper type: Heavy 2
11-28
Appendix > Specifications
Item
Dimensions (W × D × H)
Description
15.78" × 15.67" × 7.63"
400.6 × 397.8 × 193.6 mm
Weight
Approx. 1.2 lbs. / Approx. 0.5 kg
NOTE
Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
11-29
Appendix > Glossary
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or
visually impaired. Touch panel is adjustable in two angles.
Apple Talk
AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another
computer on the same AppleTalk network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form
feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is
performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP
requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0
to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and
services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically
recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives
network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that
Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run
stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets
are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly
for Bonjour.
Custom Box
The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or
multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,
data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
11-30
Appendix > Glossary
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client
computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends
the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the
network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an
IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management
workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi (dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of
PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).
Enhanced WSD
Kyocera's proprietary web services.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,
FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black
at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:
that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16
bits.
Help
A ? (Help) key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like
more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the ? (Help) key to
view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.
The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be
between 0 and 255.
11-31
Appendix > Glossary
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be
sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and
enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication
mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
Job Box
The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data
later using the printer's operation panel.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller
networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities
to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as
a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
Outline font
With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced
in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,
since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in
steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use
of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a
specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A2), is currently being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional
graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that
enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for
the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
11-32
Appendix > Glossary
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is
contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.
RA (Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information
is the Router Advertisement (RA).
ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
RAM Disk
Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a
RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected
from the list or entered at each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as
well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source
settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.
A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in
the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network
address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In
this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network
address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet
address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other
over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
11-33
Appendix > Glossary
TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The
TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted
on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with
USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This
function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of
operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
WPS is a network security standard created by Wi-Fi Alliance, to make it easy to connect with the wireless devices and
set up the Wi-Fi Protected Access. The WPS-supported services can connect to the wireless access points by pushing
a button or entering passphrases.
11-34
Index
Numerics
1,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4
2-sided/Book Original 6-68
4,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4
A
Accessibility 11-30
Accessibility Functions 2-26
Address Book 3-30
Adding 3-30
Contact 3-30
Deleting 3-36
Editing 3-35
Group 3-34
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2-11
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-70, 10-46
Auto Color Correction 8-71
Auto Drum Refresh 8-72
Background Density Adjustment 8-70
Calibration 8-71, 10-48
Calibration Cycle 8-71
Contrast 8-72
Correcting Black Lines 8-70
Density Adjustment 8-70
Developer Refresh 8-71, 10-49
Display Brightness 8-71
Drum Heater 8-70
Drum Refresh 8-71, 10-48
Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-72, 10-48
Memory Diagnostics 8-71
Sharpness Adjustment 8-70
Silent Mode 8-71
System Initialization 8-71
Tone Curve Adjustment 8-71, 10-46
AirPrint 4-16
Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-14
AppleTalk 11-30
Application 5-13, 8-73
Auto Error Clear 8-66
Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-30
Auto Image Rotation 6-63
Default 8-19
Auto Panel Reset 8-66
Auto Paper Selection 11-30
Auto Sleep 2-40, 11-30
Auto-IP 11-30
Settings 8-47, 8-51
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-17
Bluetooth Settings 8-64
Bonjour 11-30
Settings 8-53
Booklet 6-43
Border Erase 6-41
C
Cables 2-6
Calibration 8-71, 10-48
Canceling Jobs 5-21, 5-40
Canceling Printing 4-15
Card Authentication Kit 11-6
Cardstock 11-18
Cassette
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 3-10
Loading Paper 3-4, 3-7
Paper Size and Media Type 8-7
Cassette 1 2-2
Cassette 2 2-2
Cassette 3 2-5
Cassette 4 2-5
Cassette 5 2-5
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-7
Centering 6-40
Character Entry Method 11-10
Checking and Editing Destinations 5-44
Checking the Counter 2-58
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-14
Cleaning 10-2
Document Processor 10-2
Glass Platen 10-2
Slit Glass 10-3
Coated Paper 11-19
Collate/Offset 6-25
Default 8-19
Color
Calibration 10-48
Color Selection 6-32
Default 8-18
Colored Paper 11-19
Combine 6-38
Command Center RX 2-61
B
Background Density Adjustment 6-34, 8-70
Default 8-18
Banner Printing 4-9
Banner Tray 11-5
Using 4-12
Bates Stamp 6-60
Index-1
Common Settings 8-10
Customize Status Display 8-29
Default Screen 8-10
Display Status/Log 8-28
Error Handling 8-16
Function Defaults 8-18
Function Key Assignment 8-31
Keyboard Layout 8-11
Language 8-10
Low Toner Alert Level 8-28
Manual Staple 8-27
Measurement 8-15
Message Banner Print 8-29
Message Board Settings 8-30
Numeric Keypad Settings 8-31
Offset Documents by Job 8-27
Offset One Page Documents 8-28
Orientation Confirmation 8-18
Original/Paper Settings 8-11
Paper Output 8-17
Prevent Light Reflection 8-31
Remote Printing 8-30
Show Power Off Message 8-31
Sound 8-10
System Stamp 8-21
Toner Waste Full Alert 8-28
USB Keyboard Type 8-21
Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-45
Connecting
LAN Cable 2-7
Power Cable 2-8
USB cable 2-8
Connection Method 2-6
Continuous Scan 6-63
Default 8-21
Contrast 6-33, 8-72
Control Section of the Finisher 2-5
Conventions Used in This Guide xxii
Copy 5-18
Copy Settings 8-32
Auto % Priority 8-32
Auto Image Rotation Action 8-32
Auto Paper Selection 8-32
Paper Selection 8-32
Paper Size for Small Original 8-32
Preset Limit 8-32
Quick Setup Registration 8-32
Reserve Next Priority 8-32
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Count by Paper Size 9-46
Counter 2-58
Each Job Account 9-48
Print Accounting Report 9-49
Total Accounting 9-48
Unknown ID Job 9-53
Cover 6-49
Custom Box 5-48, 11-30
Copying Documents 5-60, 5-61
Creating a New Custom Box 5-53
Deleting Custom Box 5-55
Deleting Documents 5-62
Editing Custom Box 5-54
Joining Documents 5-61
Moving Documents 5-60
Printing Documents 5-56
Saving Scanned Documents 5-57
Send to Me from BOX (E-mail) 5-58
Sending Documents 5-57
Storing Documents 5-55
Customize Status Display 8-29
D
Data Sanitization 8-63
Data Security 8-62
Data Security Kit 11-6
Date Format 8-66
Date/Time 8-66
Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-66
Auto Error Clear 8-66
Auto Panel Reset 8-66
Date Format 8-66
Date/Time 8-66
EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-68
Error Clear Timer 8-67
Error Job Skip 8-67
Interrupt Clear Timer 8-67
Low Power Timer 8-67
Panel Reset Timer 8-67
Ping Timeout 8-69
Sleep Level 8-68
Sleep Rules 8-68
Sleep Timer 8-67
Time Zone 8-66
Unusable Time 8-67
Weekly Timer Settings 8-69
Index-2
Default
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) 8-19
Backgrnd Density (Copy) 8-18
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store) 8-18
Border Erase Default 8-19
Border Erase to Back Page 8-19
Collate/Offset 8-19
Color Selection 8-18
Color TIFF Compression 8-19
Cont. Scan (Copy) 8-21
Continuous Scan (Copy) 8-21
Continuous Scan (FAX) 8-21
Continuous Scan (Send/Store) 8-21
DP Read Action 8-20
EcoPrint 8-19
E-mail Subject/Body 8-20
FAX TX Resolution 8-18
File Format 8-18
File Name Entry 8-20
File Separation 8-21
High Comp. PDF Image 8-19
i-FAX Subject/Body 8-20
Image Quality (File Format) 8-19
JPEG/TIFF Print 8-19
Margin 8-19
OCR Text Recognition 8-20
Org. Image (Send/Store) 8-18
Orig. Orient.(Send/Store) 8-18
Orig. Orientation (Copy) 8-18
Original Image (Copy) 8-18
PDF/A 8-20
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) 8-18
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) 8-18
Primary OCR Language 8-20
Repeat Copy 8-20
Scan Resolution 8-18
Skip Blank Page (Copy) 8-21
Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) 8-21
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-19
XPS Fit to Page 8-19
Zoom 8-19
Default Gateway 11-30
Settings 8-47, 8-51
Default Screen 8-10
Delete after Printed 6-76
Delete after Transmitted 6-76
Density 6-31
Density Adjustment 8-70
Destination
Adding a Destination 3-30
Address Book 3-30
Address Book Type 8-65
Check before Send 5-45, 8-33
Checking and Editing 5-44
Choosing from the Address Book 5-41
Choosing from the One Touch Key 5-43
Choosing from the Speed Dial 5-43
Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-45
Entry Check for New Dest. 8-33
Multi Sending 5-38
Narrow Down 8-65
One Touch Key 3-37
Recall 5-46
Search 5-42
Sort 8-65
Developer Refresh 8-71, 10-49
Device 7-13
Device Information 2-18
DHCP 11-31
Settings 8-47, 8-51
DHCP (IPv6) 11-31
Settings 8-48, 8-52
Display Setting Screen 2-18
Display Status/Log 8-28
Disposing of the Punch Waste
1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-19
4,000-Sheet Finisher 10-20
Inner Finisher 10-17
Document Box
Basic Operation 5-49
Custom Box 5-48
Job Box 4-18, 5-48
Removable Memory Box 5-48
Document Box/Removable Memory
Custom Box 8-38
FAX Box 8-38
Job Box 8-38
Polling Box 8-38
Quick Setup Registration 8-39
Document Processor 2-2
Loading Originals 5-3
Originals Supported by the Document
Processor 5-3
Part Names 2-2
Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4
Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4
Document Table 11-5
DP Read Action 6-67, 8-20
dpi 11-31
Drum Refresh 8-71, 10-48
DSM Scan 5-35
Protocol Settings 8-54
Duplex 6-46
E
EcoPrint 6-32, 11-31
Default 8-19
Printer 8-40
Index-3
Edit Destination
Address Book 3-30
Address Book Defaults 8-65
Contact 3-30
Group 3-34
One Touch Key 3-37
E-mail Settings 2-65
E-mail Subject/Body 6-75
Default 8-20
Emulation 11-31
Selection 8-39
Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6
Encrypted PDF Password 6-78
Energy Saver Recovery Level 2-40, 8-68
Energy Saving Control Function 1-17
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-17
Enhanced WSD 11-31
Protocol Settings 8-56
Enhanced WSD over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-56
Enter key 2-24
Entering Numbers 2-23
Entry
File Name 6-65
Subject 6-75
Envelope Feed Guide 3-10
Envelope Stack Guide 3-18
Envelopes 11-18
Environment 1-3
Erase Shadowed Areas 6-51
Error Clear Timer 8-67
Error Handling 8-16
Duplexing Error 8-16
Finished Pages Exceeded 8-16
Finishing Error 8-16
Inserted Paper Mismatch 8-17
No Staple Error 8-16
Paper Jam before Staple 8-17
Paper Mismatch Error 8-16
Punch Waste Full Error 8-16
eSCL
Protocol Settings 8-56
eSCL over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-56
F
FAX 8-39
FAX Kit 11-6
FAX RX Result Report 8-43
File
Format 6-70
PDF 6-72
Separation 6-74
File Format 6-70
Default 8-18
File Management Utility 5-37
File Name Entry 6-65
Default 8-20
File Separation 6-74
Default 8-21
File Size Confirmation 6-76
Finisher Tray 2-5
First Copy Time 11-22
First Print Time 11-22
FMU Connection 5-37
Fold 6-24
Folding Tray 2-5
Folding Unit 11-4
Form Overlay 6-50
Storing a Form 5-63
Front Cover 2-2
FTP 11-31
FTP Client (Transmission)
Protocol Settings 8-53
FTP Encrypted TX 6-76
FTP Server (Reception)
Protocol Settings 8-53
Function Key Assignment 2-12, 8-31
Functions Key 2-19
G
Glossary 11-30
Google Cloud Print 4-16
GPL/LGPL 1-12
Grayscale 11-31
Group Authorization Settings 9-19
Group Authorization 9-19
Group List 9-20
Guest Authorization Set. 9-22
Guest Authorization 9-22
Guest Property 9-23
Guides Provided with the Machine
H
Handles 2-2
Hard Disk/SSD Initialization 8-62
Help 11-31
Help Screen 2-25
Highlighter 6-31
Home 8-31
Customize Desktop 2-15
Customize Taskbar 2-15
Wallpaper 2-15
Home Screen 2-14
Host Name 8-47
HTTP
Protocol Settings 8-55
HTTPS
Protocol Settings 8-55
I
i-FAX
Protocol Settings 8-54
Image Repeat 6-56
Inner Finisher 11-5
Inner Tray 2-2
Insert Sheets/Chapters 6-53
Index-4
xix
Install
Macintosh 2-53
Software 2-45
Uninstalling 2-51
Windows 2-46
Interface Block Setting 8-61
Internet 8-72
Proxy 8-57
Internet Browser 5-69
Internet FAX Kit 11-6
Interrupt Copy 5-21
IP Address 11-31
Settings 8-47, 8-51
IPP 11-32
Protocol Settings 8-55
IPP over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-55
IPSec 8-53
J
Job
Available Status 7-2
Canceling 7-11
Checking History 7-9
Checking Status 7-2
Detailed Information 7-8
Detailed Information of Histories 7-10
Details of the Status Screens 7-3
Displaying History Screen 7-10
Displaying Status Screens 7-2
Pause and Resumption 7-11
Priority Override 7-11
Reordering Print Jobs 7-12
Sending the Log History 7-10, 8-44
Job Accounting 9-33
Adding an Account 9-36
Apply Limit 9-51
Copier/Printer Count 9-52
Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-47
Default Setting 9-45
Deleting an Account 9-40
Editing an Account 9-39
Enabling Job Accounting 9-34
FAX Driver 9-44
Job Accounting Access 9-35
Login 9-50
Logout 9-50
Overview of Job Accounting 9-33
Print Accounting Report 9-49
Printing 9-41
Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-38
TWAIN 9-42
WIA 9-43
Job Box 4-18, 5-63, 11-32
Deletion of Job Retention 8-38
Form for Form Overlay 5-63
Private Print Box 4-19
Proof and Hold Box 4-22
Quick Copy Box 4-21
Quick Copy Job Retention 8-38
Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-38
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing
the Job 4-18
Stored Job Box 4-20
Job Finish Notice 6-64
Job Finish Notice Setting 8-43
Job Separator 11-5
Job Separator Tray 2-5
JPEG/TIFF Print 6-78
Default 8-19
K
Key Counter 11-5
Keyboard Holder 11-5
Keyboard Layout 8-11
Knopflerfish License 1-14
KPDL 11-32
L
Label 11-17
LAN Cable 2-6
Connecting 2-7
LAN Interface 8-49
Language 8-10
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-4
Loading Paper 3-14
Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-72, 10-48
LDAP
Protocol Settings 8-55
Legal Information 1-11
Legal Restriction on Copying 1-9
Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-9
Limited Use of This Product 1-10
Loading Originals 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3
Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2
Loading Paper 10-9
Local Authorization 9-18
Login 2-27
Logout 2-28
Long Original 6-77
Low Power Mode 2-39
Low Power Timer 8-67
Low Toner Alert Level 8-28
LPD
Protocol Settings 8-54
M
Magnifying the View 2-26
Mailbox 11-4
Main Power Switch 2-2
Management 9-1
Index-5
Manual Setting (IPv6) 8-48, 8-52
Manual Staple 5-71, 8-27
Margin 6-40
Default 8-19
Margin/Centering 6-40
Measurement 8-15
Media Type Setting 8-15
Memo Page 6-54
Memory Diagnostics 8-71
Message Banner Print 8-29
Message Board Settings 8-30
Mirror Image 6-64
Mixed Size Originals 6-20
Combinations 6-21
Copy Size 6-22
Mixed Size Stapling 6-28
Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-13
Mopria 4-16
MP Tray Setting
Paper Size and Media Type 8-8
Multi Purpose Tray 2-2, 2-3, 11-32
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 5-8
Loading Index Paper 5-8
Loading Paper 5-6
Paper Size and Media Type 8-8
Multi Sending 5-38
N
Negative Image 6-64
NetBEUI 11-32
Protocol Settings 8-53
NetWare
Settings 8-58
Network Interface 2-6
Network Interface Connector 2-4
Network Interface Kit 11-6
NFC
Printing 4-17
Settings 2-38, 8-64
Notice 1-2
Numeric Keypad Settings 8-31
O
OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-6
Offset Documents by Job 8-27
Offset One Page Documents 8-28
One Touch Key
Adding 3-37
Deleting 3-38
Editing 3-38
OpenSSL License 1-12
Operation Panel 2-2
Option
1,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4
4,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4
Banner Tray 11-5
Card Authentication Kit 11-6
Data Security Kit 11-6
Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4
Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4
Document Table 11-5
Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6
FAX Kit 11-6
Folding Unit 11-4
Inner Finisher 11-5
Internet FAX Kit 11-6
Job Separator 11-5
Key Counter 11-5
Keyboard Holder 11-5
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-4
Mailbox 11-4
Network Interface Kit 11-6
OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-6
Optional Numeric Keypad 11-5
Overview 11-2
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4
Punch Unit 11-5
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-4
ThinPrint Option 11-6
Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6
Option Interface Slot 2-4
Optional Applications 11-8
Optional Function 8-64
Optional Network
Basic 8-58
Wireless Network 8-59
Optional Numeric Keypad 11-5
Orientation Confirmation 8-18
Original
Auto Detect 8-13
Custom Original Size 8-11
Loading Originals 5-2
Settings 8-11
Size xxiv, 6-18
Original Eject Table 2-2
Original Image 6-31
Default 8-18
Original Orientation 6-23
Default 8-18
Original Preview 2-20
Original Size 6-18
Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2
Original SSLeay License 1-12
Original Stopper 2-2, 5-5
Original Table 2-2
Original Width Guides 2-2
Original/Paper Settings 8-11
Outline font 11-32
P
Page # 6-51
Panel Reset Timer 8-67
Index-6
Paper
Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-14
Appropriate Paper 11-14
Custom Paper Size 8-12
Default Paper Source 8-12
Loading Cardstock 3-10, 5-8
Loading Envelopes 3-10, 5-8
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder 3-14
Loading in the Side Feeder 3-16
Loading Index Paper 5-8
Loading Paper 3-2, 5-6
Loading Paper in the Cassette 1 3-4
Loading Paper in the Cassette 2 3-7
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray 5-6
Media for Auto 8-13
Media Type Setting 8-12
Paper Source for Cover 8-13
Precaution for Loading Paper 3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units 3-3
Separator Paper Source 8-14
Settings 8-11
Show Paper Setup Message 8-14
Size and Media Type 8-7, 11-13
Special Paper 11-16
Special Paper Action 8-14
Specifications 11-13
Weight 8-15
Paper Feed Mode 8-40
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4
Paper Jams 10-50
1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-80
4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) 10-83
4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) 10-84
4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) 10-88
Bridge Unit 10-74
Cassette 1 10-51
Cassette 2 10-54
Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-59
Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) 10-57
Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-61
Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) 10-64
Document Processor (Dual Scan) 10-79
Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 10-77
Folding Tray 10-96
Folding Unit 10-91
Inner Finisher 10-76
Jam Location Indicators 10-50
Mailbox 10-75
Multi Purpose Tray 10-66
Right Cover 1 10-67
Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-72
Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) 10-71
Paper Length Guide 2-3, 3-4, 3-7
Paper Output 6-30, 8-17
Paper Selection 6-19
Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-18
Paper Width Adjusting Tab 2-3
Paper Width Guide 2-3, 3-5, 3-8
Part Names 2-2
PDF/A 11-32
PIN Code Authorization 9-31
Ping 8-57
Platen 2-2
POP3 11-32
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Protocol Settings 8-53
PostScript 11-32
Power Cable
Connecting 2-8
Power Management 1-17
Power Off 2-9
Power On 2-9
Power Switch 2-2
PPM 11-32
Precaution for Loading Paper 3-2
Precautions for Use 1-4
Preprinted Paper 11-19
Prevent Bleed-thru 6-34
Default 8-18
Prevent Light Reflection 8-31
Primary Network (Client) 8-60
Print Report
Font List 8-42
Network Status 8-42
Optional Network Status 8-43
Service Status 8-43
Status Page 8-42
Print Settings 4-2
Printer 8-39
Auto Cassette Change 8-41
Copies 8-40
CR Action 8-40
Duplex 8-40
EcoPrint 8-40
Emulation 8-39
Form Feed TimeOut 8-40
Job Name 8-40
KIR 8-41
LF Action 8-40
MP Tray Priority 8-41
Orientation 8-40
Override A4/Letter 8-40
Paper Feed Mode 8-40
Print Setting 4-2
Resolution 8-41
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-40
User Name 8-40
Wide A4 8-41
Printer Driver 11-33
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings 4-3
Help 4-3
Print Settings 4-2
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB
Memory 5-65
Printing from PC 4-4
Banner Printing 4-9
Non-standard Sized Paper 4-6
Standard Sized Paper 4-4
Priority Override 6-65, 7-11
Product Library xx
Index-7
Program 5-10
Deleting 5-12
Editing 5-12
Recalling 5-11
Registering 5-11
Proof Copy 5-20
Punch 6-28
Punch Unit 11-5
Q
Quick No. Search key 2-24
Quick Setup Registration 8-32, 8-33, 8-39
Quick Setup Wizard 2-42
R
RA (Stateless) 11-33
Settings 8-48, 8-52
RAM Disk 11-33
Raw
Protocol Settings 8-55
Recycled Paper 11-19
Regarding Trade Names 1-11
Regular Maintenance 10-2
Remote Printing 8-30
Repeat Copy 6-66
Default 8-20
Printing 5-63
Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-38
Replace the Waste Toner Box 10-7
Replacing Staples
1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-12
4,000-Sheet Finisher 10-13
Folding Unit 10-15
Inner Finisher 10-10
Report 8-42
Admin Report Settings 8-43
Device Log History Settings 8-45
Login History Settings 8-44
Print Report 8-42
Result Report Settings 8-43
Secure Comm. Error Log 8-46
Sending Log History 8-44
Resolution 6-74, 8-41, 11-22
Resource Saving - Paper 1-17
Responding to Messages 10-30
Restart Entire Device 8-64
Restart Network 8-52, 8-57
Right Cover 1 2-3
Right Cover 1 Lever 2-3
RX Result Report Type 8-43
S
Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2
Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-67
Scan Resolution 6-74
Default 8-18
Scan to Folder (FTP) 5-27
Scan to Folder (SMB) 5-24
Security Level 8-61
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-9
Send and Forward
File format 8-35
PDF Encryption Functions 8-36
Send and Print 6-75
Send and Store 6-75
Send as E-mail 5-23, 11-33
Send Result Report 8-43
Send Settings 8-33
Broadcast 8-34
Color Type 8-33
Default Screen 8-33
Dest. Check before Send 8-33
Entry Check for New Dest. 8-33
HighCompressionPDF Mode 8-35
New Destination Entry 8-34
OCR Text Recognition Act. 8-35
Quick Setup Registration 8-33
Recall Destination 8-34
Send and Forward 8-34
Send to Me (E-mail) 5-39
Sending 5-22
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-20
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a
Computer 5-24
Sending Size 6-69
Setting Date and Time 2-29
Sharpness 6-33
Shortcuts 5-16
Adding 5-16
Deleting Shortcuts 5-17
Editing Shortcuts 5-17
Show Power Off Message 8-31
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-4
Loading Paper 3-16
Silent Mode 8-71
Simple Login 2-28
Simple Login Settings
Simple Login 9-27
Simple Login Setup 9-28
Skip Blank Page 6-67
Default 8-21
Sleep 2-39
Sleep Level 2-40, 8-68
Energy Saver 8-68
Quick Recovery 8-68
Sleep Rules 2-40, 8-68
Sleep Timer 8-67
Slit Glass 2-2
SMB Client (Transmission)
Protocol Settings 8-53
SMTP 11-33
SMTP (E-mail TX)
Protocol Settings 8-53
SNMPv1/v2c
Protocol Settings 8-56
SNMPv3
Protocol Settings 8-56
Software Verification 8-63
Solving Malfunctions 10-23
Index-8
Sound 8-10
Specifications 11-20
1,000-Sheet Finisher 11-25
4,000-Sheet Finisher 11-26
Banner Tray 11-28
Copy Functions 11-22
Document Processor 11-23
Folding Unit 11-27
Inner Finisher 11-25
Job Separator Tray 11-28
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-24
Machine 11-20
Mailbox 11-27
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-24
Printer Functions 11-22
Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet
Finisher) 11-27
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) 11-25
Scanner Functions 11-23
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-24
SSL
Security Settings 8-57
Stack Level Adjuster 3-19
Staple Jam
1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-103
4,000-Sheet Finisher 10-106
Folding Unit 10-108
Inner Finisher 10-101
Staple/Punch 6-26
Status Monitor 4-23
Accessing 4-23
Exiting 4-23
Notification Settings 4-26
Status Page 11-33
Status/Job Cancel 7-1
Storing Size 6-77
Subnet Mask 11-33
Settings 8-47, 8-51
Supplies
Checking the Remaining Amount 7-14
Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray 2-3
Symbols 1-2
System Initialization 8-71
System Menu 8-2
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-70
Application 8-73
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-7
Common Settings 8-10
Copy 8-32
Counter 2-58
Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-66
Document Box/Removable Memory 8-38
Edit Destination 8-65
FAX 8-39
Home 2-14
Internet 8-72
Operation Method 8-2
Printer 8-39
Quick Setup Wizard 2-42
Report 8-42
Send 8-33
System/Network 8-47
User Login/Job Accounting 8-66
User Property 8-66, 9-12
System Stamp 8-21
System/Network 8-47
Bluetooth Settings 8-64
Data Security 8-62
Interface Block Setting 8-61
Network 8-47
NFC 8-64
Optional Function 8-64
Optional Network 8-58
Primary Network (Client) 8-60
Restart Entire Device 8-64
Security Level 8-61
T
TCP/IP 11-33
Settings 8-47, 8-51
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Settings 2-30, 8-47, 8-51
TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-31
Settings 8-48, 8-52
Text Stamp 6-57
Thick Paper 11-18
Thin Print over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-54
ThinPrint
Protocol Settings 8-54
ThinPrint Option 11-6
Time Zone 8-66
Tone Curve Adjustment 8-71, 10-46
Toner Container (Black) 2-4
Toner Container Replacement 10-4
Toner Waste Full Alert 8-28
Touch Panel 2-14
Transparencies 11-16
Tray 1 to 7 2-5
Tray A 2-5
Tray B 2-5
Index-9
Troubleshooting 10-23
Machine Operation Trouble 10-23
Printed Image Trouble 10-28
Solving Malfunctions 10-23
TWAIN 11-34
Scanning 5-29
Setting TWAIN Driver 2-55
U
USB 11-34
USB Cable 2-6
Connecting 2-8
USB Interface 2-6
USB Interface Connector 2-4
USB Keyboard Type 8-21
USB Memory
Check the Information 5-68
Printing 5-65
Remove 5-68
Save 5-67
USB Memory Slot 2-2
USB Port 2-4
User Login Administration 9-2
Adding a User 9-8
Changing User Properties 9-11
Enabling User Login Administration 9-3
FAX Driver 9-17
Group Authorization Settings 9-19
Guest Authorization Set. 9-22
ID Card Settings 9-30
Local Authentication 9-18
Login 2-27
Logout 2-28
Obtain NW User Property 9-25
Overview of User Login Administration 9-2
Password Policy Settings 9-7
PIN Code Authentication 9-31
Printing 9-14
Simple Login Settings 9-27
TWAIN 9-15
User Account Lockout Setting 9-5
WIA 9-16
User Login/Job Accounting 8-66
Job Accounting 9-33
Unknown User Settings 9-53
User Login 9-2
User Property 8-66
Wi-Fi Direct
Printing 4-16
Settings 2-36, 8-49
Wireless Connection 1-9
Wireless Network
Settings 2-32, 8-59
Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) 11-34
WSD Print
Protocol Settings 8-54
WSD Scan 5-32
Protocol Settings 8-54
X
XPS Fit to Page 6-78
Default 8-19
Z
Zoom 6-35
Default 8-19
W
Waste Toner Box 2-4
Waste Toner Box Cover 2-2, 2-4
Weekly Timer Settings 2-40, 8-69
White space 6-54
WIA 11-34
Scanning 5-29
Setting WIA Driver 2-57
Wide A4 8-41
Wi-Fi
Settings 2-32, 8-49
Index-10
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.
Headquarters
225 Sand Road,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA
Phone: +1-973-808-8444
Fax: +1-973-882-6000
Latin America
8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100
Miami, Florida 33166, USA
Phone: +1-305-421-6640
Fax: +1-305-421-6666
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,
Canada
Phone: +1-905-670-4425
Fax: +1-905-670-8116
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,
Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México
Phone: +52-555-383-2741
Fax: +52-555-383-7804
KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP
06543-306, Brazil
Phone: +55-11-2424-5353
Fax: +55-11-2424-5304
KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited
Unit 3 & 5, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2496-5678
Fax: +852-2610-2063
KYOCERA Document Solutions
(China) Corporation
8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Shanghai,200003, China
Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
Fax: +86-21-5302-8300
KYOCERA Document Solutions
(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,
Bangkok 10800,
Thailand
Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Fax: +66-2-586-0278
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Singapore Pte. Ltd.
12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,
Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
Fax: +65-6748-3788
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Hong Kong Limited
KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA
Unit 1,2,4,6,8 & 10, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle
Peak Road Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-3582-4000
Fax: +852-3185-1399
Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile
Phone: +562-2350-7000
Fax: +562-2350-7150
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Taiwan Corporation
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588
KYOCERA Document Solutions
New Zealand Ltd.
Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,
New Zealand
Phone: +64-9-415-4517
Fax: +64-9-415-4597
6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,
Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.
Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.
#3F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,
Seoul, Korea
Phone: +822-6933-4050
Fax: +822-747-0084
KYOCERA Document Solutions
India Private Limited
Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,
Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India
Phone: +91-0124-4671000
Fax: +91-0124-4671001
KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.
Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-654-0000
Fax: +31-20-653-1256
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-5877200
Fax: +31-20-5877260
KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited
Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,
United Kingdom
Phone: +44-118-931-1500
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.
Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy,
Phone: +39-02-921791
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,
Belgium
Phone: +32-2-7209270
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.
Espace Technologique de St Aubin
Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,
France
Phone: +33-1-69852600
Fax: +33-1-69853409
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Deutschland GmbH
Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Germany
Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100
KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH
Altmannsdorferstraße 91, Stiege 1, 2. OG, Top 1, 1120,
Wien, Austria
Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +43-1-86338-400
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB
Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden
Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway
Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Denmark
Phone: +45-70223880
Fax: +45-45765850
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Portugal
Phone: +351-21-843-6780
Fax: +351-21-849-3312
KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.
KYOCERA Document Solutions
South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,
28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain
Phone: +34-91-6318392
Fax: +34-91-6318219
KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,
90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa
Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Fax: +27-11-466-3050
KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy
KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.
Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,
Finland
Phone: +358-9-47805200
Fax: +358-9-47805390
Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,
Russia
Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Fax: +7(495)741-0018
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch
KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,
Switzerland
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950
KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions
Turkey A.S.
Gülbahar Mahallesi Otello Kamil Sk. No:6 Mecidiyeköy
34394 ili stanbul, Turkey
Phone: +90-212-356-7000
Fax: +90-212-356-6725
© 2018 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation
Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
United Arab Emirates
Phone: +971-04-433-0412
KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
Rev.4 2018.1
2NKKDEN204
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement